Nissan 2017 Leaf Car User Manual

2017 LEAF

OWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2017 NISSAN LEAF ZEO-D

ZEO-D

'17

Printing : October 2016 (15)

Publication No.:

Printed in U.S.A.

OM17EA 0ZE0U0

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of

driving pleasure. Please read through this manual

before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide explains details about

maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Ad-

ditionally, a separate Customer Care/

Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain

how to resolve any concerns you may have

with your vehicle, as well as clarify your

rights under your state’s lemon law.

In addition to factory installed options, your ve-

hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-

cessories installed prior to delivery. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for details concerning the particular ac-

cessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It

is important that you familiarize yourself with all

disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions

concerning proper use of such accessories prior

to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for details concerning the particular

accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

A NISSAN certified LEAF dealer knows your

vehicle best. When you require any service or

have any questions, we will be glad to assist you

with the extensive resources available to us.

Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s

Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with

controls and maintenance requirements, assist-

ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-

MINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

• NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

• ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

• ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that could

distract you.

• ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-

propriate child restraint systems. Pre-

teen children should be seated in the

rear seat.

• ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

• ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its perfor-

mance, safety or durability, and may

even violate governmental regulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from modification

may not be covered under NISSAN war-

ranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diag-

nostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the

port during normal driving, for example

remote insurance company monitoring,

remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or

engine reprogramming, may cause inter-

ference or damage to vehicle systems.

We do not recommend or endorse the

use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in de-

vices, unless specifically approved by

NISSAN . The vehicle warranty may not

cover damage caused by any aftermarket

plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features

and equipment available on this model. Features

and equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-

ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,

date of production, region or availability. There-

fore, you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or installed on

your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications, performance, design or compo-

nent suppliers without notice and without obliga-

tion. From time to time, NISSAN may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with the

most accurate information currently available.

Please carefully read and retain with this manual

all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to

ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-

date information regarding your vehicle. Current

versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any

updates can also be found in the Owner section

of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide. If you have ques-

tions concerning any information in your Owner’s

Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For

contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUS-

TOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s

Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your

vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the

procedures must be followed carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the front

of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above call attention to an item in the illustration.

[ ]: Indicates a key/item displayed on the screen.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION

65 WARNING

WARNING

Certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlo-

rate Material - special handling may apply.

For additional information, refer to

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Bluetooth® is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to Visteon.

SiriusXM® services require a

subscription after trial period

and are sold separately or as

a package. The satellite ser-

vice is available only in the

48 contiguous USA and DC.

SiriusXM® satellite service is

also available in Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN certified LEAF dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN certified LEAF dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales

and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly with

comments or questions, please contact the

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our

toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-877-NOGASEV

(1-877-664-2738)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the

following information:

• Your name, address, and telephone number

• Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s side)

• Date of purchase

• Current odometer reading

• Your NISSAN certified LEAF dealer’s name

• Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

[email protected]

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.

com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customer) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE

PROGRAM

Table of

contents

Illustrated table of contents

EV Overview

Charging

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) ..............................0-2

Exterior front ..........................0-3

Exterior rear ..........................0-4

Passenger compartment ...................0-5

Cockpit .............................0-6

Instrument panel........................0-8

Meters and gauges ......................0-9

Motor compartment .....................0-10

Warning and indicator lights ................0-11

1. Rear head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5)

2. Child restraint anchor points (for top tether

strap child restraint) (P. 1-18)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over (if so equipped) air bags (P. 1-39)

4. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and

shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-8, 1-39)

5. Front head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5)

6. Front seats (P. 1-2)

7. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-39)

8. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-39)

9. Occupant classification sensor (weight sen-

sor) (P. 1-39)

10. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags (P. 1-39)

11. Rear seats (P. 1-2)

12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P. 1-18)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Charge port lid

—Charging lid switch (P. 3-19)

—Front camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11)

2. Hood (P. 3-17)

3. Headlight and turn signal lights

— Switch operation (P. 2-43)

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-22)

— Daytime running light system

(if so equipped) (P. 2-45)

4. Wiper and washer switch

— Switch operation (P. 2-39)

— Blade replacement (P. 8-13)

— Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-11)

5. Outside mirrors

—Switch operation (P. 3-23)

— Side camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11)

6. Power windows (P. 2-56)

7. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4)

8. Doors

— Keys (P. 3-2)

— Door locks (P. 3-4)

— NISSAN Intelligent Key® system (P. 3-6)

— Security system (P. 2-36)

9. Tires

— Wheels and tires (P. 8-26, 9-5)

— Flat tire (P. 6-3)

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(P. 2-17, 5-2)

10. Fog lights (if so equipped)

— Switch operation (P. 2-46)

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-22)

11. License plate installation (P. 9-8)

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear view camera (P. 4-3, 4-11)

2. Rear wiper and washer switch

— Switch operation (P. 2-39)

— Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-11)

3. High-mounted stop light

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-22)

4. Rear window defroster (P. 2-42)

5. Solar cell module (if so equipped)

(P. EV-25)

6. Antenna

— Satellite radio antenna (P. 4-61)

7. Rear combination lights

— Bulb replacement (P. 8-22)

8. Rear hatch (P. 3-18)

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Room light (P. 2-59)

2. Sun visors (P. 3-22)

3. Map lights

— Switch operation (P. 2-59)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(without Navigation) microphone (P. 4-62)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

(with Navigation) microphone (Refer to LEAF

Navigation System Owner’s Manual)

4. Sunglasses holder (P. 2-52)

5. Mirror

— Inside rearview mirror (P. 3-23)

— HomeLink® (if so equipped) (P. 2-60)

6. Front heated seat switch (P. 2-48)

7. Front cup holders (P. 2-52)

8. Door armrest

— Power window switch (P. 2-57)

— Power door lock switch (P. 3-4)

— Outside mirror remote control switch

(P. 3-23)

9. Console box (P. 2-52)

10. Emergency tire puncture repair kit (P. 6-3)

11. Cargo area

— Tonneau cover (if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

— EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment)

(P. CH-27)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. TRIP switch for twin trip odometer (P. 2-5)

2. Trip computer switch (P. 2-23)

3. Instrument brightness control switch

(P. 2-42)

4. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight (P. 2-43)

— Turn signal light (P. 2-43)

— Fog light (if so equipped) (P. 2-46)

5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

— Audio control (P. 4-60)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

control (P. 4-62)

6. Steering wheel

— Power steering system (P. 5-20)

— Horn (P. 2-47)

— Driver’s supplemental air bag (P. 1-39)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control switches (P. 5-16)

— ECO switch (P. 2-48)

9. Console box (P. 2-52)

10. Shift lever (P. 5-12)

11. Front heated seat switch (P. 2-48)

12. Tilting steering wheel lever (P. 3-21)

13. Charge port lid switch (P. 3-19)

14. Charge connector lock switch (P. CH-5)

15. Charge timer OFF switch (P. 2-51)

COCKPIT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-49)

17. Heated steering wheel switch (if so

equipped) (P. 2-46)

18. Fuse box cover (P. 8-17)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

1. Side vents (P. 4-22)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-5)

3. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system (Refer to LEAF Naviga-

tion System Owner’s Manual)

— Without navigation system (P. 4-42)

4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

5. Center vents (P. 4-21)

6. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-42)

7. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-39)

8. Glove box (P. 2-52)

9. Heater and air conditioner control (P. 4-22)

10. Front passenger air bag status light,

Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestri-

ans (VSP) system warning light (P. 1-39,

2-14)

11. Auxiliary input jack (P. 4-60)

12. Power outlet (P. 2-51)

13. iPod® connector/USB connector

(P. 4-42)

14. Push-button power switch (P. 5-7)

15. Hood release handle (P. 3-17)

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

This vehicle is equipped with an upper display

and a lower display.

1. Master warning lights (P. 2-18)

2. ECO indicator (P. 2-10)

3. Speedometer (P. 2-6)

4. Clock (P. 2-11)

5. Outside air temperature (P. 2-10)

6. Turn signal/Hazard indicator light (P. 2-22)

7. Li-ion battery capacity level gauge (P. 2-10)

8. Li-ion battery available charge gauge

(P. 2-9)

9. Driving range (P. 2-8)

10. Vehicle information display (P. 2-23)

11. READY to drive indicator light (P. 2-21)

12. ECO mode indicator light

—ECO switch (P. 2-48)

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P. 2-6)

— Trip computer (P. 2-28)

— Shift “P” warning (P. 2-27)

— Indicator for timer (P. 2-36)

13. Power meter (P. 2-7)

14. Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-12)

15. Li-ion battery temperature gauge (P. 2-7)

METERS AND GAUGES

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

1. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-10)

2. 12-volt battery (P. 8-12)

3. Fuse holder (P. 8-17)

4. Fuse/Fusible link holder (P. 8-17)

5. Coolant reservoir cap (P. 8-8)

6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)

7. Fuse/Fusible link holder (P. 8-17)

MOTOR COMPARTMENT

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Warn-

ing

light

Name Page

12-volt battery charge

warning light

2-13

Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light

2-14

Approaching Vehicle

Sound for Pedestrians

(VSP) system warning

light

2-14

BRAKE system warning

light (yellow)

2-15

BRAKE warning light

(red)

2-15

Electric shift control sys-

tem warning light

2-16

Warn-

ing

light

Name Page

Electric Vehicle (EV)

system warning light

2-16

Headlight warning light 2-16

Low battery charge

warning light

2-16

Low tire pressure warn-

ing light

2-17

Master warning light

(red/yellow)

2-18

Power steering warning

light

2-18

Seat belt warning light 2-19

Warn-

ing

light

Name Page

Supplemental air bag

warning light

2-19

Indica-

tor

light

Name Page

ECO mode switch indi-

cator light

2-20

Exterior light indicator

light

2-20

Front fog light indicator

light (if so equipped)

2-20

Front passenger air bag

status light

2-20

High beam indicator

light (blue)

2-20

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

Indica-

tor

light

Name Page

Plug-in indicator light 2-20

Power limitation indica-

tor light

2-20

READY to drive indica-

tor light

2-21

Security indicator light 2-21

Slip indicator light 2-21

Turn signal/hazard indi-

cator lights

2-22

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator

light

2-22

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

EV Overview

The EV (Electric Vehicle) system .............EV-2

Li-ion battery .........................EV-2

Driving with a discharged Li-ion battery .......EV-3

Charging the 12-volt battery..............EV-5

Li-ion battery warmer (if so equipped) ........EV-5

High voltage precautions..................EV-7

High-voltage components ...............EV-7

Road accident precautions ................EV-8

Emergency shut-off system ..............EV-9

EV characteristics ......................EV-9

Noise and vibration ..................EV-10

Life with an EV (scene guide) ..............EV-10

Charging the Li-ion battery ..............EV-10

Before driving your vehicle

(models with navigation system)...........EV-13

Starting your vehicle..................EV-17

Driving the vehicle ...................EV-18

Charging after driving .................EV-22

Efficient use of your vehicle ...............EV-23

Range ..........................EV-23

Improve driving range .................EV-23

Li-ion battery life ....................EV-24

Li-ion battery maintenance ..............EV-25

EV unique information...................EV-25

Meters and indicators .................EV-25

Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians (VSP)

system..........................EV-28

Electric shift control system .............EV-29

LED headlight (low beam) (if so equipped) . . . .EV-29

Solar cell module (if so equipped)..........EV-30

Driving range (if so equipped) ............EV-30

The LEAF is an electric vehicle. Some of the

vehicle’s systems operate differently and have

different operating characteristics than vehicles

equipped with an internal combustion engine. It is

important to carefully review the entire Owner’s

Manual for this reason. The main difference is the

LEAF is powered by electricity. The LEAF does

not require and it is not capable of using gasoline

like a vehicle powered by a traditional internal

combustion engine. The LEAF uses electricity

stored in the lithium ion (Li-ion) battery. The vehi-

cle’s Li-ion battery must be charged with electric-

ity before the vehicle can be driven. As the vehicle

operates, the Li-ion battery gradually discharges.

If the Li-ion battery becomes completely dis-

charged, the vehicle will not operate until it is

re-charged.

This vehicle uses two types of batteries. One is

the 12-volt battery that is the same as the battery

in vehicles powered by gasoline engines, the

other is the Li-ion battery (high voltage).

The 12-volt battery provides power to the vehicle

systems and features such as the audio system,

supplemental restraint systems, headlights and

windshield wipers.

The Li-ion battery provides power to the electric

motor (traction motor) that moves the vehicle.

The Li-ion battery also charges the 12-volt bat-

tery.

The vehicle must be plugged in for the Li-ion

battery to be charged. Additionally, the vehicle

system can extend the vehicle range by convert-

ing driving force into electricity that is stored in

the Li-ion battery while the vehicle is decelerating

or being driven downhill. This is called regenera-

tive braking. This vehicle is considered to be an

environmentally friendly vehicle because it does

not emit exhaust gases, such as carbon dioxide

and nitrogen oxide.

WARNING

Your vehicle contains a sealed Li-ion high

voltage battery. If the Li-ion battery is

disposed of improperly, there is a risk of

severe burns and electrical shock that

may result in serious injury or death and

there is also a risk of environmental dam-

age.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the Li-ion battery:

• Do not expose the vehicle to extreme

ambient temperatures for extended

periods.

• Do not store the vehicle in tempera-

tures below −13°F (−25°C) for more

than seven days.

• Do not leave the vehicle for more than

14 days where the Li-ion battery avail-

able charge gauge reaches a zero or

near zero (state of charge).

• Do not use the Li-ion battery for any

other purpose.

THE EV (ELECTRIC VEHICLE)

SYSTEM LI-ION BATTERY

EV-2 EV Overview

NOTE:

• If the outside temperature is −13°F

(−25°C) or less, the Li-ion battery may

freeze and it cannot be charged or provide

power to run the vehicle. Move the vehicle

to a warm location.

• The capacity of the Li-ion battery in your

vehicle to hold a charge will, like all such

batteries, decrease with time and usage.

As the battery ages and capacity de-

creases, this will result in a decrease from

the vehicle’s initial mileage range. This is

normal, expected, and not indicative of

any defect in your Li-ion battery. NISSAN

estimates that battery capacity will be ap-

proximately 80% of original capacity after

five years, although this is only an esti-

mate, and this percentage may vary (and

could be significantly lower) depending

on individual vehicle and Li-ion battery

usage.

• The Li-ion battery has limited service life,

and when its charging capacity falls below

a specific level, the EV system warning

light will illuminate. Owners should bring

their vehicle in for inspection and possible

battery replacement.

• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for information

about recycling or disposal of the Li-ion

battery. Do not attempt to recycle or dis-

pose of the Li-ion battery yourself.

DRIVING WITH A DISCHARGED

LI-ION BATTERY

When a destination is set in the navigation sys-

tem (if so equipped) that exceeds the available

vehicle range, the navigation system automati-

cally searches the location of nearby charging

stations. When the nearby charging station loca-

tions are displayed, charge the Li-ion battery as

soon as possible.

Warning lights illuminate on the instrument panel

and messages are displayed on the vehicle infor-

mation display to inform you that the Li-ion bat-

tery charge is low. Instructions are also displayed

on the navigation system screen (if so equipped)

to direct you to nearby charging stations.

The vehicle’s range is very limited when these

warning lights illuminate and messages are dis-

played. Follow the instructions on the navigation

system screen (if so equipped) and immediately

charge the vehicle at the nearest charging sta-

tion.

EV Overview EV-3

There are three levels of information that will be

displayed as the Li-ion battery becomes dis-

charged:

1. The following warning lights illuminate on the

instrument panel and messages are displayed

on the vehicle information display at the same

time to indicate low Li-ion battery charge:

• The low battery charge warning light

• The master warning light

• “Li-ion battery low charge warning” warning

message is displayed on the vehicle informa-

tion display.

• For additional information, refer to “Low bat-

tery warning” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

• Messages are displayed on the center dis-

play (if so equipped).

• For additional information, refer to “Low bat-

tery warning” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

• Messages are displayed on the navigation

system screen (if so equipped).

• The driving range flashes

䊊

NOTE:

Due to traffic conditions, it may be diffi-

cult to get to the charging station sug-

gested by the navigation system (if so

equipped). If the Li-ion battery is almost

completely discharged, drive directly to

the nearest charging station.

EV-4 EV Overview

2. If the vehicle is driven and the Li-ion battery

continues to discharge, the driving range on

the instrument panel changes to “— — —”

䊊

Messages are displayed on the navigation sys-

tem screen (if so equipped). For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Low battery warning” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

3. When the power limitation indicator light

illuminates, traction motor output is lim-

ited resulting in reduced vehicle speed. Stop

the vehicle in a safe location before the Li-ion

battery becomes completely discharged and

there is no power available to drive the ve-

hicle. Contact Roadside Assistance Service

shown in your NISSAN Warranty Information

Booklet. For additional information, refer to “If

the Li-ion battery becomes completely dis-

charged” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual.

CHARGING THE 12-VOLT BATTERY

The 12-volt battery is charged automatically us-

ing electricity stored in the Li-ion battery.

When the 12-volt battery is being charged, the

charge status indicator light on the instrument

panel flashes (except when charging the Li-ion

battery or the power switch is in the READY to

drive position). For additional information, refer to

“Charging status indicator lights” in the “Charg-

ing” section of this manual.

While vehicle is driven

The Li-ion battery charges the 12-volt battery as

necessary when the power switch is in the

READY to drive position or ON position.

The 12-volt battery is not charged in the following

conditions.

• When the power switch is in the ACC position.

•

When the power switch is in the ON position and

the shift position is in the N (Neutral) position.

While the vehicle is not in use

When the EV system is off for an extended time,

the 12-volt battery may be automatically charged

for a short period of time on a regular basis.

LI-ION BATTERY WARMER (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

CAUTION

The Li-ion battery warmer does not oper-

ate if the available Li-ion battery charge

is less than approximately 30% and the

charger is not connected to the vehicle.

To help prevent the Li-ion battery from

freezing, do not leave the vehicle in an

environment if temperatures may go be-

low -1°F (-17°C) unless the vehicle is con-

nected to a charger.

The Li-ion battery warmer helps to prevent the

Li-ion battery from freezing and helps to prevent

significant reductions in the Li-ion battery output

when the temperature is cold. The Li-ion battery

warmer automatically turns on when the Li-ion

battery temperature is approximately -1°F

(-17°C) or colder. The Li-ion battery warmer au-

tomatically turns off when the Li-ion battery tem-

perature is approximately 14°F (-10°C) or higher.

EV Overview EV-5

The Li-ion battery warmer uses electrical power

from an external source when a charger is con-

nected to the vehicle. The Li-ion battery warmer

uses electrical power from the Li-ion battery

when the charger is not connected to the vehicle.

NOTE:

• Connect the charger to the vehicle and

place the power switch in the OFF posi-

tion when parking the vehicle if tempera-

tures may go below -1°F (-17°C). This pro-

vides external power to the Li-ion battery

warmer when it operates and does not

discharge the Li-ion battery.

• The charging status indicator lights illumi-

nate in a specific pattern when the Li-ion

battery warmer operates. The charging

status indicator lights use the same pat-

tern to indicate 12-volt battery charging,

Climate Ctrl. Timer operation or Remote

Climate Control operation (models with

navigation system). The charging status

indicator lights do not change if the Li-ion

battery warmer operates at the same time

as the above features. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Charging status indi-

cator lights” in the “Charging” section of

this manual.

• The Li-ion battery warmer uses Li-ion bat-

tery power to operate, even if the vehicle

is connected to a charger when:

– the vehicle’s power switch is in the ON

position.

– there is no electrical power being sup-

plied to the charging equipment.

• When the Li-ion battery warmer is already

in operation using an external power

source, it will continue to use the external

power even if the power switch is placed

in the ON position.

• Vehicle driving range is reduced if the

Li-ion battery warmer operates (Li-ion

battery temperature approximately -1°F

(-17°C) or colder) while driving the vehicle.

You may need to charge the Li-ion battery

sooner than in warmer temperatures.

• The Li-ion battery requires more time to

charge when the Li-ion battery warmer

operates.

• The predicted charging time displayed on

the meter and navigation system (if so

equipped) increases when the Li-ion bat-

tery warmer operates.

• Climate control performance is reduced

when using the Climate Ctrl. Timer or Re-

mote Climate Control (models with navi-

gation system) while the Li-ion battery

warmer operates.

• The Li-ion battery may not charge to the

expected level using the charging timer

when [Start Time] (models with navigation

system) and [End Time] are set while the

Li-ion battery warmer operates.

• Set the Charging Timer [End Time] when

charging in cold weather. The vehicle au-

tomatically determines when to start

charging to fully charge the Li-ion battery,

even if the Li-ion battery warmer operates.

Charging ends before the set end time if

the Li-ion battery is fully charged.

EV-6 EV Overview

HIGH-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS

WARNING

• The EV system uses high voltage up to

approximately DC 400 volt. The system

can be hot during and after starting

and when the vehicle is shut off. Be

careful of both the high voltage and

the high temperature. Follow the

warning labels that are attached to the

vehicle.

• Never disassemble, remove or replace

high-voltage parts and cables as well

as their connectors because they can

cause severe burns or electric shock

that may result in serious injury or

death. High-voltage cables are colored

orange. The vehicle high voltage sys-

tem has no user serviceable parts. It is

recommended that you take your ve-

hicle to a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for any necessary maintenance.

1. Traction motor and reduction gear

2. Traction motor inverter

3. Power delivery module (PDM) (Charger,

DC/DC converter, junction box)

4. High-voltage wire harnesses (colored

orange)

5. Li-ion battery

6. Service plug

HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS

EV Overview EV-7

WARNING

In case of a collision:

• If your vehicle is drivable, pull your

vehicle off the road, push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever, apply

the parking brake and turn the EV sys-

tem off.

• Check your vehicle to see if there are

exposed high-voltage parts or cables.

For their locations, refer to “High volt-

age components” in this section. To

avoid personal injury, never touch

high-voltage wiring, connectors, and

other high-voltage parts, such as in-

verter unit and Li-ion battery. An elec-

tric shock may occur if exposed electric

wires are visible when viewed from

inside or outside of your vehicle.

Therefore, never touch exposed elec-

tric wires.

• If the vehicle receives a strong impact

to the floor while driving, stop the ve-

hicle in a safe location and check the

floor.

• Leaks or damage to the Li-ion battery

may result in a fire. If you discover

them, contact emergency services im-

mediately. Since the fluid leak may be

lithium manganate from the Li-ion bat-

tery, never touch the fluid leak inside

or outside the vehicle. If the fluid con-

tacts your skin or eyes, wash it off

immediately with a large amount of

water and receive immediate medical

attention to help avoid serious injury.

• If a fire occurs in the EV, leave the

vehicle as soon as possible. Only use a

type ABC, BC or C fire extinguisher

that is meant for use on electrical fires.

Using a small amount of water or the

incorrect fire extinguisher can result in

serious injury or death from electrical

shock.

• If your vehicle needs to be towed, do it

with the front wheels raised. If the

front wheels are on the ground when

towing, the traction motor may gener-

ate electricity. This may damage the

components of the EV system and

cause a fire.

• If you are not able to safely assess the

vehicle due to vehicle damage, do not

touch the vehicle. Leave the vehicle

and contact emergency services. Ad-

vise first responders that this is an

electric vehicle.

• In the event of an accident that re-

quires body repair and painting, the

Li-ion battery pack and high voltage

parts such as the inverter, including

the wire harness, should be removed

prior to painting. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service. Li-ion battery

packs exposed to heat in the paint

booth will experience capacity loss.

Damaged Li-ion battery packs may

also pose safety risks to untrained me-

chanics and repair personnel.

ROAD ACCIDENT PRECAUTIONS

EV-8 EV Overview

EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF SYSTEM

The emergency shut-off system is activated and

the high-voltage system automatically turns off in

the following conditions:

- Front and side collisions in which the air bags

are deployed.

- Certain rear collisions.

- Certain EV system malfunctions.

For the above collisions and certain other EV

system malfunctions, the READY to drive indica-

tor light will turn off. For additional information,

refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights and au-

dible reminders” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

The emergency shut-off activates for the above

collisions to minimize risk of an event that could

cause injury or an accident. If the emergency

shut-off system activates, the EV system may not

be switched to the READY to drive position; it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer. Even if the power switch is

switched to the READY to drive position, the

system may shut-off suddenly. Therefore, drive

cautiously to the nearest certified repair facility; it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for service.

WARNING

• Pay special attention to pedestrians.

Because there is no engine noise, pe-

destrians may not know the vehicle is

approaching, moving or about to

move, and may step into the path of

vehicle travel.

• When leaving the vehicle, be sure to

turn off the EV system.

• Be sure to push the P (Park) position

switch on the shift lever and apply the

parking brake when parking because

the vehicle can move when the READY

to drive indicator light is ON. When the

READY to drive indicator light is ON,

do not leave your vehicle in a shift

position other than the P (Park) posi-

tion.

• Keep the brake pedal depressed until

you are ready to drive. When the ve-

hicle is in the D (Drive) position, B or R

(Reverse) position, if you release the

brake pedal and do not depress the

accelerator, the vehicle will creep and

may start abruptly. This may cause se-

rious injury or death.

NOTE:

• The vehicle cannot run with a discharged

Li-ion battery. Repeated acceleration con-

sumes more power from the Li-ion battery

than driving at a steady speed.

• This vehicle is equipped with a regenera-

tive brake system. The primary purpose of

the regenerative brake system is to pro-

vide some power to recharge the Li-ion

battery and extend driving range. A sec-

ondary benefit is “engine braking” that

operates based on Li-ion battery condi-

tions.

• In the D (Drive) position, when the accel-

erator pedal is released, the regenerative

brake system provides some decelera-

tion.

• When you put the shift lever in the B

position and take your foot off the accel-

erator pedal, more regenerative brake is

applied than in the D (Drive) position.

EV CHARACTERISTICS

EV Overview EV-9

• Less deceleration is provided by the re-

generative brake system when the Li-ion

battery is fully charged. The regenerative

brake is automatically reduced when the

Li-ion battery is fully charged to prevent

the Li-ion battery from becoming over-

charged. The regenerative brake is also

automatically reduced when the battery

temperature is high/low (indicated by the

red/blue zones on the Li-ion battery tem-

perature gauge) to prevent Li-ion battery

damage.

• The brake pedal should be used to slow or

stop the vehicle depending on traffic or

road conditions. The vehicle brakes are

not affected by the regenerative brake

system operation.

NOISE AND VIBRATION

You might experience the following noise or vi-

bration as a normal characteristic of this vehicle:

• Traction motor noise from the motor

compartment.

• Water pump and radiator fan noise while

charging.

• Compressor and radiator fan noise when the

Climate Ctrl. Timer or remote climate control

(models with navigation system) is used.

• Relay operation noise and vibration at start-up

and shut-down of the EV system (power switch

placed in the ON and OFF position).

• Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians

(VSP).

This section provides a brief explanation for the

most important LEAF functions. For additional

information, refer to the specific sections of this

manual for detailed explanations of the vehicle

features and operation.

CHARGING THE LI-ION BATTERY

WARNING

The EV system uses a high voltage cur-

rent. Failure to follow the proper han-

dling instructions may cause serious in-

jury or death. Be sure to read the

“Charging” section and follow the proce-

dures and guidelines described.

LIFE WITH AN EV (SCENE GUIDE)

EV-10 EV Overview

EV Overview EV-11

EV-12 EV Overview

BEFORE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE

(MODELS WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM)

The Li-ion battery charging status and the Li-ion

battery warmer (if so equipped) operation can be

checked using an internet enabled smart phone

or personal computer at home. You may also

choose to have SMS messages (text messages)

sent to a cellular phone. Additionally, the vehicle’s

heater and air conditioner can be set to operate

using the Climate Ctrl. Timer function or A/C-

heater remote function, if necessary. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Remote climate con-

trol” in the “Display screen, heater, air

conditioner, audio and phone systems” section of

this manual.

NOTE:

• To check the Li-ion battery charging status

or to use the remote heater and air condi-

tioner using an internet enabled smart

phone or personal computer, the follow-

ing conditions must be met:

– The vehicle must be located in a cellu-

lar phone or smart phone coverage

area.

– The internet enabled cellular phone or

smart phone must be located in a cel-

lular phone or smart phone coverage

area.

– The computer must be connected to

the internet.

– A cellular phone must be used to com-

municate with the vehicle.

– A cellular phone capable of text mes-

saging must be used to receive text

message regarding vehicle charge sta-

tus.

• The remote heater and cooler can adjust

the in-cabin temperature.

• When the charge connector is discon-

nected from the vehicle, the heater and air

conditioner operates using vehicle Li-ion

battery electric power.

• If the remote heater and air conditioner

function and Li-ion battery charging are

performed at the same time, Li-ion battery

charging will take longer than usual due

to the power used to heat or cool the

vehicle.

EV Overview EV-13

Checking Li-ion battery charging

status

The Li-ion battery charge status can be checked

on the NISSAN Data Center website via an inter-

net enabled smart phone or personal computer.

If the Li-ion battery is not sufficiently charged, you

can start charging the Li-ion battery via the re-

mote charge function. For additional information,

refer to “Charging related remote function” in the

“Charging” section of this manual.

EV-14 EV Overview

Operating the climate control system

before driving

The vehicle’s heating and air conditioning system

can be turned on via remote control with an

internet enabled smart phone or personal com-

puter.

This allows the interior of the vehicle to be heated

or cooled while the vehicle is charging. This re-

duces the load on the Li-ion battery while the

vehicle is being driven and can help increase the

vehicle driving range. For additional information,

refer to “Remote climate control” in the “Display

screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone

systems” section of this manual.

EV Overview EV-15

Notification of the Li-ion battery

warmer operation (if so equipped)

You can be notified with the status of the Li-ion

battery warmer operation on the NISSAN Data

Center website via an internet enabled smart

phone or personal computer.

When the power switch is in the OFF position

and the charge connector is not connected, if the

Li-ion battery warmer starts or stops, it notifies

you to connect the charger to the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to the LEAF Navi-

gation System Owner’s Manual.

EV-16 EV Overview

STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Push the power switch.

3. Check that the READY to drive indicator light

illuminates and the start up sound is audible.

For additional information, refer to “Ready to

drive indicator light” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

4. For models with navigation system: If route

guidance is necessary, enter the destination

in the navigation system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to the LEAF Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

5. Check the Li-ion battery level and the esti-

mated driving range shown on the meter. For

additional information, refer to “Driving range”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

NOTE:

• Before driving, compare the driving dis-

tance to the destination displayed on the

navigation system screen (if so equipped)

with the estimated driving range shown

on the meter. Determine if it will be nec-

essary to charge the Li-ion battery before

or while driving to your planned destina-

tion.

• If it is necessary to charge the Li-ion bat-

tery, use the navigation system (if so

equipped) to search for available charging

stations on your planned driving route.

EV Overview EV-17

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Release the parking brake.

3. Move the shift lever into the D (Drive) position.

When released, the shift lever returns to its

original center position.

4. Confirm that the vehicle is in the D (Drive)

position. The indicator next to the “D” by the

shift lever illuminates and “D” is displayed on

the meter.

5. Release the brake pedal.

6. Depress the accelerator pedal and start

driving.

These are the following gear positions for driving

the vehicle forward:

• Use the D (Drive) position for optimum driving

performance.

• Use the B position for downhill driving. When

the B position is used, more regenerative brake

is applied when the accelerator pedal is re-

leased in comparison to the D (Drive) position.

For additional information, refer to “Driving the

vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

EV-18 EV Overview

NOTE:

The regenerative brake converts the vehi-

cle’s forward motion to electric power to

help slow the vehicle.

Use the ECO mode for maximum vehicle range

and for city driving. The ECO mode helps reduce

power consumption by reducing acceleration

when compared to the same accelerator pedal

position in the D (Drive) position.

While the vehicle is being driven you can check

your own ECO drive level on the ECO indicator.

For additional information, refer to “ECO indica-

tor” in the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

EV Overview EV-19

If the low battery charge warning light

illuminates, the Li-ion battery charge is too low for

travel. For additional information, refer to ⬙Low

battery charge warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual. Charge the

Li-ion battery as soon as possible.

EV-20 EV Overview

Parking the vehicle

1. When stopping the vehicle, push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever while de-

pressing the brake pedal. Confirm that the

vehicle is in the P (Park) position by checking

the shift indicator located near the shift lever

or the vehicle information display.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Push the power switch to the OFF position.

4. If a parking lot is equipped with charging

facilities, charge the Li-ion battery as neces-

sary. For additional information, refer to the

“Charging” section of this manual.

EV Overview EV-21

CHARGING AFTER DRIVING

Charging the Li-ion battery

When you return home, connect the vehicle to

the charging station installed at your home using

the normal charge connector.

Charge the vehicle or set the charging timer

function to have the vehicle charge at a specific

time. For additional information, refer to “Charg-

ing timer” in the “Charging” section of this

manual.

1. When the power switch is turned off, the

settings of the charging timer, and the Climate

Ctrl. Timer and the charge connector lock

functions are displayed on the vehicle infor-

mation display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

2. Open the charge port lid and charge port cap.

For additional information, refer to “Charge

port lid” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section of this manual.

3. Connect the charge connector to the vehicle.

4. When the charging timer is turned on, charg-

ing starts at the set time. When the charging

timer is not turned on, charging starts

immediately.

NOTE:

• Charging can be started remotely, even if

the charging timer is set up.

• When you have forgotten to connect the

charge connector at home, there is a func-

tion that can notify you via a text message

capable cellular phone, internet enabled

smart phone or personal computer. For

additional information, refer to “Charging

related remote function” in the “Charg-

ing” section of this manual (models with

navigation system).

• NISSAN recommends that you connect

the normal charge cable when getting out

of the vehicle, even if it is not going to be

used. By doing this, you can get the most

out of the remote climate control (models

with navigation system) and Climate Ctrl.

Timer functions the next time you use the

vehicle.

EV-22 EV Overview

RANGE

The distance you can drive the vehicle (range)

varies considerably depending upon available

charge, weather, temperature, usage, battery

age, topography, and driving style.

Refer to the Monroney label (window sticker) for

the official EPA range. Your actual range can vary,

either initially or as the battery ages and with use

over time. For additional information, refer to “Im-

prove driving range” in this section for information

on the factors that affect vehicle range and how

to use the vehicle to maximize vehicle range.

IMPROVE DRIVING RANGE

Vehicle range depends on a number of factors.

Actual vehicle range will vary depending upon:

• Speed,

• Vehicle load,

• Electrical load from vehicle accessories,

• Traffic and road conditions.

NISSAN recommends the following driving

habits to help maximize vehicle range:

Before driving:

• Follow recommended periodic maintenance.

• Keep tires inflated to correct pressure.

• Keep wheels in correct alignment.

• Pre-heat or pre-cool the interior cabin while the

vehicle is charging.

• Remove unnecessary cargo from the vehicle.

While driving:

• Drive in ECO mode

– The ECO mode helps reduce power con-

sumption by reducing acceleration when

compared to the same accelerator pedal

position in the D (Drive) position.

• Drive at a constant speed. Maintain cruising

speeds with constant accelerator positions or

by using cruise control when appropriate.

• Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Gently press

and release the accelerator pedal for accelera-

tion and deceleration.

• Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

• Avoid frequent stopping and braking. Maintain a

safe distance behind other vehicles.

• Turn off the air conditioner/heater when it is not

necessary.

• Select a moderate temperature setting for heat-

ing or cooling to help reduce power

consumption.

• Use the air conditioner/heater and close win-

dows to reduce drag when cruising at highway

speed.

• Vehicle range may be substantially reduced in

extremely cold conditions (for example, -4°F

(-20°C)).

• Using the climate control system to heat the

cabin when the outside temperature is below

32°F (0°C) uses more electricity and affects

vehicle range more than when using the heater

when the temperature is above 32°F (0°C).

EFFICIENT USE OF YOUR VEHICLE

EV Overview EV-23

• Release the accelerator pedal to slow down

and do not apply the brakes when traffic and

road conditions allow.

– This vehicle is equipped with a regenerative

brake system. The primary purpose of the

regenerative brake system is to provide

some power to recharge the Li-ion battery

and extend driving range. A secondary ben-

efit is “engine braking” that operates based

on Li-ion battery conditions. In the D (Drive)

position, when the accelerator is released,

the regenerative brake system provides

some deceleration and some power to the

Li-ion battery.

LI-ION BATTERY LIFE

The Li-ion battery’s ability to hold a charge, like all

batteries, decreases with battery age and usage

which results in decreased vehicle range when

compared to the vehicle range when the vehicle

was new. This is normal and expected, and does

not indicate a malfunction of the vehicle or Li-ion

battery.

The Li-ion battery’s ability to hold a charge can be

affected by how you drive the vehicle, store the

vehicle, how you charge the Li-ion battery and

Li-ion battery temperature during vehicle opera-

tion and charging.

To maximize the battery’s useful life, use the fol-

lowing driving and charging habits where pos-

sible:

• Avoid exposing a vehicle to extreme ambient

temperatures for extended periods.

• Avoid storing a vehicle in temperatures below

−13°F (−25°C) for more than 7 days.

• Avoid leaving your vehicle for more than 14 days

where the Li-ion battery available charge gauge

reaches a zero or near zero (state of charge).

• Allow the vehicle and Li-ion battery to cool

down after use before charging.

• Park/store your vehicle in cool locations out of

direct sunlight and away from heat sources.

• Avoid sustained high battery temperatures

(caused, for example, by exposure to very high

ambient temperatures or extending highway

driving with multiple quick charges (if so

equipped)) .

• Use the normal charging or trickle charging

methods to charge the Li-ion battery and mini-

mize the use of public Fast Charge or Quick

Charger.

• Avoid repetitive charging of the Li-ion battery

with high battery state of charge.

• Moderate driving.

• Use of ECO mode.

• Do not operate the charging timer repeatedly

while the charge connector is connected to the

vehicle after the Li-ion battery charging is com-

pleted. Doing so may discharge the 12-volt

battery.

• The power of the Li-ion battery can be checked

on the Li-ion battery available charge gauge. For

additional information, refer to “Li-ion battery

available charge gauge” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

EV-24 EV Overview

LI-ION BATTERY MAINTENANCE

In addition to the regular maintenance recom-

mended by NISSAN, the LEAF requires some

special Li-ion battery inspections.

• For additional information, refer to the NISSAN

Warranty Information Booklet for significant

limitations, exclusions and possible voiding of

your warranty resulting from failure to have

these necessary inspections, repairs and/or ad-

justments performed.

• For additional information, refer to the NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide for a detailed

explanation of the Li-ion battery inspection and

intervals.

METERS AND INDICATORS

The vehicle has two displays to provide informa-

tion regarding vehicle operation:

• Upper display

• Lower display

Upper display

Master warning lights:

The master warning lights are located in the

upper display.

The master warning lights illuminate when any

warning lights or indicators illuminate in the lower

display or when messages are displayed on the

vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Master warn-

ing light (red/yellow)” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

EV UNIQUE INFORMATION

EV Overview EV-25

ECO indicator:

This indicator provides instant information about

how efficiently the vehicle is being operated. You

can see how changing your driving style or op-

eration of vehicle accessories affects power con-

sumption.

For additional information, refer to “ECO indica-

tor” in the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

Lower display

Li-ion battery temperature gauge:

This gauge displays the temperature of the Li-ion

battery.

For additional information, refer to “Li-ion battery

temperature gauge” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

Power meter:

This meter displays the actual traction motor

power consumption and the regenerative brake

power provided to the Li-ion battery.

For additional information, refer to “Power meter”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

EV-26 EV Overview

Driving range:

This indicator displays the estimated driving

range (calculated based on a program that ac-

counts for current driving style and operational

conditions) that can be driven before recharging

is necessary.

For additional information, refer to “Driving range”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

Li-ion battery available charge gauge:

This gauge displays the available Li-ion battery

power remaining to drive the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Li-ion battery

available charge gauge” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

Li-ion battery capacity level gauge:

This gauge displays the available capacity of the

Li-ion battery remaining to store power.

For additional information, refer to “Li-ion battery

capacity level gauge” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

EV Overview EV-27

Warning and indicator lights

The EV system uses the following EV specific

warning and indicator lights:

1. Master warning light (red)

2. Master warning light (yellow)

3. 12-volt battery charge warning light

4. Plug-in indicator light

5. READY to drive indicator light

6. Power limitation indicator light

7. EV system warning light

8. Electric shift control system warning light

9. Brake system warning light (yellow)

10. Low battery charge warning light

11. Headlight warning light (if so equipped)

12. Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians

(VSP) system warning light

For additional information, refer to “Warning

lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

APPROACHING VEHICLE SOUND

FOR PEDESTRIANS (VSP) SYSTEM

The Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians

(VSP) system is a function that uses sound to

alert pedestrians of the presence of the vehicle

when it is being driven at a low speed.

When the vehicle starts to move, it produces a

sound.

The sound stops when the vehicle speed is more

than 30 km/h (19 mph) while accelerating.

The sound starts when the vehicle speed is less

than 25 km/h (16 mph) while decelerating.

EV-28 EV Overview

The sound stops when the vehicle stops.

The sound does not stop with the vehicle in the R

(Reverse) position even if the vehicle stops.

WARNING

• If the sound cannot be heard, pedestri-

ans may not notice the oncoming ve-

hicle, which may cause an accident re-

sulting in serious injury or death. It is

recommended that you immediately

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for VSP system inspection.

• If the VSP system warning light illumi-

nates while the power switch is in the

ON position, or in the READY to drive

position, it may indicate the VSP sys-

tem is not functioning properly. Have

the VSP system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer for this service. For

additional information, refer to “Ap-

proaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestri-

ans (VSP) system warning light” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL

SYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with an electric shift

control system. This control system has three

features:

• Smooth and easy shift lever operation.

• To place the vehicle in the P (Park) position,

push the P (Park) position switch on the shift

lever.

• The vehicle automatically applies the P (Park)

position when the power switch is placed in the

OFF position.

For additional information, refer to “Driving the

vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

LED HEADLIGHT (LOW BEAM) (IF

SO EQUIPPED)

This vehicle uses an LED headlight for the head-

light low beam. The LED headlight has the follow-

ing features:

• Low power consumption

• The shape is very compact.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer to replace the headlight.

EV Overview EV-29

SOLAR CELL MODULE (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

This vehicle uses a solar cell module to provide

power to the 12-volt battery. The solar cell mod-

ule only provides power to help maintain the

charge of the 12-volt battery; it will not recharge

a discharged 12-volt battery.

The solar cell module does not provide power to

the Li-ion battery.

For additional information, refer to “Cleaning ex-

terior” in the “Appearance and care” section of

this manual.

NOTE:

The solar cell may not provide full charging

power in the following situations:

• When the intensity of sunlight is weak.

• When the solar cell module is in the

shade.

• When the solar cell module is covered by

leaves or dirt.

DRIVING RANGE (IF SO EQUIPPED)

On the navigation system screen, you can check

the estimated distance the vehicle may be driven

with the available Li-ion battery charge. For addi-

tional information, refer to the LEAF Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

Solar cell module on the rear spoiler

EV-30 EV Overview

Charging

Precautions on charging..................CH-2

Types of charge and how to charge the Li-ion

battery ............................CH-5

How to normal charge .................CH-9

How to trickle charge.................CH-11

How to quick charge (if so equipped) .......CH-15

Charge connector lock switch ...........CH-18

Charging methods ....................CH-21

Charging timer ....................CH-21

Immediate charge...................CH-25

Charging related remote function

(models with navigation system) ..........CH-26

Charging related indicator lights ............CH-27

Charging status indicator lights...........CH-27

EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment)

control box indicator light ..............CH-30

Charging troubleshooting guide ............CH-32

WARNING

• If you use any medical electric devices,

such as an implantable cardiac pace-

maker or an implantable cardiovascu-

lar defibrillator, check with the electric

medical device manufacturer concern-

ing the effects that charging may have

on implanted devices before starting

the charge operation. Charging may

affect the operation.

• Make sure there is no water or foreign

materials in the charge port, charge

connector or electrical plug, and that

they are not damaged or affected by

rust or corrosion. If any of these condi-

tions are noticeable, do not charge the

Li-ion battery. This may result in a

short circuit or electric shock and

could cause a fire which may result in

serious personal injury or death.

• To avoid serious personal injury or

death when the Li-ion battery is charg-

ing, be aware of the following precau-

tions.

– Do not touch the metal contacts of

the charge port, charge connector or

electrical plug.

– Do not touch the vehicle and charger

when there is lightning. A lightning

strike may back feed into the char-

ger causing damage and possible

personal injury or death.

• Make sure the charge connector is re-

moved from the charge port before

starting your vehicle. If the charge con-

nector is only partially engaged and

the connector latch is unlocked, it is

possible to place the EV in the READY

to drive position.

• Do not plug in or unplug the plug with

wet hands and do not stand in water,

liquid or snow. This may cause an elec-

tric shock which may result in serious

personal injury or death.

• Do not disassemble or modify the

charge port or the EVSE (Electric Ve-

hicle Supply Equipment). This may

cause a fire.

• If you notice an unusual odor or smoke

coming from the vehicle, stop charging

immediately.

• Be careful not to allow your hands,

hair, jewelry or clothing to come into

contact with, or get caught in, the trac-

tion motor cooling fan. The cooling fan

can start at any time during charging.

CAUTION

•

To prevent damage to the charging

equipment:

– Do not close the charge port lid

without closing the cap.

– Do not subject the charging equip-

ment to impact.

– Do not pull or twist the charge cable.

– Do not drag the charge cable.

– Do not store and use charging

equipment in locations where the

temperature is over 185°F (85°C).

PRECAUTIONS ON CHARGING

CH-2 Charging

– Do not place the charging equip-

ment close to a heater or other heat

source.

• Make sure the cap is closed on the

charge port when charging is finished.

If the charge port lid is closed when the

cap is open, water or foreign materials

may enter the charge port.

• Do not charge when a vehicle body

cover is in use. This may cause damage

to the charge connector.

• Do not attempt to perform a jump start

on the 12-volt battery at the same time

that the Li-ion battery is being

charged. Doing so may damage the

vehicle or charging equipment and

could cause an injury. For additional

information, refer to “Jump starting” in

the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

• Trickle charging is performed using the

EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equip-

ment) provided with the vehicle.

NISSAN recommends using an AC 110

- 120 volt, 15A, dedicated electrical cir-

cuit and outlet. The dedicated circuit is

used to help prevent circuit damage or

the circuit breaker from tripping due to

the high draw of charging the Li-ion

battery. If the dedicated circuit is not

used, the circuit may cause adverse

interference on MCB (Moulded Circuit

Board) and household electrical appli-

ances such as televisions and audio

systems. If the circuit is shared, and

another electrical device is being used

at the same time the vehicle is charg-

ing, the breaker may trip. A licensed

professional electrician should install

a dedicated circuit if one is not already

available.

NOTE:

• When charging the Li-ion battery, place

the power switch in the OFF position.

When the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the Li-ion battery will not start charg-

ing.

• If the charger is connected to the vehicle

when it is in the READY to drive position,

the power switch automatically changes

to the ON position. Place the power switch

in the OFF position to begin charging.

• For your safety, if the charger is connected

to the vehicle while the power switch is in

the READY to drive position, the vehicle

will automatically switch to the ON posi-

tion. Because charging will not be started

while the power switch is in this position,

be sure to place the power switch in the

OFF position.

• When the ambient temperature is 32°F

(0°C) or less, charging time may be longer

than normal and the level to which the

Li-ion battery can be charged may be less

than at higher temperatures.

• Do not operate the charging timer repeat-

edly while the charge connector is con-

nected to the vehicle after the Li-ion bat-

tery charging is completed. Doing so may

discharge the 12-volt battery. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Charging

timer” in this section. If the Li-ion battery

becomes discharged, charge it immedi-

ately.

Charging CH-3

• The power switch can be set to the ON

position and the climate control and navi-

gation system (if so equipped) can be

used while the Li-ion battery is charging.

However, because these operations con-

sume Li-ion battery power, it will take

longer for the Li-ion battery to become

fully charged. Place the power switch in

the OFF position to help reduce Li-ion

battery charge time.

• If electrical power is interrupted while

charging, charging restarts automatically

when the electrical power is restored.

• It is recommended to keep the charge

cable connected to save Li-ion battery

power, when the heater and air condi-

tioner are operating with remote opera-

tion (models with navigation system).

• If the charge port is frozen, melt the ice

using a hair dryer. After the ice has

melted, charge the Li-ion battery. Forcing

the charge connector to connect may

cause a malfunction.

• If foreign materials have entered the

charge connector and charge port and it is

not possible to connect it, do not attempt

to force the connection. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer. Forcing the charge connec-

tor to connect may cause damage to the

charging equipment and vehicle.

• There is a hole on the charge port for

water drainage. If the water drainage hole

becomes blocked, or if water gets trapped

inside the charge port, do not charge. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer.

CH-4 Charging

TYPES OF CHARGE AND HOW TO

CHARGE THE LI-ION BATTERY

Charging CH-5

CH-6 Charging

This vehicle is an electric vehicle and it requires

electricity to operate. The Li-ion battery is the only

source of power to operate the vehicle. It is

important to conserve power and plan your

charging needs when you drive to avoid com-

pletely discharging the Li-ion battery and being

unable to drive.

There are three methods available to charge the

Li-ion battery:

• Normal charge

• Trickle charge

• Quick charge (if so equipped)

The time to completely charge the vehicle Li-ion

battery varies based on the state of charge of the

Li-ion battery, condition and age of the Li-ion

battery, ambient temperature and condition of the

power source connected to the vehicle. The

charging times provided in this manual are esti-

mates only and may vary.

Normal charge

NISSAN recommends using normal charging for

usual charging of the vehicle. Use of quick charge

should be minimized in order to help prolong

Li-ion battery life.

Normal charging uses an SAE J1772 compliant

charging device that can be installed on a dedi-

cated 220V/240V circuit in your home. NISSAN

recommends the installation of a home charging

dock by a licensed professional electrician.

NISSAN has contracted with a company to assist

you in purchasing and installing a charger. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for additional information.

It takes approximately 5.5 to 9.5 hours (depend-

ing on the charger) in order to charge the Li-ion

battery from discharged (low battery charge

warning light illuminated) to 100% charged.

For additional information, refer to “How to nor-

mal charge” in this section.

Trickle Charge

Trickle charging is not recommended for regular

use. Trickle charge can be used when it is nec-

essary to perform an emergency charge at a

destination such as a friend’s house.

Trickle charge uses the EVSE (Electric Vehicle

Supply Equipment) or an SAE J1772 compliant

cord set to connect the vehicle to an AC 110–

120 volt, 15A dedicated outlet. The outlet should

be protected by a circuit breaker or fuse to avoid

overloading the circuit or other electrical hazard.

It takes approximately 26 hours to charge the

Li-ion battery from discharged (low battery

charge warning light illuminated) to 100%

charged.

For additional information, refer to “How to trickle

charge” in this section.

Quick charge (if so equipped)

Quick charge capability is only available on ve-

hicles manufactured with the quick charge op-

tion, which includes the quick charge port. If your

vehicle does not have such a port, quick charging

cannot be used.

Charging CH-7

A vehicle equipped with a quick charge port is

compatible with most CHAdeMO (Japanese in-

dustry standard) connectors on charging sta-

tions. Charging stations using this standard are

UL certified and safe to use in the US. While

supported by NISSAN, this connector may not

become the US SAE standard.

Quick charging is possible (even several times a

day) if the battery temperature is not near the red

zone. If the battery temperature reaches the red

zone, in order to protect the battery, quick charg-

ing is not allowed and the power limitation mode

will be triggered.

Public charging:

This vehicle is compatible with any public charg-

ing station that is SAE J1772 compliant. If you

attempt to charge from a non-compliant charging

station, you may not receive a complete charge,

or you may not be able to charge at all due to

hardware and software differences. NISSAN is

working with states, municipalities, utility compa-

nies and others to assist in the preparation of

markets and infrastructure. However, NISSAN

makes no representations that public charging

stations will be available in locations where you

wish to operate the vehicle, nor can NISSAN

predict the period of time it may take for public

charging infrastructure to be developed in your

area. Depending on where you live or drive, there

may not be sufficient public charging stations

available to meet your particular needs for driving

range and charging away from your home. Trip

planning is therefore important, and you should

plan trips with these facts in mind.

Quick charge uses public charging stations (up

to 50 kW of power).

The time needed to charge the Li-ion battery from

discharged (low battery charge warning light illu-

minated) to 80% charged using the quick char-

ger depends on many factors including the Li-ion

battery temperature and the type of quick charger

used.

It may take more time to charge the Li-ion battery

using the quick charger if the vehicle is parked in

a cold location (for example, below 32°F (0°C))

for a long time.

The Li-ion battery temperature gauge can be

used to estimate the approximate time needed to

charge the Li-ion battery to 80%.

Li-ion battery

temperature gauge

Estimated charge

time

䊊

3 or fewer seg-

ments illuminated

More than approxi-

mately 90 minutes

䊊

4-5 segments illu-

minated

Approximately 30-

90 minutes

䊊

6-7 segments illu-

minated

Approximately

30 minutes

䊊

8-9 segments illu-

minated

Approximately 30-

60 minutes

䊊

10 or more seg-

ments illuminated

More than approxi-

mately 60 minutes

CH-8 Charging

NOTE:

Charging time is typically limited to 60 min-

utes when using a quick charger. Push the

start switch on the quick charger after it

stops if additional charge time is necessary

to reach an 80% charge.

For additional information, refer to “How to quick

charge” in this section.

Power Limitation Mode

This mode protects the health and operation of

the vehicle’s Li-ion battery. This mode operates in

certain extreme conditions (heat, cold, low state

of charge). Power available to vehicle systems,

including its traction motor, is limited resulting in

limited performance, acceleration and top speed.

Charging may be automatically terminated, espe-

cially with repeated quick charging in extreme hot

weather.

Checking Li-ion battery charge

The three methods for checking the amount of

charge are as follows:

• Check by using the Li-ion battery available

charge gauge on the meter when the power

switch is placed in the ON position. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Li-ion battery avail-

able charge gauge” and “Li-ion battery low

charge warning” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

•

Check by using an internet enabled smart phone

or personal computer. For additional information,

refer to the LEAF Navigation System Owner’s

Manual (models with navigation system).

• Check by using the charging status indicator

light. For additional information, refer to “Charg-

ing status indicator lights” in this section.

NOTE:

• During the charge operation, charge con-

tinues when the power switch is placed in

the ON position.

• The Li-ion battery cannot be charged if the

quick charge connector and the normal

charge connector are connected at the

same time. If another charge connector is

connected mid-charge, charging will stop.

• For safety reasons, it is not possible to

switch to the READY to drive position

while a charge connector is connected.

• During charging, it is possible that the

radio may be inaudible due to noise by the

electromagnetic wave.

HOW TO NORMAL CHARGE

WARNING

• If you use any medical electric devices,

such as an implantable cardiac pace-

maker or an implantable cardiovascu-

lar defibrillator, check with the electric

medical device manufacturer concern-

ing the effects that charging may have

on implanted devices before starting

the charge operation. Charging may

affect the operation.

• Be sure to follow the precautions for

using the charger that can be installed

in your home. Failing to do so could

result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• Do not use any charging equipment

that is not compatible with the LEAF.

Doing so could prevent the Li-ion bat-

tery from charging properly or could

result in damage to the vehicle or Li-

ion battery.

• Normal charge uses the charging device (AC

220 - 240 volt, 16A or 32A) that can be in-

stalled in your home to charge the Li-ion battery.

Charging CH-9

• Immediate charge, charging timer and remote

charge (models with navigation system) can be

performed in the normal charge mode. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Charging meth-

ods” in this section.

• The Genuine NISSAN charging equipment

communicates with the vehicle before Li-ion

battery charging starts. If this communication

does not occur because other equipment is

used, the Li-ion battery will not charge.

• NISSAN recommends that you connect the

normal charge cable when getting out of the

vehicle, even if it is not going to be used. By

doing this, you can get the most out of the

remote climate control (models with navigation

system) and Climate Ctrl. Timer functions the

next time you use the vehicle.

To start normal charge:

1. Push the P (Park) position switch to place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position and apply the

parking brake.

2. When charging the Li-ion battery, place the

power switch in the OFF position. When the

power switch is in the ON position, the Li-ion

battery will not start charging.

3. Open the charge port lid and charge port cap.

For additional information, refer to “Charge

port lid” and “Charge port cap” in the “Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section of

this manual.

4. Connect the charge connector to the charge

port. If it is connected normally, a beep will

sound once.

5. If charging has started or if the battery is

waiting for the charging timer, a beep will

sound twice and the charging status indicator

light display will change. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Charging status indicator

lights” in this section.

CH-10 Charging

To stop normal charge:

1. Ensure that the charge connector lock is not

engaged. For additional information, refer to

“Charge connector lock switch” in this

section.

2. Press the button on the charge connector,

release the lock and remove the charge con-

nector from the charge port and properly

store it.

3. After closing the charge port cap on the

charge port, close the charge port lid.

NOTE:

To stop charging mid-charge, remove the charge

connector. Charging automatically stops.

HOW TO TRICKLE CHARGE

WARNING

• If you use any medical electric devices,

such as an implantable cardiac pace-

maker or an implantable cardiovascu-

lar defibrillator, check with the electric

medical device manufacturer concern-

ing the effects that charging may have

on implanted devices before starting

the charge operation. Charging may

affect the operation.

• In order to avoid an electric shock or

fire due to a short circuit, connect to a

GFI (Ground Fault Interrupter) circuit

breaker and use a waterproof electri-

cal ground socket.

• The NISSAN Genuine EVSE charging

device provided with your vehicle

draws 12 amps continuously while

charging the Li-ion battery. Do not plug

in to any electrical circuit unless it is

inspected by a licensed electrician to

confirm that the electrical circuit can

accept a 12 amp draw. Any electrical

circuit has a much higher likelihood of

being compromised in the following

conditions listed below.

– Improper use of the charger may

result in a fire and serious injury or

death.

– Do not use this charger in structures

more than 40 years old.

– Do not use this charger in structures

using fuse-based circuit protection.

Use only with electrical circuits pro-

tected by circuit breakers.

– Do not use this charger on electrical

circuits with two-prong outlets.

– Do not use charger if outlet appears

damaged or will not hold plug firmly.

– Discontinue charger use immedi-

ately if plug or outlet becomes hot

to the touch or if you notice any

unusual odors.

– Do not use charger if other devices

are plugged into the same circuit.

– Never use extension cords or plug

adapters with charger.

– Do not operate with a damaged

cord.

– Always unplug the charger when not

in use.

– When unplugging, be sure to pull by

the plug and not the cord.

Charging CH-11

– The device has parts that may spark

inside. Do not use it where gasoline,

paint, or flammable liquids are used

or stored.

– Do not use if a malfunction occurs or

if the charger has been damaged in

any manner. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for replacement.

– The charger contains no user ser-

viceable parts. Do not attempt to

repair the charger, doing so will void

your warranty.

• Pass the lower side belt of the EVSE

case securely through the fastener on

the bottom of the luggage board. If the

case suddenly becomes loose, it may

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION

• Only charge using a standard 110 -

120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical out-

let (for example, do not use an electric

generator). Failure to do so may cause

charging to fail and could cause dam-

age to the Li-ion battery charging

equipment due to power surges.

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN charging equipment to charge

the vehicle. Using non-NISSAN equip-

ment could cause the Li-ion battery to

not charge correctly and may damage

the Li-ion battery.

• Trickle charging is performed using an AC 110 -

120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical outlet using

the EVSE provided with the vehicle.

• The Genuine NISSAN EVSE charging equip-

ment or trickle charge cable performs a commu-

nication function with the vehicle before Li-ion

charging starts. If this communication does not

occur because other equipment is used, the

Li-ion battery will not charge.

• Immediate charge, charging timer and remote

charge (models with navigation system) can be

performed in the trickle charge mode. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Charging methods”

in this section.

CH-12 Charging

To start trickle charging:

You can pass a rope through the hole

䊊

on the

control box in order to hang it up while the Li-ion

battery is charging.

1. Push the P (Park) position switch to place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position and apply the

parking brake.

2. When charging the Li-ion battery, place the

power switch in the OFF position. When the

power switch is in the ON position, the Li-ion

battery will not start charging.

3. Open the charge port lid. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Charge port lid” in the “Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section of

this manual.

4. Take out the EV or trickle charge cable from

the rear hatch.

5. Connect the electrical plug to the 110 -

120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical outlet. If it

is connected normally, the green light on the

EV control box indicator light illuminates.

6. Open the charge port cap. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Charge port cap” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section

of this manual.

7. Remove the safety cap from the charge

connector.

Charging CH-13

8. Connect the charge connector to the charge

port. If it is connected normally, a beep will

sound once.

9. If charging has started, or if the Li-ion battery

is waiting for the charging timer, a beep will

sound twice and the charging status indicator

light display will change. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Charging status indicator

lights” in this section.

10. When recharging outside, such as in your

driveway, use a commercially available pad-

lock attached in position

䊊

to prevent theft.

To stop trickle charge:

1. Ensure that the charge connector lock is not

engaged. For additional information, refer to

“Charge connector lock switch” in this

section.

2. Press the button on the charge connector,

release the lock and remove the charge con-

nector from the charge port.

3. Attach the safety cap to the EVSE.

4. Remove the electrical plug from the AC 110 -

120 volt, 15A dedicated electrical outlet.

CH-14 Charging

5. Store in its case.

NOTE:

Perform the following procedure to

store the EVSE in the case.

a. Wind the charge cable into a size that

will allow it to be stored in the case

(approximately 9.8 in (250 mm) in

diameter).

b. Place the EVSE control box into the

back of the case.

c. Place the charge cable and charge

connector into the case in front of the

EVSE control box.

WARNING

Pass the lower side belt of the EVSE case

securely through the fastener on the bot-

tom of the luggage board. If the case

suddenly becomes loose, it may cause

serious injury or death.

6. After closing the cap on the charge port, close

the charge port lid.

NOTE:

To stop charging mid-charge, remove the

charge connector. Charging automatically

stops.

HOW TO QUICK CHARGE (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Quick charge uses public charging stations (up

to 50 kW of power) to charge the battery in a

short period of time.

WARNING

• Always use a quick charger that is

compatible with the LEAF. Using an

incompatible quick charger may cause

a fire or malfunction resulting in seri-

ous personal injury or death.

• Before starting the quick charge, care-

fully read the instructions provided on

the quick charger and make sure the

quick charge connector is properly

connected and locked. Failure to con-

nect or operate the quick charger cor-

rectly could cause damage to the ve-

hicle or the charging equipment.

Charging CH-15

NOTE:

Quick charging is possible (even several

times a day) if the battery temperature is

not near the red zone. If the battery tem-

perature reaches the red zone, in order to

protect the battery, quick charging is not

allowed and the power limitation mode will

be triggered.

When the Li-ion battery available charge

and the Li-ion battery capacity are shown

on the quick charger unit, the readings

may differ from the Li-ion battery avail-

able charge/capacity reading shown on

the vehicle’s display.

To start charging:

1. Push the P (Park) position switch to place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position and apply the

parking brake.

2. When charging the Li-ion battery, place the

power switch in the OFF position. When the

power switch is in the ON position, the Li-ion

battery will not start charging.

3. Open the charge port lid and charge port cap.

For additional information, refer to “Charge

port lid” and “Charge port cap” in the “Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section of

this manual.

4. Align

䊊

with the groove of the charge port

and insert the charge connector.

CH-16 Charging

CAUTION

•

Be sure to insert the charge connector

straight into the quick charge port right

up to the base. Failure to do so may

result in the Li-ion battery not charging

or could cause damage to the charging

equipment.

5. Grasp the lock lever and lock the charge

connector.

6. Follow the instructions on the quick charge

equipment to start charging. When the equip-

ment is properly installed and ready to charge

a beep sounds twice and the charging status

indicator light will change. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Charge status indicator

lights” in this section.

Charging ends in the following situations:

• When charging is complete

• When charging time has exceeded 60 minutes

• When the possible charge time set for the quick

charger is exceeded

NOTE:

• Charging may automatically stop even if it

is not completed.

• If charging stops mid-charge, you can re-

start charging by pressing the start button

on the quick charger again.

• The charge connector is locked to the

charge port during charging and cannot

be disconnected. Follow the instructions

on the quick charge equipment to stop

charging. Confirm charging is stopped by

looking at the indicators on the dash. The

charge connector can be disconnected

from the vehicle when charging is

stopped.

• When quick charging, the Li-ion battery

charging rate is slower as the percentage

of available battery charge increases.

Charging CH-17

To finish charging:

1. Confirm charging is stopped by looking at the

indicators on the dash. The charge connector

can be disconnected from the vehicle when

charging is stopped.

2. Unlock the charge connector, remove from

the vehicle and properly store it.

3. Close the quick charge port cap.

4. Shut the charge port lid.

CAUTION

• As the quick charge connector is

heavier in comparison to the other

charge connectors, allowing it to drop

could cause damage to the vehicle or

charge connector or personal injury.

When removing the connector, be sure

to pull it out straight and as carefully

as possible.

CHARGE CONNECTOR LOCK

SWITCH

The normal or trickle charge connector can be

locked to the normal charge port. The charge

connector lock mode can be selected by using

the charge connector lock switch, AUTO, LOCK

and UNLOCK.

NOTE:

The charge connector lock can be activated

when the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi-

tion and the charge connector is con-

nected. The charge connector lock will not

be activated if the charge connector is not

properly connected.

CH-18 Charging

AUTO mode

To select AUTO mode, push the AUTO side

䊊

the charge connector lock switch. The indicator

light on the switch

䊊

will illuminate.

When AUTO mode is selected, the charge con-

nector is locked while charging is in process. The

charge connector will be unlocked automatically

when charging is complete.

LOCK mode

To select the LOCK mode, push the LOCK side

䊊

of the charge connector lock switch. The

indicator light on the switch

䊊

will illuminate.

When LOCK mode is selected, the charge con-

nector will remain locked. The charge connector

will be unlocked when UNLOCK mode is se-

lected or temporary unlock operation is per-

formed.

UNLOCK mode

To select UNLOCK mode, return the charge con-

nector lock switch to the level position. Make sure

the indicator light on the switch turns off.

When UNLOCK mode is selected, the charge

connector will remain unlocked.

Temporary unlock position:

When the charge connector lock switch is in the

AUTO or LOCK position, the charge connector

lock can be unlocked temporarily by using the

NISSAN Intelligent Key® or the charge port lid

opener switch.

Unlock operation using Intelligent Key

1. Press the charge connector unlock button on

the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The charging status indicator light flashes

three times and a beep sounds three times.

The charge connector lock is unlocked for

30 seconds.

3. After 30 seconds, the charge connector lock

is locked.

The charge connector lock can also be unlocked for

30 seconds when unlocking a door or the rear

hatch (in this case, the charging status indicator

light does not operate). If the lock is operated again

within 30 seconds after unlocking the door/rear

hatch, the charge connector lock is locked again.

Charging CH-19

Unlock operation using charge port

lid opener switch

1. Push the charge port lid opener switch.

2. The charging status indicator light flashes

three times and a beep sounds three times.

The charge connector lock is unlocked for

30 seconds.

3. After 30 seconds, the charge connector lock

is locked.

NOTE:

• Depending on the charging station, the

lock mechanism established by local

standards may not be compatible with

your vehicle. It may not be possible for the

charge connector to lock to your vehicle.

• When the power source is cut off while

charging in AUTO mode, the connector

will be continuously locked for 5 minutes,

then it will be released.

• When timer charging is set with AUTO

mode, the connector will not lock until

charging is started.

• In AUTO mode, the charge connector lock

will only lock during normal charging.

• When the following system(s) are oper-

ated individually or the 12-volt battery is

being charged, the charging connector

lock will not lock:

– Climate Ctrl. Timer

– Remote climate control (if so

equipped)

– Li-ion battery warmer (if so equipped)

If the charge connector cannot be

unlocked

1. Place power switch in the OFF position.

2. Open the hood.

3. Insert a flat head screwdriver or suitable tool

into the screw that is located on the front of

the hood lock.

4. Turn it clockwise to release the charge con-

nector lock.

5. Remove the charge connector.

CH-20 Charging

CHARGING TIMER

Use charging timer to schedule when the Li-ion

battery charges. The vehicle automatically begins

charging at the scheduled times when the charge

connector is connected to the vehicle. The timers

do not need to be reset each time the Li-ion

battery needs charging.

With navigation system (if so

equipped)

The charging timer can save two timer settings

that include the charging start time and end time.

The charging timer can be applied to one of the

timer settings for each day of the week.

The vehicle automatically begins charging at the

scheduled times when the charge connector is

connected to the vehicle. The timers do not need

to be reset each time the Li-ion battery needs to

be charged.

1. Push

and touch “Charging Timer.”

Touch “Estimated Time” to view approximate

time required to reach 100% charge.

2. Touch “Edit Schedule.” Timer charge setting

screen is displayed.

3. Set preferred time and day of the week for

vehicle charging.

4. After entering the information, touch “Save.” A

confirmation screen is displayed.

5. Touch “OK” to confirm the setting, push the

power switch to the OFF position, and then

connect the charge connector to the vehicle.

NOTE:

• Always place the power switch in the OFF

position after setting the charging timers.

When the power switch in the ON position,

the Li-ion battery will not start charging.

• The Li-ion battery may not be charged to

the expected level if the charging timer

start time and end time are set so there is

not enough time to charge the Li-ion bat-

tery.

• When either the charge start time or

charge end time is set, the charging timer

function is activated.

• When only the charging timer end time is

set, the system automatically determines

when to begin charging. The Li-ion battery

may not be charged to the expected level

in the following conditions:

– The Li-ion battery is charged in cold

weather.

– The charge connector is connected to

the vehicle too close to the scheduled

charging end time.

CHARGING METHODS

Charging CH-21

• When only the charging timer end time is

set, the system automatically stops charg-

ing when the Li-ion battery charges to a

full charge. Charging may stop before the

scheduled end time.

• If the charging timer and the Climate Ctrl.

Timer are operating at the same time due

to an overlap of the timer settings, you can

prioritize which function receives electri-

cal power first. For additional information,

refer to the LEAF Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

• When charging is set as the first priority,

the Climate Ctrl. Timer does not start until

10 segments (80%) of the Li-ion battery

available charge gauge are illuminated.

• Even when the climate control is set as the

first priority, the climate control system

will be turned off when the electric de-

mands of the climate control system are

more than can be provided to the Li-ion

battery for charging.

• Some charging stations used to perform

normal charge are equipped with timer

functions. If the charger timer function

and the vehicle timer are both set, and the

two timers are not set to operate at the

same time, it is possible that the charger

will not start or the battery will not be

charged to the level expected.

• If the Li-ion battery warmer (if so

equipped) is operating while the Climate

Ctrl. Timer or remote climate control is

being used, performance of the climate

control system will be reduced.

• The Li-ion battery may not charge to the

expected level using the Charging Timer

when a [Start time] and [End time] are set

while the Li-ion battery warmer (if so

equipped) operates.

• Set only the Charging Timer End time

when charging in cold weather. The ve-

hicle automatically determines when to

start charging to fully charge the Li-ion

battery, even if the Li-ion battery warmer

(if so equipped) operates. Charging ends

before the set End time if the Li-ion bat-

tery is fully charged.

• The 12–volt battery can become dis-

charged if the charging timer is operated

repeatedly between the Li-ion battery

charges when the vehicle is not used for

an extended period of time.

• Charging timer is performed according to

the current time setting on the bottom left

of the display. When setting the charging

timer function, be sure to check that the

current time displayed is correct.

• To turn off the charging timer function,

touch ON on the timer charge setting

screen until the indicator lights are turned

off. Touch SAVE to apply the change. If the

settings shown on the screen are correct,

touch OK. After this operation has been

performed, the indicator disappears and

the charging timer function is turned off.

The start and end time settings are not

deleted, even if the charging timer func-

tion is turned off.

• If the day of the week is not selected on

the timer charge setting screen, the charg-

ing timer will not operate on that day. The

system will wait until the next set charging

time to perform charging.

CH-22 Charging

Timer Charge setting screen:

Two different timer settings can be registered

(one on the left side and another on the right side

of the screen).

1. Touch to turn on/off the timer. The indicator

light will turn on when the timer setting is

turned on.

2. Indicates start/end time of the scheduled

timer charge.

3. Touch corresponding keys to adjust the time

setting.

• -: Touch or touch and hold to decrease the

time.

• +: Touch or touch and hold to increase the

time.

• x: Touch to delete the numbers entered in the

corresponding column.

4. Touch the keys to set the days of the week you

wish to start charging.

5. Touch to save the settings.

Without navigation system

NOTE:

• For the charging timer of models without

navigation system, it allows only the time

that the charging is to STOP to be set and

does not allow the charge START time to

be set. Set the charging end time. The

vehicle automatically calculates when to

start charging based on the condition of

the power source and the estimated time

required for charging to a full level.

Charging CH-23

• When the Charging Timer and the Climate

Ctrl. Timer are set at the same time, the

charging start time moves to an earlier

time.

• Depending on the Li-ion battery condition

and the power source status, charging

may end earlier than the charging end

time. This is not a malfunction.

1. Push the

switch

䊊

on the left side of

the combination meter panel.

2. Push the

switch

䊊

to highlight “Charg-

ing Timer” on the vehicle information display

and then push the switch.

3. The “Charging Timer” screen is displayed. To

change the time or turn the timer on or off,

push the

switch.

CH-24 Charging

To turn the timer on or off, use the switch

to highlight “On” or “Off” and then push the

switch. If “On” is selected, an additional

screen is displayed that allows you to change

the time of the charging timer.

4. The hour portion of the time is highlighted on

the screen. Push the

switch to change

the hour field in increments of one hour. Push

the

switch to move to the minutes field.

5. Push the

switch to change the minute

field in increments of ten minutes. Push the

switch to finish setting the charging

timer.

IMMEDIATE CHARGE

When a charging timer is not turned on, charging

automatically starts when a normal or trickle

charge connector is connected to the vehicle.

Use the immediate charge mode anytime you

want to start charging when a charging timer is

turned on by performing the following:

1. Place the power switch in the OFF position.

Charging CH-25

2. Push the immediate charge switch.

3. Connect the normal or trickle charge cable

when the charging status indicator light

changes to display immediate charge mode.

For additional information, refer to “Charging

status indicator lights” in this section.

NOTE:

• You have 15 minutes to connect a normal

or trickle charge connector to the vehicle

after the immediate charge switch is

pushed. If a charge connector is not con-

nected to the vehicle within 15 minutes,

the vehicle automatically returns to the

previous setting.

• Immediate charge will be available for

15 minutes before returning automatically

to the previous setting.

• To cancel immediate charge mode push

the immediate charge switch again.

• If the charge cable is disconnected, the

Li-ion battery automatically switches to

charging timer. To perform an immediate

charge again, push the immediate charge

switch and connect the charge cable.

• If the charge cable is already connected,

push the immediate charge switch to start

performing an immediate charge.

CHARGING RELATED REMOTE

FUNCTION (MODELS WITH

NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

This vehicle incorporates a communication de-

vice that is called a TCU (Telematics Communi-

cation Unit). The communication connection be-

tween this unit and NISSAN Data Center allows

for various remote function services.

• Li-ion battery status check:

The charging status of the Li-ion battery can

be checked using your personal computer or

internet enabled smart phone even if you are

not in the vehicle.

• Remote charge:

The function of starting the Li-ion battery

charge or starting the heater and air condi-

tioner is available using your personal com-

puter or internet enabled smart phone.

• Unplugged status:

A notification e-mail will be sent to your per-

sonal computer or internet enabled smart

phone if the plug is not connected at the

specific time you selected, after turning off the

power switch.

CH-26 Charging

NOTE:

• Establishing the NissanConnect

service is necessary before using this ser-

vice. For additional information, refer to

the LEAF Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

• To check the Li-ion battery charging status

using an internet enabled smart phone or

personal computer, the following condi-

tions must be met:

– The vehicle must be located in a cellu-

lar phone coverage area.

– The cellular phone must be located in

an area with cellular phone coverage.

– If using a computer, the computer must

be connected to the internet.

– Some cellular phones are not compat-

ible and cannot be used to check the

Li-ion battery charging status. Please

confirm beforehand.

• Certain remote functions require a com-

patible smart phone, which is not included

with the vehicle.

• NissanConnect

EV information system

features are included through a subscrip-

tion service which requires owner consent

to activate. The subscription must be ac-

tive to use these features.

• NissanConnect

EV communications

may be received at a verified e-mail ad-

dress or by SMS/text messaging-enabled

mobile phone.

• Standard text rates and/or data usage

may apply depending on your carrier.

CHARGING STATUS INDICATOR

LIGHTS

The charging status indicator lights

䊊

display the charging status, and are visible from

both inside and outside the vehicle.

CHARGING RELATED INDICATOR

LIGHTS

Charging CH-27

When the normal charge connector lock is

unlocked

All of the indicator lights,

䊊

, will flash and

a beep will sound three times when the normal

charge connector lock switch on the Intelligent

Key or the charge port lid opener switch is

pushed.

When the normal charge connector is con-

nected incorrectly

All of the indicator lights,

䊊

, will flash and

a beep will sound three times within 30 seconds

when the charge connector is connected incor-

rectly to the normal charge port.

Ready for charging timer

If the charging timer is set, the indicator lights

illuminate in order from

䊊

. The indicator

lights turn off after approximately 5 minutes.

Ready for immediate charge

When the power switch is off and if the immedi-

ate charge switch is pushed while the charge

cable is not connected, the indicator light

䊊

illuminates.

This indicator light

䊊

illuminates when the ve-

hicle is ready for immediate charge. You have

15 minutes to connect the charge connector to

the vehicle. If the charge connector is not con-

nected within 15 minutes, the indicator light

䊊

turns off and you must start the immediate charge

mode again to charge the Li-ion battery.

CH-28 Charging

When charging

When the Li-ion battery is being charged, the

charging status indicator lights will change de-

pending on the amount the Li-ion battery is

charged.

*: This value is also displayed by the illumination

of segments of the Li-ion battery available charge

gauge on the instrument panel.

When fully charged

All of the indicator lights

䊊

illuminate when

the Li-ion battery is fully charged to the selected

charging mode level.

The indicator lights turn off after approximately

5 minutes or when the charge connector is re-

moved.

When the indicator light

䊊

flashes

The indicator light

䊊

flashes when the 12-volt

battery is being charged. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Charging the 12-volt battery” in the

“EV overview” section of this manual.

Charging CH-29

The indicator will also flash for up to 5 minutes if

the electrical power to the EVSE is interrupted

during charging. Charging will restart automati-

cally when the electrical power to the EVSE is

restored if the charging connector is connected.

The charge start beep will not sound when

charging restarts.

The indicator will also flash when the following

systems are operating:

• Climate Ctrl. Timer

• Remote climate control (if so equipped)

• Li-ion battery warmer (if so equipped)

When not charging

None of the lights are illuminated when the Li-ion

battery and 12-volt battery are not charging.

EVSE (ELECTRIC VEHICLE SUPPLY

EQUIPMENT) CONTROL BOX

INDICATOR LIGHT

When a trickle charge is being performed, the

charging status is shown by the indicator light

that is on the EVSE control box.

An indicator light also indicates if there is an

EVSE malfunction.

CH-30 Charging

READY CHARGE FAULT Status and action to be taken

䡩䡩䡩Every time the EVSE plug is connected to an outlet, all indicator lights illuminate for 0.5 seconds.

䡩 쏹쏹

After initial processing is completed, when the EVSE is not connected to the vehicle, or the EVSE is con-

nected to the vehicle but charging is not being performed.

䡩䡩쏹 While the battery is being charged

嘷

䡩

쏹쏹

When the ground cable is disconnected

Check the grounding of the outlet being used. If the grounding is normal, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

嘷

䡩

쏹

嘷

䡩

嘷

䡩

When the temperature of the electrical plug is too hot, or the EVSE is unable to detect the temperature of the

electrical plug, check that the electrical plug is connected correctly. If it is connected normally, stop use im-

mediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

䡩 쏹

嘷

䡩

When an electric leakage occurs or the EVSE malfunctions

Stop use immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

䡩 쏹 䡩

When the EVSE malfunctions

Stop use immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

쏹쏹쏹

If the EVSE control box indicator light does not illuminate after connecting the plug to the outlet, check the

GFCI and circuit breaker for the outlet. If either the GFCI or breaker has tripped, the circuit may not be suit-

able for use with EVSE. You should have a licensed electrician inspect and repair the electrical circuit. If the

GFCI breaker is not tripped, stop using the EVSE. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer.

Meaning Light ON Flashing Light OFF

Symbol 䡩嘷

䡩

쏹

Charging CH-31

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Charging cannot be per-

formed.

The vehicle power switch is in the ON position. Before charging, place the vehicle power switch in the OFF position.

Both the normal charge connector and the quick

charge connector (if so equipped) are connected

at the same time.

The normal charge connector and the quick charge connector cannot be connected at the same time.

The Li-ion battery is already fully charged.

Charging cannot be performed if the Li-ion battery is already fully charged. Charging automatically turns

off if the Li-ion battery is fully charged.

The temperature of the Li-ion battery is too hot or

cold to charge.

Confirm the Li-ion battery temperature by checking the Li-ion battery temperature gauge. If the gauge

indicates the Li-ion battery is too hot (red zone) or too cold (blue zone), charging is not possible. Allow

the Li-ion battery to cool or warm up before charging. For additional information, refer to “Li-ion battery

temperature gauge” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

The 12-volt battery is discharged.

The Li-ion battery can be charged if the vehicle electrical systems cannot be turned on. If the 12-volt

battery is discharged, charge or jump start the 12-volt battery. For additional information, refer to “Jump

starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

The vehicle has a malfunction. The vehicle or charger may have a malfunction. Confirm if the warning light on the meter is illumi-

nated. Confirm if the indicator on the charger is indicating a malfunction. If a warning is displayed,

stop charging. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Normal charge cannot be

performed.

There is no electrical power coming from the

outlet.

Confirm that there has not been a power failure. Make sure the breaker is on. If an outlet with a timer

device installed is used, power will only be available at the time set by the timer.

The charge connector is not connected cor-

rectly.

Confirm the charge connector is connected correctly.

Immediate charge cannot be

performed.

Charging timer has been set. Turn off the charging timer. For additional information, refer to “Charging timer” in this section.

Charging does not start because the charge

amount has been set to 80% and the Li-ion bat-

tery is already charged to more than 80%.

Confirm the charge percentage and if you need to charge the Li-ion battery more, change to the

desired charge setting.

CHARGING TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDE

CH-32 Charging

Charging timer cannot be

performed.

The charge cable is not connected. Connect the charge cable.

The time on the clock is wrong. The charging timer function does not start charging based on the clock located on the upper dis-

play. Confirm that the date and time shown on the charging timer screen are the same as the GPS

time and date. If the 12-volt battery is discharged or if the Li-ion battery is disconnected, the time

setting must be updated. There must be a GPS signal to adjust the timer setting clock.

The immediate charge switch has been pushed. Charging timer does not operate when immediate charge is selected.

Charging timer has not been set. Set the charging timer schedule. For additional information, refer to “Charging timer” in this section.

Charging does not start because the charging

timer start time and end time are set and the cur-

rent time is before the set start time.

Confirm when the charging timer time is set to start charging. Change the charging timer setting to the

desired charge time or push the immediate charge switch. For additional information, refer to “Charging

timer” in this section.

Charging does not start because only the charg-

ing timer start time is set and the current time is

after the set start time.

Charging does not start because only the charg-

ing timer end time is set and the current time is

after the set end time.

The charge cable is not connected. Connect the charge cable beforehand.

Charging does not start because the charge

amount has been set to 80% and the Li-ion bat-

tery is already charged to more than 80%.

Confirm the charge percentage and if you need to charge the Li-ion battery more, change to the

desired charge setting.

Charging CH-33

Normal charge stops in the

middle of charging.

There is no power coming from the outlet. There may have been a electrical power failure, or the breaker may have failed. Charging will resume

when the power source is reset.

The charge cable has been disconnected. Check that the charge cable has not been disconnected.

Both the normal charge connector and the quick

charge connector were connected at the same

time.

If the normal charge connector and the quick charge connector are connected at the same time,

charging will be stopped.

Charging timer end time has been reached. When the charging timer is set and the charge end time is reached, charging will be stopped, even

if the Li-ion battery is not fully charged.

The temperature of the Li-ion battery is too hot

or too cold to charge.

Confirm the Li-ion battery temperature by checking the Li-ion battery temperature gauge. If the

gauge indicates the Li-ion battery is too hot (red zone) or too cold (blue zone), charging is not pos-

sible. Allow the Li-ion battery to cool or warm up before charging. For additional information, refer to

“Li-ion battery temperature gauge” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Quick charge cannot be per-

formed.

Incorrect charge connector connection, not fully

inserted or may not be locked.

Check that the charge connector is connected correctly and that it is locked.

The self-diagnostic function of the quick charge

device returns a negative result.

There is a possibility that the vehicle has a malfunction. Stop charging. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Charging does not start because the charge

amount has been set to 80% and the Li-ion battery

is already charged to more than 80%.

Confirm the charge percentage and if you need to charge the Li-ion battery more, change to the

desired charge setting.

The power switch of the quick charger is off. Check the power switch of the quick charger.

Quick charge stops in the

middle of charging.

Charging is stopped by the quick charge timer.

Charging will stop depending on the timer function setting of the quick charge device. If you need to

charge the Li-ion battery more, start the charging procedure again.

The maximum time for quick charge is 30–60 minutes. If you need to charge the Li-ion battery for longer

than this, start the charging procedure again.

The power supply for the quick charger is off. Check whether the power supply for the quick charger is off.

CH-34 Charging

1 Safety–Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ..............................1-2

Front seats .........................1-3

Rear seats .........................1-4

Head restraints/headrests ..................1-5

Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . .1-6

Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ........................1-6

Remove...........................1-6

Install ............................1-7

Adjust............................1-7

Seat belts ...........................1-8

Precautions on seat belt usage .............1-8

Seat belt warning light .................1-11

Pregnant women ....................1-11

Injured persons .....................1-11

Three-point type seat belt with retractor .......1-11

Seat belt extenders ...................1-15

Seat belt maintenance .................1-15

Child safety..........................1-16

Infants ...........................1-17

Small children ......................1-17

Larger children......................1-17

Child restraints........................1-18

Precautions on child restraints ............1-18

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

system ..........................1-21

Rear-facing child restraint installation using latch. .1-24

Rear-facing child restraint installation using the

seat belts .........................1-25

Forward-facing child restraint installation using

latch ............................1-28

Forward-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts.......................1-31

Booster seats ......................1-35

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)..........1-39

Precautions on SRS ..................1-39

Supplemental air bag warning labels .........1-55

Supplemental air bag warning light ..........1-55

WARNING

• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

•

For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat properly. For

additional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this section.

• After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

• Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls. Un-

attended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

• Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. The seat may

move suddenly and could cause loss of

control of the vehicle.

• The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when the

passenger sits well back and straight

up in the seat. If the seatback is re-

clined, the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

SEATS

1-2 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT SEATS

Front manual seat adjustment

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For

additional information about adjusting the seats,

refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Forward and backward:

Pull the bar up and hold it while sliding the seat

forward or backward to the preferred position.

Release the bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining:

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the

vehicle is in the P (Park) position.

Seat lifter (driver’s seat):

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust

the seat height to the preferred position.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

REAR SEATS

Folding

Before folding the rear seats:

• Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks

located on the side wall. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seat belt hook” in this section.

To fold down the seatback, pull the release knob.

To return the seatback to the seating position, lift

up each seatback and push it to the upright

position until it is latched.

WARNING

• Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any objects are on the rear seats.

• Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seats when they are

in the folded-down position. Use of

these areas by passengers without

proper restraints could result in seri-

ous injury or death in an accident or

sudden stop.

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

• When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in an

accident or sudden stop.

1-4 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjustable head restraints/

headrests must be adjusted properly, as

specified in this section. Check the ad-

justment after someone else uses the

seat. Do not attach anything to the head

restraint/headrest stalks or remove the

head restraints/headrests. Do not use

the seat if the head restraint/headrest

has been removed. If the head restraint/

headrest was removed, reinstall and

properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position. Failure to follow these

instructions can reduce the effectiveness

of the head restraint/headrest. This may

increase the risk of serious injury or

death in a collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with a head restraint/headrest.

Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a head restraint.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

• Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/

headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or

non-adjustable.

• Adjustable head restraints/headrests have mul-

tiple notches along the stalks to lock them in a

desired adjustment position.

• The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests

have a single locking notch to secure them to

the seat frame.

• Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of your ear

is approximately level with the center of the

head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

• If the head restraint/headrest has been re-

moved, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in

place before riding in that designated seating

position.

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the head

restraint/headrest.

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the

highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the

seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in

a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position.

1-6 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with

the holes in the seat. Make sure the head

restraint/headrest is facing the correct direc-

tion. The stalk with the notch (notches)

䊊

must be installed in the hole with the lock

knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest

before an occupant uses the seating position.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center

is level with the center of your ears. If your ear

position is still higher than the recommended

alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at

the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed, and you are sitting upright and well back

in your seat with both feet on the floor, your

chances of being injured or killed in an accident

and/or the severity of injury may be greatly re-

duced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all

of your passengers to buckle up every time you

drive, even if your seating position includes a

supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories specify that seat belts be worn at

all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SEAT BELTS

1-8 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

WARNING

• Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be in the rear

seats and in an appropriate restraint.

• The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn prop-

erly.

• Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your face

and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

• Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal inju-

ries in an accident.

• Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

• Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its effec-

tiveness.

• Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

• Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

• If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the power switch is

turned ON with all doors closed and all

seat belts fastened, it may indicate a

malfunction in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

• No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do not

modify the seat belt, add material, or

install devices that may change the

seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering

with the seat belt system may result in

serious personal injury.

• Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have

activated, they cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

• All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service. NISSAN recommends that all

seat belt assemblies in use during a

collision be replaced unless the colli-

sion was minor and the belts show no

damage and continue to operate prop-

erly. Seat belt assemblies not in use

during a collision should also be in-

spected and replaced if either damage

or improper operation is noted.

• All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any

collision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

1-10 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are

equipped with a seat belt warning light. The

warning light, located on the instrument panel,

will show the status of the driver and passenger

seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning

light will not light up if the seat is not

occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as pos-

sible around the hips, not the waist. Place the

shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your

chest. Never put the lap/shoulder belt over your

abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

• Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times.

• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

• For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well back

and upright in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly.

• Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the seat belt retracts

and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle

the seat belt to release the child. If the

seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child by

cutting the seat belt with a suitable

tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,

refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage.

• The retractor is designed to lock during

a sudden stop or on impact. A slow

pulling motion permits the belt to move

and allows you some freedom of move-

ment in the seat.

• If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its

fully retracted position, firmly pull the

belt and release it. Then smoothly pull

the belt out of the retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the re-

tractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and

across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

• Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

• Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers some

freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks

the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly

or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the

seat belt for child restraint installation.

When ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot

be extended again until the seat belt tongue is

detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The

seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat

belt fully retracts. For additional information, refer

to “Child restraints” in this section.

1-12 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated, it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion. It can also change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. For additional

information, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position. If they are not com-

pletely secured, passengers may be in-

jured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the

buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

• When the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor

• When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

• Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict

further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check,

get the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service, or to learn more about seat belt opera-

tion.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Center of rear seat

Selecting correct set of seat belts:

The center seat belt buckle is identified by the

CENTER mark

䊊

. The center seat belt tongue

can be fastened only into the center seat belt

buckle.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position that is best for you. For

additional information, refer to “Precautions on

seat belt usage” in this section.

To adjust, pull the adjustment button

䊊

, and then

move the shoulder belt anchor to the preferred

position

䊊

so that the belt passes over the

center of the shoulder. The belt should be away

from your face and neck, but not falling off of your

shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock

the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

• After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and then try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down to

make sure that it is securely fixed in

position.

• The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position that

is best for you. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent.

1-14 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seat belt hook

When the rear seat belts are not in use and when

folding down the rear seats, hook the rear outer

seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available for purchase.

The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for assistance with purchasing an ex-

tender if an extender is required.

WARNING

• Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

• Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

• Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could

be seriously injured or killed in a colli-

sion or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

• To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild

soap solution or any solution recommended for

cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then wipe with

a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the

shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until

they are completely dry.

• If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide

of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may

retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with

a clean, dry cloth.

• Periodically check to see that the seat belt

and the metal components, such as buckles,

tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors,

work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts

or other damage on the webbing is found, the

entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt

becomes wrapped around a child’s neck

with the ALR mode activated, the child

can be seriously injured or killed if the

seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This

can occur even if the vehicle is parked.

Unbuckle the seat belt to release the

child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuck-

led or is already unbuckled, release the

child by cutting the seat belt with a suit-

able tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

• Rear-facing child restraint

• Forward-facing child restraint

• Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lb (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing

child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints

are available for children who outgrow rear-

facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer

use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal

injury. Always use appropriate child re-

straints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by

using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-

ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat

belt. For additional information, refer to “Child

restraints” in this section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in

this section.

CHILD SAFETY

1-16 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing

child restraint as long as possible up to the height

or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who

outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-

facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child re-

straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur-

er’s instructions for minimum and maximum

weight and height recommendations. NISSAN

recommends that small children be placed in

child restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and always

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-

lation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-

mum height or weight limit allowed by the child

restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit

of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-

straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be

placed in a commercially available booster seat to

obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit

properly, the booster seat should raise the child

so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle portion of

the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross

the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-

der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the

lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A

booster seat can only be used in seating posi-

tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have

a label certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the child can

pass the seat belt fit test below:

• Are the child’s back and hips against the vehicle

seatback?

• Is the child able to sit without slouching?

• Do the child’s knees bend easily over the front

edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?

• Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt

low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt

across mid-chest and shoulder)?

• Is the child able to use the properly adjusted

head restraint/headrest?

• Will the child be able to stay in position for the

entire ride?

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

If you answered no to any of these questions, the

child should remain in a booster seat using a

three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow dif-

ferent guidelines. Check local and state

regulations to confirm your child is using

the correct restraint system before

traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the cargo

areas. The child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in an accident or sudden

stop.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-18 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

•

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

–

The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

–

Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

–

Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

–

NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat. If

you must install a forward-facing

child restraint in the front seat, refer

to “Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts” in

this section.

–

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

–

Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

–

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged anchor-

age, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

–

Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts or harnesses.

–

A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

–

Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

–

Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while in the vehicle.

•

When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or

collision, loose objects can injure oc-

cupants or damage the vehicle.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating sur-

face and buckles before placing a child in

the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem. Some child restraints include rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors.

For additional information, refer to “LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and small children of various sizes. When

selecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

• Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standard 213.

• Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and

seat belt system.

• If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be sure

the child restraint is compatible with your child.

Choose a child restraint that is designed for

your child’s height and weight. Always follow all

recommended procedures.

• If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you may

use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to

install the child restraint (not both at the same

time).

• If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the

vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint.

• Be sure to follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child re-

straints be secured to the designated an-

chor point on the vehicle.

1-20 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND

TETHERS FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH system compat-

ible child restraints. This system may also be

referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have to use

a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint

unless the combined weight of the child and child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the rear outboard seating

positions only. Do not attempt to install a child

restraint in the center position using the LATCH

lower anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installation

of child restraints could result in serious

injury or death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

• Attach LATCH system compatible child

restraints only at the locations shown

in the illustration.

• Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using the

LATCH lower anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

• Inspect the lower anchors by inserting

your fingers into the lower anchor

area. Feel to make sure there are no

obstructions over the anchors such as

seat belt webbing or seat cushion ma-

terial. The child restraint will not be

secured properly if the lower anchors

are obstructed.

• Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured

or killed in a collision.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear

of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your child re-

straint for a label stating that it is compatible with

the LATCH system. This information may also be

in the instructions provided by the child restraint

manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

1-22 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Top tether anchor

WARNING

• If the tonneau cover (if so equipped)

contacts the top tether strap when it is

attached to the top tether anchor, re-

move the tonneau cover (if so

equipped) from the vehicle or secure it

on the cargo floor below its attach-

ment location. If the tonneau cover (if

so equipped) is not removed, it may

damage the top tether strap during a

collision. Your child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision if the

child restraint top tether strap is dam-

aged.

• Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure the

cargo so it does not contact the top

tether strap. Cargo that is not properly

secured or that contacts the top tether

strap may damage the top tether strap

during a collision. Your child could be

seriously injured or killed in a collision

if the child restraint top tether strap is

damaged.

• Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured

or killed in a collision.

Top tether anchor point locations:

Anchor points are located on the back side of the

seatbacks.

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing child restraints with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments or seat belts. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Installing top tether

strap” in this section.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

details.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in “Child safety” and “Child re-

straints” in this section before installing a child

restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments

to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make

sure that the LATCH attachment is properly

attached to the lower anchors.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

1-24 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attachments.

Press downward and rearward firmly in the

center of the child restraint with your hand to

compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat-

back while tightening the webbing of the an-

chor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the seat near the LATCH

attachment path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side

to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see

if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the

LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it again. You

may need to try a different child restraint or try

installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the child

restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure

to use the ALR mode will result in the

child restraint not being properly se-

cured. The restraint could tip over or be

loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front passen-

ger air bag. For additional information,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section.

Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be used

in the rear-facing direction and there-

fore must not be used in the front seat.

Position the child restraint on the seat. Always

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

Rear-facing — step 1 Rear-facing — step 2

1-26 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is

fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the child

restraint. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4 Rear-facing — step 5

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side

to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see

if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as

necessary, or put the restraint in another seat

and test it again. You may need to try a differ-

ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in

all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the seat

belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in “Child safety” and “Child re-

straints” sections of this manual before installing

a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments

to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make

sure that the LATCH attachment is properly

attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. For additional information, refer to “In-

stalling top tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

Rear-facing — step 6

Forward-facing webbing-mounted — step 2

1-28 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. The back of the child restraint should be se-

cured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, remove the head restraint/

headrest to obtain the correct child restraint

fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the

child restraint is removed. For additional

information about head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, refer to “Head restraints/headrests”

in this section.

If the seating position does not have an adjust-

able head restraint/headrest and it is interfer-

ing with the proper child restraint fit, try an-

other seating position or a different child

restraint.

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attachments.

Press downward and rearward firmly in the

center of the child restraint with your knee to

compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat-

back while tightening the webbing of the an-

chor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 2 Forward-facing — step 4

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it for-

ward and check to see if the LATCH attach-

ment holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is prop-

erly secured prior to each use. If the child

restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

Installing top tether strap

䊊

Top tether strap

䊊

Tether anchor point

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (rear bench outboard seating po-

sitions only).

Forward-facing — step 6

1-30 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional infor-

mation about head restraint/headrest

adjustment, removal and installation,

refer to “Head restraints/headrestsⴖ in

this section.

2. Position the top tether strap

䊊

over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point

䊊

on the bottom of the seatback be-

hind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap

䊊

over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point

䊊

on the bottom of the seatback be-

hind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

details.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure

to use the ALR mode will result in the

child restraint not being properly se-

cured. The restraint could tip over or be

loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front passen-

ger air bag. For additional information,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in “Child safety” and “Child re-

straints” sections of this manual before installing

a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in the

front seat, it should be placed in the

forward-facing direction only. Move the

seat to the rearmost position. Child re-

straints for infants must be used in the

rear-facing direction and therefore must

not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be se-

cured against the seatback.

If necessary, adjust the head restraint/

headrest to obtain the correct child restraint

fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed,

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the

child restraint is removed. For additional

information about head restraint/headrest ad-

justment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have a adjust-

able head restraint/headrest and it is interfering

with the proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether

strap, route the top tether strap and secure the

tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat

installation only). For additional information, re-

fer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) —

step 1

Forward-facing — step 3

1-32 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is

fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt. Press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your knee

to compress the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

Forward-facing — step 4 Forward-facing — step 5 Forward-facing — step 6

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side

to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see

if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as

necessary, or put the restraint in another seat

and test it again. You may need to try a differ-

ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in

all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is prop-

erly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt

is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed on the front

passenger seat, push the power switch to

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light

should illuminate. If this

light does not illuminate, refer to “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” in this sec-

tion. Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

Forward-facing — step 8

1-34 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Installing top tether strap

䊊

Top tether strap

䊊

Tether anchor point

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the seat

belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional infor-

mation about head restraint/headrest

adjustment, removal and installation,

refer to “Head restraints/headrestsⴖ in

this section.

2. Position the top tether strap

䊊

over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point

䊊

on the bottom of the seatback be-

hind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap

䊊

over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point

䊊

on the bottom of the seatback be-

hind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a booster

seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-

lision greatly increases:

•

Make sure the shoulder portion of the

belt is away from the child’s face and

neck and the lap portion of the belt

does not cross the stomach.

•

Make sure the shoulder belt is not be-

hind the child or under the child’s arm.

•

A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a lap/

shoulder belt.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

• Choose only a booster seat with a label certify-

ing that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Ve-

hicle Safety Standard 213.

• Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat and

seat belt system.

• Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat.

The seatback must be at or above the center of

the child’s ears. For example, if a low back

booster seat

䊊

is chosen, the vehicle seatback

must be at or above the center of the child’s

ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of

the child’s ears, a high back booster seat

䊊

should be used.

1-36 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

• If the booster seat is compatible with your ve-

hicle, place your child in the booster seat and

check the various adjustments to be sure the

booster seat is compatible with your child. Al-

ways follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode when using a booster

seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in “Child safety”, “Child restraints”

and “Booster seats” sections of this manual be-

fore installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat on the

rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rearmost

position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in the forward-facing direction. Al-

ways follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the

vehicle seat so that it is stable.

Front passenger seat

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest

is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the booster seat is removed. For

additional information about head restraint/

headrest adjustment, removal and installation,

refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this

section.

If the seating position does not have an adjust-

able head restraint/headrest and it is interfer-

ing with the proper booster seat fit, try another

seating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow

the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions

for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be

sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the

top, middle portion of the child’s shoulder. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt. For

additional information, refer to “Three-point

type seat belt with retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, push the power switch to the

ON position. The front passenger air bag sta-

tus light

may or may not illuminate,

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat used. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

Front passenger seat

1-38 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important information

concerning the following systems.

• Driver and front passenger supplemental front-

impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System)

• Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag

• Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover

(if so equipped) supplemental air bag

• Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the chest and pelvic area of the driver and front

passenger in certain side impact collisions. The

side air bags are designed to inflate on the side

where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover (if so equipped) supplemental air

bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side impact collisions.

In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted. If so equipped, in a rollover, the curtain air

bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated

for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash

protection provided by the driver and passenger

seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat

belts should always be correctly worn, and the

occupant should be seated a suitable distance

away from the steering wheel, instrument panel

and door finishers. For additional information,

instructions, and precautions on seat belt usage,

refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

After the power switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

WARNING

• The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover or lower severity

frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

• The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit. For additional information,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section.

•

The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor. The front air bags in-

flate with great force. Even with the

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you

are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-

ting sideways or out of position in any

way, you are at greater risk of injury or

death in a crash. You may also receive

serious or fatal injuries from the front air

bag if you are up against it when it in-

flates. Always sit back against the seat-

back and as far away as practical from

the steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.

1-40 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

• The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage then in-

flates the air bags as needed. Failure

to properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

• The front passenger seat is equipped

with occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) that turns the front

passenger air bag OFF under some

conditions. This sensor is only used in

this seat. Failure to be properly seated

and wearing the seat belt can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. For additional information, refer

to “Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

• Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured if the front

air bag inflates.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

WARNING

• Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them

in your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

• Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

• Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint on the front seat. An

inflating front air bag could seriously

injure or kill your child. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints”

in this section.

Do not lean against doors or windows.

1-42 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted cur-

tain side-impact and rollover (if so

equipped) supplemental air bags:

• The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower

severity side collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the risk

or severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

• The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side air

bag on the side of the seatback of the

front seat or near the side roof rails. Do

not allow anyone sitting in the front

seats or rear outboard seats to extend

their hand out of the window or lean

against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the previous illustrations.

• When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be especially

careful with children, who should al-

ways be properly restrained. Some ex-

amples of dangerous riding positions

are shown in the illustrations.

• Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bag modules

Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)

5. Occupant classification system control unit

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over (if so equipped) supplemental air bag

inflators

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over (if so equipped) supplemental air bag

modules

8. Satellite sensors

9. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the front

passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System, please observe the following

items.

• Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

• Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

• Make sure that there is nothing press-

ing against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed in the

rear seat or an object stored on the

floor.

• Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger seat.

• Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion and

center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

1-44 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

• If a forward-facing child restraint is

installed in the front passenger seat,

do not position the front passenger

seat so the child restraint contacts the

instrument panel. If the child restraint

does contact the instrument panel, the

system may determine the seat is oc-

cupied and the passenger air bag may

deploy in a collision. Also the front

passenger air bag status light may not

illuminate. For additional information

about installing and using child re-

straints, refer to “Child restraints” in

this section.

• Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status

light.

• If you notice that the front passenger

air bag status light is not operating as

described in this section, get the occu-

pant classification system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

• Until you have confirmed with a dealer

that your passenger seat occupant

classification system is working prop-

erly, position the occupants in the rear

seating positions.

• Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status light

may illuminate and the supplemental

air bag warning light may flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

front passenger supplemental front-impact air

bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the

glove box. The front air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, al-

though they may inflate if the forces in another

type of collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in

certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack

of it) is not always an indication of proper front air

bag operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors

information from the crash zone sensor and the

Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Inflator operation is

based on the severity of a collision and seat belt

usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the

occupant classification sensor is also monitored.

Based on information from the sensor, only one

front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on

the crash severity. Additionally, the front passen-

ger air bag may be automatically turned OFF

under some conditions, depending on the weight

detected on the passenger seat and how the seat

belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-

nated. For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in this section.

One front air bag inflating does not indicate im-

proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer to obtain informa-

tion about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a disability,

you may also contact NISSAN. Contact informa-

tion is contained in the front of this Owner’s

Manual.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the head and

chest of the front occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions

or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver and

front passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to

help protect the front occupants. Because of this,

the force of the front air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or

is against, the air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

power switch is in the ON position.

After the power switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

Front passenger air bag and status

light:

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully to

learn how it operates. Proper use of the

seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-

essary for most effective protection. Fail-

ure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats, seat

belts and child restraints can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

1-46 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Status light:

The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)

that turns the front passenger air bag on or off

depending on the weight applied to the front

passenger seat. The status of the front passen-

ger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front

passenger air bag status light

which is

located on the instrument panel.

After the power switch is placed in the “ON”

position, the front passenger air bag status light

on the instrument panel illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off or remains illumi-

nated depending on the front passenger seat

occupied status. The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION

PASSENGER AIR BAG INDICATOR

LIGHT (

) RESULT

FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody

Bag or Child or Child Restraint or

Small Adult in front passenger seat

ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects placed

on the front passenger seat may also cause the

light to operate as described above depending

on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal

operation and troubleshooting of this occupant

classification sensor system, please refer to

“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to

meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle

is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an

occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For

example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,

the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de-

signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regulations is

on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can

be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the front

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however if the occupant takes his/her weight off

the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting up-

right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could cause

the sensors to turn the air bag OFF. Always be

sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt

properly for the most effective protection by the

seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant

classification sensor is designed to operate as

described above to turn the front passenger air

bag OFF for specified child restraints as required

by regulations. Failing to properly secure child

restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the

restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden

stop. This can also result in the front passenger

air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF.

For additional information about proper use and

installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-

tion.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate

in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object’s weight being detected by the occu-

pant classification sensor. Other conditions

could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a

child is standing on the seat, or if two children are

on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light, you

can monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front

passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indi-

cating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the front passenger air bag status light may or

may not be illuminated, depending on the size of

the child and the type of child restraint being

used. If the front passenger air bag status light is

not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might

inflate in a crash), it could be that the child

restraint or seat belt is not being used properly.

Make sure that the child restraint is installed

properly, the seat belt is used properly and the

occupant is positioned properly. If the front pas-

senger air bag status light is still not illuminated,

reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, it is recommended that you

take your vehicle to a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer. A NISSAN certified LEAF dealer can

check system status by using a special tool.

However, until you have confirmed with a dealer

that your air bag is working properly, reposition

the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front

passenger air bag status light will take a few

seconds to register a change in the front passen-

ger seat status. For example, if a large adult who

1-48 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

is sitting the front passenger seat exits the ve-

hicle, the front passenger air bag status light will

go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to

OFF. This is normal system operation and does

not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light

, located in the meter and gauges area

of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blink-

ing or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

Normal operation:

In order for the occupant classification sensor

system to classify the front passenger based on

weight, please follow the precautions and steps

outlined below:

Precautions:

• Make sure that there are no objects weighing

over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or placed

in the seatback pocket.

• Make sure that a child restraint or other object is

not pressing against the rear of the seatback.

• Make sure that the rear passenger is not push-

ing or pulling on the back of the front passenger

seat.

• Make sure that the front passenger seat or

seatback is not forced back against an object

on the seat or floor behind it.

• Make sure that there is no object placed under

the front passenger seat.

Steps:

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with your feet comfortably ex-

tended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat

belts” section of this manual. Front passenger

seat belt buckle status is monitored by the

occupant classification system, and is used

as an input to determine occupancy status.

So, it is highly recommended that the front

passenger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allow-

ing the system to classify the front passenger

before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the

front passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sen-

sor system generally keeps the classifica-

tion locked during driving, so it is important

that you confirm that the front passenger is

properly classified prior to driving. How-

ever, the occupant classification sensor

may recalculate the weight of the occupant

under some conditions (both while driving

and when stopped), so front passenger

seat occupants should continue to remain

seated as outlined above.

Troubleshooting:

If you think the front passenger air bag status light

is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the

front passenger seat:

• Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light

is functioning as intended. The front passen-

ger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then

this may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

• Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably

extended to the floor.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

• A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

• Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

• An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

• An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any

of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle

and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and the vehicle should be

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or

child restraint occupying the front passenger

seat.

This may be due to the following conditions

that may be interfering with the weight sen-

sors:

• Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfort-

ably extended to the floor.

• The child restraint is not properly installed, as

outlined in the “Child restraints” section of

this manual.

• An object weighting over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-

ing on the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

• A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear or the seatback.

• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat. pushing or

pulling on the seatback of the front passen-

ger seat.

• Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

• An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

• An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any

of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle

and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,

child or child restraint should be repositioned

in the rear seat and the vehicle should be

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and

no objects on the front passenger seat the

vehicle should be checked as soon as pos-

sible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this service.

1-50 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions:

WARNING

• Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

• Do not place objects with sharp edges

on the seat. Also, do not place heavy

objects on the seat that will leave per-

manent impressions in the seat. Such

objects can damage the seat or occu-

pant classification sensor (weight sen-

sor). This can affect the operation of

the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

• Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This

can damage the seat or occupant clas-

sification sensor. This can also affect

the operation of the air bag system

and result in serious personal injury.

• Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

• No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

• Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system.

• Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and above

the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air

bag system.

• Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

• Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing ma-

terial on the seat cushion or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that is not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor (weight sen-

sor).

• No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result in

serious personal injury.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

• It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for work

on and around the front air bag sys-

tem. It is also recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for installation of electrical equipment.

The Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be

modified or disconnected. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used on

the air bag system.

• A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the supple-

mental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-mounted

curtain side-impact and rollover (if so

equipped) supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of the

seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags

are located in the side roof rails. All of the

information, cautions, and warnings in this

manual apply and must be followed. The

side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity side collisions, although

they may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher severity

side impact. They are designed to inflate on the

side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not

inflate in certain side collisions on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

If so equipped the curtain air bags are also de-

signed to inflate in certain types of rollover colli-

sions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle

movements (for example, during severe off-

roading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-

dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest and

pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air

bags help to cushion the impact force to the head

of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-

ing positions. They can help save lives and re-

duce serious injuries. However, side air bags and

curtain air bags may cause abrasions or other

1-52 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not

provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate

quickly in order to help protect the occupants in

the outboard seating positions. Because of this,

the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflating can increase the risk of injury if the oc-

cupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag

modules during inflation. The side air bags and

curtain air bags will deflate quickly after the colli-

sion is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-

erate only when the power switch is in the

ON position.

After turning the power switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

• Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

• Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system compo-

nents will be hot. Do not touch them;

you may severely burn yourself.

• No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental inflation of the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

• Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

side air bag and curtain air bag sys-

tems.

• Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material near the

seatbacks or by installing additional

trim material, such as seat covers,

around the side air bag.

• It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for work

around and on the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for installation of

electrical equipment. The Supplemen-

tal Restraint System (SRS) wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side air bag

and curtain supplemental air bag sys-

tems.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to

the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

WARNING

• The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be replaced

together with the retractor and buckle

as a unit.

• If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not

activated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

• No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental activa-

tion of the pretensioner(s). Tampering

with the pretensioner system may re-

sult in serious personal injury.

• It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for work

around and on the pretensioner sys-

tem. It is also recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for installation of electrical equipment.

Unauthorized electrical test equip-

ment and probing devices should not

be used on the pretensioner system.

• If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

Incorrect disposal procedures could

cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,

the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat

occupants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased with the seat

belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed

to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are

used the same way as conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters

allow the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-

sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light

used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner

system. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental air bag warning light” in this sec-

tion. If the operation of the supplemental air bag

warning light indicates there is a malfunction,

have the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

1-54 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

A. Supplemental front-impact air bag system

warning labels

The warning labels are located on the surface of

the sun visors.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, display-

ing

in the instrument panel, monitors the

circuits of the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), satel-

lite sensors, crash zone sensor, occupant classi-

fication sensor, the supplemental front-impact air

bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner

systems. The monitored circuits include air bag

systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the power switch is in the ON position, the

supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for

about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means

the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-

sioner systems need servicing:

• The supplemental air bag warning light remains

on after approximately 7 seconds.

• The supplemental air bag warning light flashes

intermittently.

• The supplemental air bag warning light does not

come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems

may not operate properly. They must be checked

and repaired. It is recommended that you visit the

nearest NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pre-

tensioner systems will not operate in an

accident. To help avoid injury to yourself

or others, have your vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioner(s) are designed to activate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

will remain illuminated after inflation has oc-

curred. Repair and replacement of these systems

should be done only by a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioner(s) and related parts

should be pointed out to the person performing

the maintenance. The power switch should al-

ways be in the LOCK position when working

under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

• Once a front air bag, side air bag or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag

module will not function again and

must be replaced. Additionally, the ac-

tivated pretensioner(s) must also be

replaced. The air bag module and pre-

tensioner(s) should be replaced. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

The air bag modules and pretensioner

system cannot be repaired.

• The front air bag, side air bag and

curtain air bag systems, and preten-

sioner system should be inspected if

there is any damage to the front end or

side portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer for this service.

• If you need to dispose of a supplemen-

tal air bag or pretensioner system or

scrap the vehicle, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service. Correct supple-

mental air bag and pretensioner sys-

tem disposal procedures are set forth

in the appropriate NISSAN Service

Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

• If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should be

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer to

verify it is still functioning correctly.

The OCS should be checked even if no

air bags deploy as a result of the im-

pact. Failure to verify proper OCS func-

tion may result in an improper air bag

deployment resulting in injury or

death.

1-56 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit .............................2-3

Instrument panel........................2-4

Meters and gauges ......................2-5

Speedometer and odometer...............2-6

Li-ion battery temperature gauge ............2-7

Power meter ........................2-7

Driving range........................2-8

Li-ion battery available charge gauge .........2-9

Li-ion battery capacity level gauge ..........2-10

Outside air temperature ................2-10

ECO indicator ......................2-10

Clock ...........................2-11

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ...........................2-12

Checking lights .....................2-13

Warning lights ......................2-13

Indicator lights ......................2-20

Audible reminders ....................2-22

Vehicle information display .................2-23

Indicators for operation .................2-24

Trip computer ......................2-28

Warning information displays .............2-33

Indicators for maintenance ...............2-35

Indicator for timer ....................2-36

Security systems ......................2-36

Vehicle security system .................2-37

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........2-38

Wiper and washer switch .................2-39

Washer operation ....................2-40

Rear wiper operation ..................2-41

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch .......................2-42

Instrument brightness control ...............2-42

Headlight and turn signal switch .............2-43

Headlight switch.....................2-43

Turn signal switch ....................2-45

Fog

light switch (if so equipped) .............2-46

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) .....2-46

Horn ..............................2-47

ECO switch .........................2-48

Heated seat switch .....................2-48

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ......2-49

Charge port lid switch ...................2-50

Charge connector lock switch...............2-50

Charge timer OFF switch .................2-51

Power outlet .........................2-51

Storage ............................2-52

Cup holders .......................2-52

Storage trays.......................2-52

Seatback Pocket (if so equipped)...........2-53

Overhead sunglasses storage .............2-54

Glove box.........................2-54

Console box .......................2-55

Tonneau cover (if so equipped) ............2-55

Stowing golf bags ....................2-56

Windows ...........................2-56

Power windows .....................2-56

Interior lights .........................2-59

Map lights ........................2-59

Room light ........................2-59

Cargo light ........................2-60

HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so equipped) . . .2-60

Programming HomeLink® ...............2-61

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers

and gate openers ....................2-62

Operating the HomeLink® universal transceiver . .2-63

Programming trouble-diagnosis ............2-63

Clearing the programmed information ........2-63

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button . . . .2-64

If your vehicle is stolen .................2-64

1. TRIP switch for twin trip odometer (P. 2-5)

2. Trip computer switch (P. 2-23)

3. Instrument brightness control switch

(P. 2-42)

4. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch

— Headlight (P. 2-43)

— Turn signal light (P. 2-43)

— Fog light (if so equipped) (P. 2-46)

5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

— Audio control (P. 4-60)

— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

control (P. 4-76)

6. Steering wheel

— Power steering system (P. 5-20)

— Horn (P. 2-47)

— Driver’s supplemental air bag (P. 1-39)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control switches (P. 5-16)

— ECO button (P. 2-48)

9. Console box (P. 2-52)

10. Shift lever (P. 5-12)

11. Front heated seat switch (P. 2-48)

12. Tilting steering wheel lever (P. 3-21)

13. Charge port lid switch (P. 3-19)

14. Charge connector lock switch (P. CH-5)

15. Charge timer OFF switch (P. 2-51)

16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-49)

17. Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-46)

18. Fuse box cover (P. 8-17)

COCKPIT

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Side vents (P. 4-22)

2. Meters and gauges (P. 2-5)

3. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system (Refer to LEAF Naviga-

tion System Owner’s Manual)

— Without navigation system (P. 4-42)

4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

5. Center vents (P. 4-21)

6. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-42)

7. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-39)

8. Glove box (P. 2-52)

9. Heater and air conditioner control (P. 4-22 )

10. Front passenger air bag status light,

(P. 1-39) Approaching Vehicle Sound for

Pedestrians (VSP) system warning light

(P. 2-14)

11. Auxiliary input jack (P. 4-60)

12. Power outlet (P. 2-51)

13. iPod® connector/USB connector

(P. 4-42)

14. Push-button power switch (P. 5-7)

15. Hood release handle (P. 3-17)

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-4 Instruments and controls

This vehicle is equipped with an upper display

and a lower display.

1. Master warning lights (P. 2-18)

2. ECO indicator (P. 2-10)

3. Speedometer (P. 2-6)

4. Clock (P. 2-11)

5. Outside air temperature (P. 2-10)

6. Turn signal/Hazard indicator light (P. 2-22)

7. Li-ion battery capacity level gauge (P. 2-10)

8. Li-ion battery available charge gauge

(P. 2-9)

9. Driving range (P. 2-8)

10. Vehicle information display (P. 2-23)

11. READY to drive indicator light (P. 2-21)

12. ECO mode indicator light

— ECO switch (P. 2-48

— Odometer/twin trip odometer (P. 2-6)

— Trip computer (P. 2-28)

— Shift “P” warning (P. 2-27)

— Indicator for timer (P. 2-36)

13. Power meter (P. 2-7)

14. Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-12)

15. Li-ion battery temperature gauge (P. 2-7)

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-5

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

The vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and

odometer. The speedometer is located on the top

of the meter cluster. The odometer is located

within the vehicle information display.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in

miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer

䊊

and twin trip odometer

䊊

are

displayed on the vehicle information display when

the power switch is in the ON or READY to drive

position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the TRIP switch

䊊

located on the left

side of the combination meter panel changes the

display as follows:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

For additional information about the vehicle infor-

mation display, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in this section.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the TRIP switch

䊊

for approximately

1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

2-6 Instruments and controls

LI-ION BATTERY TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the temperature of the Li-ion

battery.

The temperature of the Li-ion battery is within the

normal range when the display is within the zone

䊊

shown in the illustration.

The temperature of the Li-ion battery varies ac-

cording to the outside air temperature and driving

conditions.

NOTE:

• If the display indicates that the tempera-

ture of the Li-ion battery is near the red

zone end of the normal range, reduce ve-

hicle speed to decrease the temperature.

If the indicator is over the normal range,

the power provided to the traction motor

is reduced when the power limitation in-

dicator light is illuminated. Therefore, the

vehicle is not as responsive when the ac-

celerator is depressed while the power

limitation light is illuminated. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Power limita-

tion indicator light” in this section.

• If the outside temperature is extremely

low, the Li-ion temperature gauge may not

display a temperature reading. The ve-

hicle may not be able to be put in the

READY to drive mode. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

POWER METER

This meter displays the actual traction motor

power consumption

䊊

and the regenerative

brake power provided to the Li-ion battery

䊊

The white dot

䊊

in the display moves right or left

depending on demand.

The white dot moves to the right when power is

provided to the traction motor (Li-ion battery dis-

charges).

The white dot moves to the left when power is

generated and provided to the Li-ion battery by

the regenerative brake system (Li-ion battery

charging).

Instruments and controls 2-7

The power meter also indicates if the power

provided to the motor is limited or if regenerative

braking is limited. When power or regenerative

braking is limited, the circles on the display

change from a double circle to a single circle

䊊

Regenerative braking is automatically reduced

when the Li-ion battery is fully charged to prevent

the Li-ion battery from becoming overcharged.

Regenerative braking is also automatically re-

duced when the Li-ion battery temperature is

high/low (indicated by the red/blue zones on the

Li-ion battery temperature gauge) to prevent Li-

ion battery damage.

The more regenerative braking is reduced, the

more double circles change to single circles.

If the Li-ion battery charge is low, power provided

to the traction motor is reduced. Motor output is

also limited if the Li-ion battery temperature is

high/low (indicated by the red/blue zones on the

Li-ion battery temperature gauge) or the Li-ion

battery charge level is low.

The more power provided to the traction motor is

reduced, the more double circles change to

single circles.

DRIVING RANGE

The driving range

䊊

(miles or km) provides an

estimated distance that the vehicle can be driven

before recharging is necessary. The driving range

is constantly being calculated, based on the

amount of available Li-ion battery charge and the

actual power consumption average.

NOTE:

• The driving range display will flash when

the low battery charge warning light illu-

minates. Additionally, if you continue to

drive the vehicle in this state and the Li-

ion battery is close to being completely

discharged, “---” will be displayed. Charge

the Li-ion battery as soon as possible.

When the Li-ion battery is charged, the

original display will be restored.

• After the vehicle is charged, the displayed

driving range is calculated based on the

actual average energy consumption of the

previous driving. The displayed driving

range will vary every time the vehicle is

fully charged.

• The driving range increases or decreases

when the air conditioner, heater or Li-ion

battery warmer (if so equipped) is turned

on or off, or when the ECO mode is se-

lected, or when any other accessory is

turned on or off based on driving.

2-8 Instruments and controls

LI-ION BATTERY AVAILABLE

CHARGE GAUGE

The gauge

䊊

indicates the approximate avail-

able Li-ion battery charge to run the vehicle.

Charge the Li-ion battery before the display

reaches the bottom line.

The low battery charge warning light

illu-

minates when the Li-ion battery available charge

gauge is getting low. Charge as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the display reaches

the bottom line. When the display reaches the

bottom line and the low battery charge light illu-

minates, there is a very small reserve of Li-ion

battery charge remaining.

NOTE:

• The number of segments illuminated on

the Li-ion battery available charge gauge

is determined by the available charge and

the amount of charge the Li-ion battery is

capable of storing at the current tempera-

ture.

• Temperature affects the amount of charge

the Li-ion battery is capable of storing.

The Li-ion battery is capable of storing

less power when the Li-ion battery tem-

perature is cold. The Li-ion battery is ca-

pable of storing more power when the

Li-ion battery temperature is warm. The

number of segments illuminated on the

Li-ion battery available charge gauge can

change based on the amount of power the

Li-ion battery is capable of storing. For

example, when the Li-ion battery be-

comes colder, more segments on the Li-

ion battery available charge gauge illumi-

nate because the available charge is a

greater percentage of the Li-ion battery’s

capability of storing power. When the Li-

ion battery becomes warmer, less seg-

ments on the Li-ion battery available

charge gauge illuminate because the re-

maining energy is a lower percentage of

the Li-ion battery’s capability of storing

power.

Instruments and controls 2-9

LI-ION BATTERY CAPACITY LEVEL

GAUGE

This gauge indicates the amount of charge the

Li-ion battery is capable of storing.

When the capacity of the Li-ion battery de-

creases with age and usage, the level of the

gauge will also decrease.

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE

The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or

°C.

The display may differ from the actual outside

temperature displayed on various signs or bill-

boards.

ECO INDICATOR

The ECO indicator displays how economically

the vehicle is being operated.

The meter display is affected by the following

conditions:

• Accelerator pedal operation

• Brake pedal operation

• Driving conditions

• Traffic conditions

• Heater and air conditioner usage

2-10 Instruments and controls

• Time the vehicle is not moving while the vehicle

is in the READY to drive mode and accessories

are on

Instant ECO driving level

The instant ECO driving level

䊊

is displayed by

the number of bars that increase (more economi-

cal driving) or decrease (less economical driving)

depending on vehicle operation.

Long term ECO driving level

Long term ECO driving is indicated by ECO

TREE symbols. The longer the vehicle is operated

economically, the more segments of the large

ECO TREE symbol

䊊

are displayed. When all of

the segments of the large ECO TREE symbol are

displayed, a small ECO TREE indicator

䊊

is also

displayed, and the large ECO TREE symbol dis-

play is reset. The longer the vehicle is operated

economically, the more small ECO TREE sym-

bols are displayed. The ECO TREE symbols that

were illuminated while driving will turn off when

the vehicle power is turned off. The ECO TREE

symbols are stored in the navigation system to

show long term efficient vehicle operation.

To increase the ECO driving level and for infor-

mation about driving the vehicle efficiently, refer

to “Improve driving range” in the “EV overview”

section of this manual.

CLOCK

For models without navigation system:

Adjust the clock on the setting screen of the

vehicle information display. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Settings” in this section.

If the power supply (12-volt battery) is discon-

nected, the clock will not indicate the correct

time. Readjust the time.

For models with navigation system:

This clock is synchronized with the clock dis-

played on the navigation system screen. For ad-

ditional information, refer to the LEAF Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

Instruments and controls 2-11

12-volt battery charge warning light Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue)

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Master warning light (red/yellow) Plug-in indicator light

Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians

(VSP) system warning light

Power steering warning light Power limitation indicator light

BRAKE system warning light (yellow) Seat belt warning light READY to drive indicator light

BRAKE warning light (red) Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Electric shift control system warning light ECO mode switch indicator light Slip indicator light

Electric Vehicle (EV) system warning light Exterior light indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-12 Instruments and controls

Headlight warning light Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator

light

Low battery charge warning light Front passenger air bag status light

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,

fasten the seat belts and place the power switch

for LEAF to the ON position without starting the

engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on:

The following lights (if so equipped) come on

briefly and then turn off:

(yellow), , or (red),

or , , , , ,

If any light does not come on or operate in a way

other than described, it may indicate a burned-

out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed

on the vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle information display”

in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

12-volt battery charge

warning light

The DC/DC converter converts 400 volt Li-ion

battery voltage to charge the 12-volt battery.

This light illuminates continuously after the bulb is

checked when the power switch is in the ON

position, and turns off when the power switch is

placed in the READY to drive position.

When this warning light illuminates, a chime

sounds and the following warnings are also dis-

played.

• Master warning (red)

• EV system warning light

The following messages also flash on and off on

the vehicle information display.

If the vehicle is being driven; “Stop the vehicle”

and if the vehicle is stopped; “When parked apply

parking brake”. When these messages flash, im-

mediately stop the vehicle in a safe location, pull

the parking brake switch and push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever to place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position. The warning on

the meter and the chime stops when the parking

brake is operated or the vehicle is in the P (Park)

position. Have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13

CAUTION

• The DC/DC converter system may not

be functioning properly if the 12-volt

battery charge warning light illumi-

nates continuously when the power

switch is in the READY to drive posi-

tion. Immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe location and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

• The DC/DC converter system may not

be functioning properly if the 12-volt

warning light illuminates continuously

when the power switch is in the READY

to drive position. Do not charge the

12-volt battery while this warning light

is illuminated. It may lead to a mal-

function of the DC/DC converter sys-

tem. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

NOTE:

• If the vehicle does not go into the READY

to drive position (when the power switch

is pushed and the brake pedal is de-

pressed), jump-start the vehicle to place

the power switch in the READY to drive

position. For additional information, refer

to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

• Do not jump-start the vehicle. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service:

– If the 12-volt charge warning light

turns off when the vehicle is in the

READY to drive mode, the 12-volt bat-

tery may be discharged or there may be

a malfunction in the 12-volt battery re-

lated system.

– If the 12-volt charge warning light con-

tinues to illuminate when the vehicle is

in the READY to drive mode, there may

be a malfunction in the DC/DC con-

verter. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the power switch is in the ON or READY to

drive position, the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off.

This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

power switch is in the READY to drive position, or

while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not

functioning properly. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-

tion is turned off. The brake system then operates

normally, but without anti-lock assistance. For

additional information, refer to “Brake system” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Approaching Vehicle Sound

for Pedestrians (VSP) system

warning light

The Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians

(VSP) system warning light is located on the

instrument panel.

2-14 Instruments and controls

This light comes on if there is a malfunction in the

VSP system.

If the VSP system warning light illuminates while

the power switch is in the ON position, or in the

READY to drive position, it may indicate the VSP

system is not functioning properly. Have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to “Approaching

Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians (VSP) system” in

the “EV overview” section of this manual.

BRAKE system warning light

(yellow)

This light functions for both the cooperative re-

generative brake and the electronically driven

intelligent brake systems. When the power

switch is placed in the ON position or in the

READY to drive position, the light remains illumi-

nated for about 2 or 3 seconds. If the light illumi-

nates at any other time, it may indicate that the

cooperative regenerative brake and/or the elec-

tronically driven intelligent brake systems are not

functioning properly. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service. If the BRAKE warn-

ing light (red) also illuminates, stop the vehicle

immediately and have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

WARNING

• Pressing the brake pedal when the

power switch position is not in the ON

or READY to drive position and/or low

brake fluid level may increase the

stopping distance and braking will re-

quire greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

• If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

• The cooperative regenerative brake

system may not be working properly if

the brake system warning light illumi-

nates when the READY to drive indica-

tor light is ON. If you judge it to be safe,

drive carefully to the nearest service

station for repairs. Otherwise, have

your vehicle towed because driving

could be dangerous.

or BRAKE warning

light (red)

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position or in the READY to drive position, the

light remains illuminated for about a few seconds.

If the light illuminates at any other time, it may

indicate that the hydraulic brake system is not

functioning properly. If the BRAKE warning light

illuminates, stop the vehicle immediately and

have the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

Parking brake indicator:

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the parking

brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the power switch is in the ON position, the

light warns of a low brake fluid level. If this warn-

ing light illuminates, the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) warning light and the brake system warn-

ing light (yellow) also illuminate.

If the light illuminates while the power switch is in

the READY to drive position with the parking

brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform

the following items.

Instruments and controls 2-15

1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is

necessary, add fluid and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to “Brake

fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

WARNING

• Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge

the brake system to be safe, drive care-

fully to the nearest service station for

repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle

towed because driving it could be dan-

gerous.

• Pressing the brake pedal when the

power switch position is not in the ON

or READY to drive position and/or low

brake fluid level may increase the

stopping distance and braking will re-

quire greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

• If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Electric shift control system

warning light

This light illuminates to warn when a malfunction

occurs in the electric shift control system. When

the master warning light illuminates, the chime

sounds and the message, “When parked apply

parking brake”, is displayed on the vehicle infor-

mation display.

When the power switch is in the OFF position,

the chime sounds continuously. Make sure the

parking brake is applied.

Have the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

Electric Vehicle (EV) system

warning light

This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the

following systems. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

• Traction motor and inverter system

• Charge port or on board charger

• Li-ion battery system

• Cooling system

• Shift control system

• Emergency shut off system is activated. For

additional information, refer to “Emergency

shut-off system” in the “EV overview” section of

this manual.

Headlight warning light

This light illuminates if the LED headlights are

malfunctioning. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

Low battery charge warning

light

This light illuminates when the available Li-ion

battery charge is getting low. Charge as soon as

it is possible, preferably before the Li-ion battery

available charge gauge reaches the bottom line.

2-16 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

The low battery charge warning light turns

off immediately before the Li-ion battery is

completely discharged and the vehicle will

stop. If the Li-ion battery becomes com-

pletely discharged, the vehicle must be

charged in order to be driven.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the power switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion, this light illuminates for about 1 second and

then turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-

sure, the warning light will illuminate. A CHECK

TIRE PRESSURE warning also appears on the

vehicle information display.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-

sure to the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure is

adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at

speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning

light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears

each time the power switch is placed in the ON

position as long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section, “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section and “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the power switch is placed

in the ON position. The light will remain on after

the 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service. The CHECK TIRE

PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low

tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate

a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment manu-

facturer for the possible influences be-

fore use.

• If the light does not illuminate when

the power switch is placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer as soon as pos-

sible for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-17

• If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury or

death. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly inflated,

have the vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer for this service.

• When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as a spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer as soon as possible for tire re-

placement and/or system resetting.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

• The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

• If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

• Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

(red/yellow)

There are two types of master warning lights:

yellow and red. These lights illuminate if any

warning lights or indicator lights are illuminated or

if various vehicle information warnings appear in

the vehicle information display.

Yellow master warning light

The yellow master warning light is located on the

upper display.

This light illuminates when a yellow warning light on

the lower display is illuminated or when a message

is displayed on the vehicle information display.

Red master warning light

The red master warning light is located on the

upper display.

This light illuminates when a red warning light on

the lower display is illuminated or when a warning

is displayed on the vehicle information display.

Power steering warning light

When the power switch is in the ON position, the

electric power steering warning light illuminates

and turns off when the power switch is placed in

the READY to drive position. This indicates the

electric power steering system is operational.

2-18 Instruments and controls

If the electric power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the READY to drive indicator light is

ON, it may indicate the electric power steering

system is not functioning properly and may need

servicing. Have the electric power steering sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this service.

When the electric power steering warning light

illuminates while the READY to drive indicator is

ON, the power assist to the steering will cease

operation but you will still have control of the

vehicle. At this time, greater steering efforts are

required to operate the steering wheel, especially

in sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-

ing system” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Seat belt warning light

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the

power switch is placed in the ON position, and

will remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is

fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound

for approximately 6 seconds unless the driver’s

seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front passenger

will illuminate if the seat belt is not fastened when

the front passenger’s seat is occupied. The front

passenger seat belt warning light does not acti-

vate until 5 seconds after the power switch is in

the ON position.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in

the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual for pre-

cautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning

light

After turning the power switch to the ON posi-

tion, the supplemental air bag warning light will

illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the supple-

mental front air bag and supplemental side air

bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or

pretensioner seat belt are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-

sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle

must be taken to your nearest NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer.

• The supplemental air bag warning light remains

on after approximately 7 seconds.

• The supplemental air bag warning light flashes

intermittently.

• The supplemental air bag warning light does not

illuminate at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental

Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioners may

not function properly.

For additional information, refer to “Supplemental

restraint system (SRS)” in the “Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pre-

tensioner systems will not operate in an

accident. To help avoid injury to yourself

or others, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer as soon as

possible.

Instruments and controls 2-19

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

ECO mode switch indicator light

This indicator illuminates within the vehicle infor-

mation display when the ECO mode has been

activated.

The ECO mode is used to help extend that range

that the vehicle can be driven by consuming less

power.

Exterior light indicator light

This indicator illuminates when the headlight

switch is turned to the AUTO,

position and the front parking lights, side marker

lights, tail and license plate lights are on. The

indicator turns off when these lights are turned

off.

Front fog light indicator light (if

so equipped)

The front fog indicator light illuminates when the

front fog lights are on. For additional information,

refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status light (located

on the center of the instrument panel) will be lit

and the passenger front air bag will be turned off

depending on how the front passenger seat is

being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,

refer to “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts

and supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This light illuminates when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

Plug-in indicator light

This light illuminates when the charge connector

is connected to the vehicle and blinks during

charging.

NOTE:

If the charge connector is connected to the

vehicle, the power switch can not be placed

in the READY to drive position.

Power limitation indicator light

When the power limitation indicator light is illu-

minated, the power provided to the traction motor

is reduced. Therefore the vehicle is not as re-

sponsive when the accelerator is depressed

while the power limitation light is illuminated.

When this light comes on, the warning display

appears on the center display and the vehicle

information display. Follow the instructions pro-

vided on the center display.

This light illuminates in the following conditions.

• Li-ion battery available charge is extremely low

• Li-ion battery temperature is very low (approxi-

mately −4°F (−20°C)

• When the temperature of the EV system is high

(motor, inverter, coolant system, Li-ion battery

etc.)

• When the EV system has a malfunction.

If the low battery charge warning light is illumi-

nated, charge the Li-ion battery as soon as pos-

sible.

2-20 Instruments and controls

If this indicator illuminates because the Li-ion

battery is cold due to low outside temperatures,

move the vehicle to a warmer location. The Li-ion

battery temperature may be increased by charg-

ing the Li-ion battery.

If the light illuminates when the EV system be-

comes hot due to continuous hill climbing, either

continue driving at a slower safe speed or stop

the vehicle in a safe location. If this indicator does

not turn off, have the system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

The indicator illuminates when a part in the EV

system has malfunctioned. If the indicator illumi-

nates in a situation other than those described

above, or if it does not turn off, there may be a

system malfunction. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

WARNING

Power limitation mode can result in re-

duced power and vehicle speed. The re-

duced speed may be lower than other

traffic, which could increase the chance

of a collision. Be especially careful when

driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a

safe driving speed, pull to the side of the

road in a safe area. Charge the Li-ion

battery if the charge is low or allow the

Li-ion battery to cool.

READY to drive indicator light

The READY to drive indicator light illuminates

when the EV system is powered and the vehicle

may be driven.

The READY to drive indicator light will turn off in

the following conditions.

• Certain EV system malfunctions.

• The READY to drive indicator light turns off

immediately before the Li-ion battery is com-

pletely discharged. If the Li-ion battery be-

comes completely discharged, the vehicle must

be charged in order to be driven. For additional

information, refer to “Low battery charge warn-

ing light” in this section.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the power switch is in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function indi-

cates the security system equipped on the ve-

hicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning, this light

will remain on while the power switch is in the ON

position. For additional information, refer to “Se-

curity systems” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system or

the traction control system is operating, thus

alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction

limits. The road surface may be slippery.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is

normal. The light will blink for a few seconds after

the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on when you place

the power switch in the ON position.

The light will turn off after approximately 2 sec-

onds if the system is operational. If the light does

not come on, have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

This light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This light illuminates when the Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates that the VDC system is not operating.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a brake pad requires replacement, it will

make a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first

occur only when the brake pedal is depressed.

After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will

always be heard even if the brake pedal is not

depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as

possible if the warning sound is heard.

Electric shift control system reminder

chime

If an improper shift operation is performed, for

safety reasons a chime will sound and at the

same time, depending on the conditions, the

operation will be canceled or the shift position

will switch to the N (Neutral) position.

For additional information, refer to “Driving the

vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver’s side door is

opened while the power switch is pushed to the

ON or ACC position.

Make sure that the power switch is pushed to the

OFF position, and take the Intelligent Key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

The light reminder chime will sound when the

driver side door is opened with the light switch in

the

or position, and the power

switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the

vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking

brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to

zero.

Power switch reminder chime

The power switch reminder chime will sound

when the driver’s door is opened while the power

switch is in the ON or READY to drive position.

Push the power switch to the OFF position.

Seat belt warning chime

The seat belt warning chime will sound for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely

fastened.

12-volt battery charge warning chime

If the 12-volt battery charge warning light illumi-

nates, the chime will sound when a warning mes-

sage is displayed on the vehicle information dis-

play on the lower display.

2-22 Instruments and controls

When the chime sounds, immediately stop the

vehicle in a safe location and push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever and apply the

parking brake. The 12-volt battery charge warning

light turns off on the lower display and the chime

will stop when the parking brake is applied or the

vehicle is placed in the P (Park) position. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this service. For

additional information, refer to “12-volt battery

charge warning light” in this section.

The vehicle information display

䊊

is located in

the lower display, and it displays charging related

information, Average electricity consumption/

Instant electricity consumption, Average vehicle

speed, Driving distance/Driving time (Elapsed

time), shift position indicator, the cruise control,

the Intelligent Key operation information and

other warnings and information.

For additional information about the odometer,

refer to “Odometer/twin trip odometer” in this

section.

For additional information about the cruise con-

trol, refer to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

For additional information about the NISSAN In-

telligent Key® system, refer to “NISSAN Intelli-

gent Key® system” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Instruments and controls 2-23

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. READY to drive position operation

indicator

This indicator appears while the vehicle is in the P

(Park) position. This indicator means that the EV

system will start when the power switch is

pressed with the brake pedal depressed.

2. Key is not detected warning

This warning appears in either of the following

conditions.

No key inside the vehicle:

This warning appears when the door is closed

with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle

and the power switch in the ACC or ON position.

Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the

vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key:

This warning appears when the power switch is

placed in the ON, ACC or READY to drive posi-

tion and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized

by the system. You cannot place the power

switch in the READY to drive position with an

unregistered key. Use an Intelligent Key that has

been registered.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key® system” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

3. Intelligent Key® battery discharge

indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key

battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the battery with

a new one. For additional information, refer to

“NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery replacement”

in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of

this manual.

2-24 Instruments and controls

4. EV system operation for discharged

Intelligent Key® system indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key

battery is running out of power and when the

Intelligent Key system and vehicle are not com-

municating normally.

If this indicator appears, touch the power switch

with the Intelligent Key while depressing the

brake pedal. For additional information, refer to

“NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

5. Door/rear hatch open warning

(power switch is in the ON position)

This warning appears if any of the doors and/or

the rear hatch are open or not closed securely.

The vehicle icon indicates which door or the rear

hatch is open on the display. Make sure that all of

the doors and the rear hatch are closed.

This warning also appears alternating with SHIFT

⬙P⬙ warning while the driver’s door is opened with

the shift position in any position other than the P

(Park) position. For additional information, refer to

“SHIFT ⬙P⬙ warning” in this section.

6. Intelligent Key® system warning

This warning appears if there is a malfunction in

the Intelligent Key system.

If this warning appears while the power switch

position is in the ON position, the power switch

can not be switched to the READY to drive posi-

tion. If this warning appears while the power

switch is in the READY to drive position, the

vehicle can be driven. However, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer.

7. Driver alert

This warning appears when the previously set

time for a break is reached. You can set the time

for up to 6 hours in the setting menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Trip computer” in this

section.

8. Low outside air temperature

The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or

°C in the range of −20°F to 140°F (−30°C to

60°C).

The outside air temperature mode includes a low

temperature warning feature. If the outside air

temperature is below 37°F (3°C), the warning is

displayed on the screen.

The outside temperature sensor is located in

front side of the vehicle. The sensor may be

affected by road, wind directions and other driv-

ing conditions. The display may differ from the

actual outside temperature or the temperature

displayed on various signs or billboards.

9. Low washer warning (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the washer tank fluid

is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as

necessary. For additional information, refer to

“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

10. Light reminder warning

This warning appears when the power switch is

turned to the OFF position but the headlight

switch is still ON. Turn off the headlight switch.

11. Plug-in indicator

This indicator appears when the charge connec-

tor is connected.

If the charge connector is connected to the ve-

hicle, the power switch can not be placed in the

READY to drive position.

Instruments and controls 2-25

12. Remove charge connector

warning

This warning appears when the power switch is

in the ACC or ON position and if the power

switch is pushed to the READY to drive position

with the brake pedal depressed, while the charge

connector is inserted to the vehicle. Remove the

charge connector.

13. Electric shift control system

warning

This message appears if there is a malfunction in

the electric shift control system.

This message appears when the parking brake is

not applied, even after the vehicle has been

parked. The master warning light (red) also illu-

minates and the chime sounds.

If the power switch cannot be placed in the OFF

position, apply the parking brake and then place

the power switch in the OFF position.

Apply parking brake. The message in the vehicle

information display turns off and the chime stops.

Have the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for

this service.

14. Shift control system (T/M) warning

This warning appears if there is a malfunction in

the electric shift control system but operation of

the electric shift control is still possible. The mas-

ter warning (yellow) light also illuminates and the

chime sounds. When this occurs, check the shift

position indicator by the shift lever or vehicle

information display in the meter to make sure that

shifting has been performed properly. It is recom-

mended that you contact a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer as soon as possible.

15. Shift position warning

This warning appears if the system cannot detect

the shift position. Make sure the vehicle is placed

in a position properly.

The master warning light (yellow) also illuminates

and the chime sounds. Check the shift position of

the vehicle.

16. Li-ion battery low charge warning

This indicator appears when the Li-ion battery is

getting low. The low battery charge warning light

and the master warning light (yellow) also illumi-

nate. Charge the Li-ion battery as soon as pos-

sible. The [i] symbol is shown on the vehicle

information display, this indicates that further in-

formation is available on the navigation display

(models with navigation system). Check the navi-

gation display (models with navigation system)

for further information and instructions.

17. Power limitation warning

This display appears when the Li-ion battery ca-

pacity is getting too low to move the vehicle or if

there is any reason to limit traction power (Li-ion

battery low or high temperature etc.). The power

limitation indicator light and the master warning

light (yellow) also illuminate. The [i] symbol is

shown on the vehicle information display. This

indicates that further information is available on

the navigation display (models with navigation

system). Check the navigation display (models

with navigation system) for further information

and instructions.

18. DC/DC converter warning

This warning appears if the DC/DC converter

system is not functioning properly. The 12-volt

battery charge warning (red) light and the master

warning light also illuminate. Stop the vehicle in a

safe location and contact a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer.

2-26 Instruments and controls

19. Apply parking brake warning

This warning appears if the DC/DC converter

system is not functioning properly after the “Stop

the vehicle” message above. If this warning ap-

pears on the display, stop the vehicle in a safe

location and push the P (Park) position switch on

the shift lever. If the parking brake is applied, the

display turns off. Contact a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer.

20. Check tire pressure warning

This warning appears when the low tire pressure

warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire

pressure is detected. The warning appears each

time the power switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion as long as the low tire pressure warning light

remains illuminated.

If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and

adjust the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label. For additional information,

refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in this

section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

21. Cruise control indicator

Cruise main switch indicator

This indicator is displayed when the cruise con-

trol main switch is pushed. When the main switch

is pushed again, the indicator disappears. When

the cruise control main switch indicator is dis-

played, the cruise control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator

This indicator is displayed while the vehicle

speed is controlled by the cruise control system.

If the indicator blinks while the power switch is in

the READY to drive position, it may indicate that

the cruise control system is not functioning prop-

erly. Have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to “Cruise con-

trol” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

22. Shift position indicator

The shift position indicator shows the vehicle

position when the power switch is in the ON or

READY to drive position. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

23. SHIFT ⬙P⬙ warning

This warning appears alternately with door/rear

hatch open warning when the driver’s door is

opened with the shift position in any position

other than the P (Park) position. For additional

information, refer to “Door/rear hatch open warn-

ing (power switch is in the ON position)” in this

section. If this warning appears, push the P (Park)

position switch and place in the P (Park) position.

24. Intelligent Key error

After the power switch is pushed to the ON

position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds

and then turns off.

The I-Key System Error message warns of a

malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the

light comes on while the motor is stopped, it may

be impossible to start the motor.

If the light comes on while the motor is running, you

can drive the vehicle. However in these cases, it is

recommended that you contact a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for repair as soon as possible.

25. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehicle speed is

above 4 mph (7km/h) and the parking brake is

applied.

Instruments and controls 2-27

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are located on the

left side of the combination meter panel. To op-

erate the trip computer, push the following

switches:

䊊

switch

䊊

switch

When the power switch is pushed to the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the

switch

䊊

Each time the

switch

䊊

is pushed, the

display will change as follows:

Charging time → Energy economy → State of

charge → Average speed → Driving distance and

elapsed time→ Setting → Warning check*

NOTE:

* This item is available only when a

warning is displayed. Select this menu

to see details of warnings.

Charging time

Displays the estimated time to a full Li-ion charge

based on the Charging Mode selected.

The time needed to charge the Li-ion battery

charges based on:

• Outside temperature

• Li-ion battery temperature

• Available electrical power supplied to the

charger

2-28 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

• Immediately after charging has finished,

the charge time will be displayed as “--:--”.

• The estimated charging time stops updat-

ing if the air conditioner is turned on while

the Li-ion battery is charging. The esti-

mated charging time updates approxi-

mately 15 minutes after the air condi-

tioner is turned off.

• The 6 kW and the 3 kW charging time

typically shows different times to reach a

full charge.

• However, the same charging time may be

shown for both the 6 kW and the 3 kW

based on the Li-ion battery state of charge

and battery temperature.

• The system may automatically slow the

battery charge to prevent the battery from

becoming overcharged.

• Charging may finish sooner than the dis-

played charging time.

Energy economy

Average energy economy:

The average energy economy mode shows the

average energy economy since the last reset.

Resetting the average energy economy is done

by pushing and holding the

switch

䊊

for

longer than 1 second. (The average speed is also

reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 0.3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the

display shows “----”.

Instant energy economy:

The instant energy economy mode shows the

instant energy economy via a moving bar graph.

When regenerated energy is being stored in the

Li-ion battery while driving, the instant energy

economy display will show the maximum value.

Instruments and controls 2-29

State of charge (%)

Displays the vehicle’s current state of charge.

Average speed

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed (mph or km/h) since the last reset.

The average speed (mph or km/h) can be reset by

pushing the

switch

䊊

for longer than

1 second.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. For the

first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows

“----”.

Driving distance and elapsed time

Driving distance:

The driving distance mode shows the total distance

(miles or km) the vehicle has been driven since the

last reset. The distance can be reset by pushing the

switch

䊊

for longer than 1 second. (The

elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the time since the

last reset. The displayed time can be reset by

pushing the

switch

䊊

for longer than

1 second. (The driving distance is also reset at

the same time.)

2-30 Instruments and controls

Settings

Settings cannot be accessed while driving.

The message, “Settings can only be ac-

cessed when stationary” is also displayed

on the vehicle information display.

The

switch

䊊

and switch

䊊

are

used in the settings mode.

Push the

switch

䊊

to scroll through the

menus.

Push the

switch

䊊

to select a menu.

Skip:

Push the

switch

䊊

to move to the warning

check mode.

Push the

switch

䊊

to select other menus.

Clock:

The clock can be adjusted in this menu.

• Back

Select this submenu to return to the top page

of the settings mode.

• Set Clock

Adjust the time (hour and minute) of the clock.

For models without a center display, the day of

the week can also be set to use it for the “Climate

Ctrl. Timer” setting. For additional information,

refer to “Climate Ctrl. timer” in the “Display

screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone

systems” section of this manual.

• 24/12Hr (24 hours or 12 hours)

Select either the 24-hour clock display or the

12-hour display.

Maintenance:

There are five submenus under the maintenance

menu.

• Back

Select this submenu to return to the top page

of the settings mode.

• Tire

Select this submenu to set or reset the dis-

tance for replacement of the tires.

• Other -1, -2 and -3

Select this submenu to set or reset the dis-

tance for replaceable/maintenance items. Up

to three other items can be monitored. Set

other items if required.

Alarms:

The alarms menu can be set to notify the follow-

ing items. There are three submenus under the

alarms menu.

• Back

Select this submenu to return to the top page

of the settings mode.

• Driver Alert

Select this submenu to set the driver alert

period.

Instruments and controls 2-31

• Outside temp

Select this submenu to display the low outside

temperature (On or Off).

Units:

Units displayed can be set for the following items

on this menu.

• Back

Select this submenu to return to the top page

of the settings mode.

• Temperature

• Speed

Language:

Select this submenu to choose the language

displayed.

To return to the top page of the settings mode,

select “BACK”.

Effects:

The start up sound can be selected or turned off

from this menu.

Five submenus under the effects menu.

When a menu item is selected, the selected

sound plays.

• Back

Select this submenu to return to the top page

of the settings mode.

• Sound 1

• Sound 2

• Sound 3

• Off

Factory settings:

Select this menu to reset all values to the factory

default settings except for the odometer settings.

NOTE:

When resetting to the factory settings, all

previous settings made are restored to the

default settings.

To return to the top page of the settings mode,

select “BACK”.

Warning check

Skip:

Push the

switch

䊊

to move to the Esti-

mated charge time display.

Push the

switch

䊊

to select another

menu.

Detail:

This item is available only when a warning is

displayed.

Select this menu to see details of warnings.

2-32 Instruments and controls

WARNING INFORMATION DISPLAYS

Low battery warning

When the low battery charge warning light

and the master warning light (yellow) illu-

minate, the system displays a message on the

navigation system screen that warns the driver

that the Li-ion battery power level is low.

1. The notification is displayed on the upper left

side of the STATUS screen. Touch [Show] to

display the screen showing detailed

information.

2. The system displays a message screen and

announces the contents of the message to

warn that the Li-ion battery power level is low.

Check the message displayed on the screen.

Touch [Nearby Stations] to search all charg-

ing stations that are located around the cur-

rent vehicle position.

3. Touch [BACK] or push the MAP button to

return to the vehicle location screen.

Instruments and controls 2-33

NOTE:

• The low battery warning can be set to off.

Refer to LEAF Electric Vehicle Information

System Owner’s Manual.

• When the battery power level is low, the

system automatically obtains charging

station information.

Limited power warning

When the Li-ion battery power level is extremely

low or the Li-ion battery malfunctions, the power

limitation indicator

and the master warning

light (yellow)

illuminate in the meter and the

system displays a message on the navigation

system screen in order to inform the driver that

power output is restricted.

1. The notification is displayed on the upper left

side of the screen. Touch [Show] to display

the screen showing detailed information.

2. The system displays a message screen and

announces the contents of the message to

warn that power output is restricted and in-

form the driver of the reason for this occur-

rence and what action is to be taken.

2-34 Instruments and controls

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE

1. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the customer set

distance comes for replacing tires. You can set or

reset the distance for replacing tires. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Trip computer” in this

section.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, includ-

ing tire pressure checks. For additional

information, refer to “Changing wheels

and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual. Many

factors including tire inflation, alignment,

driving habits and road conditions affect

tire wear and when tires should be re-

placed. Setting the tire replacement indi-

cator for a certain driving distance does

not mean your tires will last that long.

Use the tire replacement indicator as a

guide only and always perform regular

tire checks. Failure to perform regular

tire checks, including tire pressure

checks could result in tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may lead

to a collision, which could result in seri-

ous personal injury or death.

2. 3. 4. “Other” indicators

These indicators appear when the customer set

distance comes for checking or replacing main-

tenance items other than the tires. Other mainte-

nance items can include such things as the tire

rotation. You can set or reset the distance for

checking or replacing the items. For additional

information, refer to “Trip computer” in this sec-

tion. For scheduled maintenance items and inter-

vals, refer to the NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide.

Instruments and controls 2-35

INDICATOR FOR TIMER

When the power switch is turned off, this display

appears for 10 seconds. If the

switch is

pushed within 10 seconds, the display can be

selected and each setting information display

can be confirmed.

1. Timer setting status (charging and

Climate Ctrl.) and charge connector

lock setting status

The timer setting status (ON or OFF) of the

charge and the climate control and the charge

connector lock setting status (AUTO, LOCK or

UNLOCK) can be checked.

2. Charging Timer setting confirmation

The “Charging Timer” starting hours, minutes and

days for the next charge time that has been set

can be checked.

3. Charging time

Displays the estimated time to charge the Li-ion

battery to a full charge. When fully charged, the

remaining charging time is displayed as “--:--”.

NOTE:

Charging may finish sooner than the

displayed charging time.

4. Climate Ctrl. Timer setting

confirmation

The set time for ending hours and days of the

Climate Ctrl. Timer is displayed.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:

• Vehicle security system

• NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security status is shown by the security indi-

cator light.

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-36 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors,

or rear hatch when the system is armed. It is not,

however, a motion detection type system that

activates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,

and always lock it when it is left unattended. Be

aware of your surroundings, and park in secure,

well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such

as component locks, identification markers, and

tracking systems, are available at auto supply

stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer may also offer such equipment.

Check with your insurance company to see if you

may be eligible for discounts for various theft

protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the

windows are open.

2. Place the power switch in the LOCK or OFF

position and remove the Intelligent Key from

the vehicle.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors can

be locked with:

• the LOCK

button on the Intelligent Key

• any request switch

• the power door lock switch

• the mechanical key

4. Confirm that the security indicator light illumi-

nates. The security indicator light stays on for

about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-

tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-

onds the vehicle security system automati-

cally shifts into the armed phase. The security

light begins to flash once every approximately

3 seconds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm

time period, the door is unlocked, or the

power switch is placed in the ACC or ON

position, the system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will activate

with all doors locked and the power switch

in the OFF position. When placing the

power switch to the ACC or ON position,

the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following

alarm:

• The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

• The alarm automatically turns off after approxi-

mately 50 seconds. However, the alarm reacti-

vates if the vehicle is tampered with again.

The alarm is activated by:

• Unlocking the door without using the Intelligent

Key, the request switch or the key. (Even if the

door is opened by releasing the door inside lock

knob, the alarm will activate.)

• Opening the hood.

Instruments and controls 2-37

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop when a door is unlocked by

pushing the UNLOCK

button on the Intel-

ligent Key, door handle request switch or using

the mechanical key, or when the power switch is

pushed in the ACC or ON position.

If the system does not operate as described

above, have it checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the power switch to be placed in the

READY to drive position without the use of the

registered key.

If the power switch fails to place the vehicle into

the READY to drive position using the registered

key, it may be due to interference caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automated payment device on the key

ring. Restart the EV system using the following

procedure:

1. Leave the power switch in the ON position for

approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the power switch in the OFF position

and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Place the power switch in the READY to drive

position while holding the device (which may

have caused the interference) separate from

the registered key.

If this procedure allows the power switch to be

placed in the READY to drive mode, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on a

separate key ring to avoid interference from

other devices.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Security Indicator Light

The security indicator light is located on the me-

ter panel. It indicates the status of the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the power switch was in the

ACC or OFF position. This function indicates the

security systems equipped on the vehicle are

operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-

functioning, this light will remain on while the

power switch is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

power switch cannot be placed in the

READY to drive position, have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have when visiting

a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for service.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer so-

lution may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the wind-

shield.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

• Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

• Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based windshield-

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the windshield-washer fluid res-

ervoir.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-39

• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is inter-

rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop

moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,

turn the wiper switch to the OFF position

and remove the snow or ice that is on and

around the wiper arms. In approximately

1 minute, turn the switch on again to oper-

ate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the power switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

䊊

Intermittent — intermittent operation can be

adjusted by turning the knob toward

䊊

(Slower) or

䊊

(Faster).

䊊

Low — continuous low speed operation

䊊

High — continuous high speed operation

䊊

MIST — one sweep operation of the wiper

WASHER OPERATION

To operate the washer, pull the lever toward the

back of the vehicle

䊊

until the desired amount of

windshield-washer fluid is spread on the wind-

shield. The wiper will automatically operate sev-

eral times.

Drip Wipe

A brief period of time after using the washer the

wiper will perform a one sweep operation auto-

matically to clear any remaining windshield-

washer fluid from the windshield.

2-40 Instruments and controls

REAR WIPER OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the windshield-

washer fluid may freeze on the rear win-

dow glass and obscure your vision. Warm

the rear window with the defroster before

you wash the rear window.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

• Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

• Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based windshield-

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the windshield-washer fluid res-

ervoir.

• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the rear window wiper operation is inter-

rupted by snow etc., the wiper may stop

moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,

turn the wiper switch to the OFF position

and remove the snow etc. on and around

the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn

the switch ON again to operate the wiper.

The rear window wiper and washer operate when

the power switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position

to operate the wiper.

䊊

Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

䊊

Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward

䊊

to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

Instruments and controls 2-41

To defrost the rear window glass and outside

mirrors, place the power switch in the ON posi-

tion and push the switch

䊊

on. The indicator

light will illuminate. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately

15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

The instrument brightness control switch can be

operated when the power switch is in the ON

position. When the switch is operated, the ve-

hicle information display switches to the bright-

ness adjustment mode.

Push the switch

䊊

to display the setting menu of

the brightness control on the vehicle information

display.

Push the

䊊

switch to move the bar to the + side.

If the bar reaches the maximum brightness, a

chime will sound. If the switch

䊊

is pushed again

when the brightness is at the maximum setting,

the instrument lights turn off.

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (IF SO EQUIPPED)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

2-42 Instruments and controls

If the switch

䊊

is pushed again, the instrument

lights are turned on to the lowest brightness

setting.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

Rotate the switch to the position, the

front parking, tail, license plate, and instru-

ment panel lights come on.

䊊

Rotate the switch to the position, the

headlights come on and all the other lights

remain on.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the AUTO

position

䊊

2. Place the power switch in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF,

or position.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-43

The autolight system can turn on the headlights

automatically when it is dark and turn off the

headlights when it is light.

For US models: The headlights will also be turned

on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather

(when the windshield wiper is operated continu-

ously).

If the power switch is placed in the OFF position

and one of the doors is opened and this condition

continues, the headlights remain on for 45 sec-

onds.

Automatic headlights off delay:

You can keep the headlights on for up to 180

seconds after you push the power switch to OFF

and open any door then close all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the automatic head-

lights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180 sec-

onds. The factory default setting is 45 seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay setting, refer to

the LEAF Navigation System Owner’s Manual

(models with navigation system).

Be sure not to put anything on top of the

photo sensor

䊊

located on the top of the

instrument panel. The photo sensor con-

trols the autolight; if it is covered, the photo

sensor reacts as if it is dark and the head-

lights will illuminate.

Headlight beam select

䊊

To select the low beam, have the lever in

the neutral position as shown and rotate

the switch to the desired position. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Headlight

switch” in this section.

䊊

To select the high beam, push the lever

forward while the switch is in the

position. The high beams will come on and

the high beam indicator (blue)

will

illuminate. Pull it back to return to the low

beam.

2-44 Instruments and controls

䊊

Pulling the lever toward you will flash the

headlight high beam even when the head-

light switch is in the OFF position.

Battery saver system

• When the headlight switch is in the or

position while the power switch is in the

ON position, the lights will automatically turn off

45 seconds after the power switch has been

placed in the OFF position.

• When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights automatically

turn off, the lights will turn on when the power

switch is placed in the ON position.

CAUTION

•

When you turn on the headlight switch

again after the lights automatically turn

off, the lights will not turn off automati-

cally. Be sure to turn the light switch to

the OFF position when you leave the

vehicle for extended periods of time,

otherwise the battery will be discharged.

• Never leave the light switch on when

the power switch is in the OFF, ACC or

ON position for extended periods of

time even if the headlights turn off

automatically.

Daytime running light system (for

Canada)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-

nate when the power switch is in the READY to

drive position with the parking brake released.

The daytime running lights operate with the head-

light switch in the OFF position. Turn headlight

switch to the

position for full illumination

when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the power

switch is in the READY to drive position, daytime

running lights do not operate. The daytime run-

ning lights illuminate once the parking brake is

released. The daytime running lights will remain

on until the power switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

Move the lever up or down until it latches to

signal the turning direction. When the turn is

completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal

begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to

signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane

change is completed.

Instruments and controls 2-45

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal

begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and

release the lever. The turn signal will automati-

cally flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane

change based on road and traffic conditions.

To turn the fog lights on, rotate the headlight

switch to the

position, then rotate the

switch to the

position. To turn them off,

rotate the switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog lights to

operate.

The heated steering wheel system is designed to

operate only when the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is below approximately 68°F

(20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm

the steering wheel when the power switch is in

the ON position. The indicator light

䊊

on the

switch will illuminate.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH

(IF SO EQUIPPED)

2-46 Instruments and controls

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is

below approximately 68°F (20°C), the system will

heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to

maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The

indicator light will remain on as long as the sys-

tem is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering

wheel system off manually. The indicator light

turns off.

NOTE:

• If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the

switch is turned on, the system will not

heat the steering wheel. This is not a mal-

function.

• If the outside temperature is low (approxi-

mately 50°F (10°C) or less) and the Climate

Control Timer or Remote Climate Control

are used, the steering wheel heater will

automatically operate in the following

conditions.

– When using the Climate Control Timer:

Operates from approximately 15 min-

utes before the set departure time until

the set departure time.

– When using Remote Climate Control:

Operates 15 minutes after Remote Cli-

mate Control starts.

• The heated steering wheel consumes less

power than the heater and can be used to

either help extend vehicle range by reduc-

ing heater use or to maximize comfort by

supplementing the heater.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air

bag system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

HORN

Instruments and controls 2-47

To activate the ECO mode, push the ECO switch

䊊

on the right side of the steering wheel. The

“ECO indicator” on the instrument cluster will

illuminate.

To deactivate the ECO mode, push the ECO

switch

䊊

again. The “ECO indicator” on the

instrument cluster will go out.

For additional information, refer to “Electric shift

control system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual

The front seats and the rear outboard seats (if so

equipped) can be warmed by built-in heaters.

The switches, located on the center console and

at the side of the front passenger seatback, can

be operated independently of each other.

1. Place the power switch in the ON position.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as

desired, depending on the temperature. The

indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to the

level position. Make sure the indicator light

goes off.

Rear (if so equipped)

ECO SWITCH HEATED SEAT SWITCH

2-48 Instruments and controls

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, auto-

matically turning the heater on and off. The indi-

cator light will remain on as long as the switch is

on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or before

you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch

off.

NOTE:

The heated seats consume less power than

the heater and can be used to either help

extend vehicle range by reducing heater

use or to maximize comfort by supplement-

ing the heater.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants can-

not monitor elevated seat temperatures

or have an inability to feel pain in those

body parts in contact with the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could re-

sult in serious injury.

CAUTION

• Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is us-

ing the seat.

• Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the

seat may become overheated.

• Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to

the heater.

• Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

• When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar mate-

rials.

• If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-

ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the traction motor output to re-

duce wheel spin. The traction motor speed will be

reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to

the floor. If maximum traction motor power is

needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC

system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The

indicator will illuminate.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-49

Push the VDC OFF switch again to turn on the

VDC system, or the VDC is automatically turned

back on when the power switch is placed in the

OFF position and then placed back in the READY

to drive position. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

To open the charge port lid, push the charge port

lid switch. For additional information, refer to

“Charge port lid” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

To lock or unlock the charge connector, push the

charge connector lock switch. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Charge connector lock

switch” in the “Charging” section of this manual.

CHARGE PORT LID SWITCH CHARGE CONNECTOR LOCK SWITCH

2-50 Instruments and controls

To turn off the charge timer, push the charge

timer OFF switch. For additional information, re-

fer to “Charging timer” in the “Charging” section

of this manual.

The power outlet is located in the instrument

panel.

CAUTION

• The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

• Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12-volt, 120W (10A) power

draw.

• Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

• Use the power outlet with the power

switch is in the ON or READY to drive

position to avoid discharging the 12-

volt battery.

• Avoid using the power outlet when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear win-

dow defroster are on.

• This power outlet is not designed for

use with a cigarette lighter unit.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

• Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, make sure that the electrical ac-

cessory being used is turned OFF.

• When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water to contact the

outlet.

CHARGE TIMER OFF SWITCH POWER OUTLET

Instruments and controls 2-51

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

•

Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

• Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an acci-

dent.

CAUTION

• Do not use the bottle holder for any

other objects that could be thrown

about in the vehicle and possibly injure

people during sudden braking or an

accident.

• Do not use the bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the tray(s)

to help prevent injury in an accident or

sudden stop.

Front Soft bottle holder Instrument panel

STORAGE

2-52 Instruments and controls

SEATBACK POCKET (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

The seatback pocket is located on the back of the

passenger’s seat. The pocket can be used to

store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items:

• Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint.

• Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint, or in the seatback pocket.

Center console

Instruments and controls 2-53

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES

STORAGE

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while

driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s

view and to help prevent an accident.

CAUTION

• Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

• Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

GLOVE BOX

To open the glove box, pull the handle.

To close, push the lid in until it latches.

WARNING

Keep the glove box lid closed while driv-

ing to prevent injury in case of an acci-

dent or a sudden stop.

2-54 Instruments and controls

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, pull up the lever

䊊

and

pull up the lid. To close, push the lid down until it

is latched.

TONNEAU COVER (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• Never put anything on the tonneau

cover, no matter how small. Any object

on it could cause an injury in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

• Do not leave the tonneau cover in the

vehicle with it disengaged from the

holder.

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

• Properly secure cargo and do not allow

it to contact the top tether strap when

it is attached to the top tether anchor.

Cargo that is not properly secured or

cargo that contacts the top tether strap

may damage the top tether strap dur-

ing a collision. If the cargo cover con-

tacts the top tether strap when it is

attached to the top tether anchor, re-

move the cargo cover from the vehicle

or secure it on the cargo floor below its

attachment location. If the cargo cover

is not removed, it may damage the top

tether strap during a collision. Your

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child restraint

top tether strap is damaged.

The tonneau cover keeps the luggage compart-

ment contents hidden from the outside.

To remove the tonneau cover:

1. Remove the straps from the rear hatch.

2. Pull up the tonneau cover.

3. Remove the tonneau cover holders from the

rear pillar.

Instruments and controls 2-55

4. Slide down the tonneau cover along the rear

seat back.

5. Remove the tonneau cover by pulling either

the left or right side backward away from the

pillar.

STOWING GOLF BAGS

Normally, two standard golf bags can be stowed

in the cargo area. Insert the top of the golf bag

into the right side of the cargo area

䊊

then rotate

the bag backward

䊊

. Insert the top of the sec-

ond golf bag into right side of the cargo area

䊊

and stow the bottom of golf bag forward all the

way

䊊

In some cases, you may not be able to stow two

golf bags in your vehicle, depending on their sizes

or types.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

• Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before closing

the windows. Use the window lock

switch to prevent unexpected use of

the power windows.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle or its systems, including en-

trapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assis-

tance of others, or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the power

switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 sec-

onds after the power switch is placed in the OFF

position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s door

is opened during this period of about 45 sec-

onds, power to the windows is canceled.

WINDOWS

2-56 Instruments and controls

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Rear right passenger side window

5. Window lock button

To open or close a window, push down

䊊

or pull

䊊

the corresponding switch and hold it. The

main switches, on the driver’s side, will open or

close all the windows.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button

䊊

is pushed in, only the

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

Passenger side power window switch

The passenger’s side power window switch will

open or close only the corresponding window. To

open or close the window, push down or pull up

the switch and hold it.

Instruments and controls 2-57

Automatic operation

The automatic operation is available for the

switch that has an

mark on its surface.

To fully open or close the window, completely

push down or pull up the switch and release it;

the switch need not be held. The window will

automatically open or close all the way. To stop

the window, just push or lift the switch in the

opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause the

window to open or close until the switch is re-

leased.

Auto-reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in the

window as it is closing, the window will be imme-

diately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the window is closed by automatic operation

when the power switch is in the ON position or

for 45 seconds after the power switch is placed

in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

If the windows do not close

automatically

If the power window automatic function (closing

only) does not operate properly, perform the fol-

lowing procedure to initialize the power window

system.

1. Place the power switch in the ON position.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window completely by operating

the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to

close the window, and then hold the switch

more than 3 seconds after the window is

closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Operate

the window by the automatic function to con-

firm the initialization is complete.

If the power window automatic function does not

operate properly after performing the procedure

above, have your vehicle serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

2-58 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the power switch in the OFF posi-

tion. This could result in a discharged

12-volt battery.

MAP LIGHTS

Press the button to turn the map lights on. To turn

them off, press the button again.

ROOM LIGHT

The room light switch has three positions: ON,

DOOR and OFF.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position

䊊

, the

ceiling light will illuminate.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-59

DOOR position

When the switch is in the DOOR position

䊊

, the

ceiling light will illuminate under the following

conditions:

• the power switch is placed in the LOCK position

– remains on for about 15 seconds.

• doors are unlocked by pushing the UNLOCK

button or the request switch, with the

power switch in the LOCK position

– remains on for about 15 seconds.

• any door is opened and then closed with the

power switch in the LOCK position

– remains on for about 15 seconds.

• any door is opened while the power switch in

the ACC or ON position

– remains on while the door is opened. When

the door is closed, the light turns off.

The light will automatically turn off after

10 minutes when the light remains illumi-

nated to prevent the battery from becoming

discharged.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position

䊊

, the

ceiling light will not illuminate, regardless of the

condition.

CARGO LIGHT

The light illuminates when the rear hatch is

opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light

goes off. For additional information, refer to “Ex-

terior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides

a convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

• Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) de-

vices such as garage doors, gates, home and

office lighting, entry door locks and security

systems.

• Is powered by the vehicle’s 12-volt battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s

12-volt battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.

Once the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming proce-

dures (for example, new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the pro-

grammed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased for

security purposes. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Programming HomeLink®” in

this section.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (IF SO EQUIPPED)

2-60 Instruments and controls

WARNING

• Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards be-

came effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A

garage door opener that cannot detect

an object in the path of a closing ga-

rage door and then automatically stop

and reverse, does not meet current

federal safety standards. Using a ga-

rage door opener without these fea-

tures increases the risk of serious in-

jury or death.

• During the programming procedure,

your garage door or security gate will

open or close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people

or objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

• Place the power switch in the ACC or

ON position while programming the

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to

the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the power switch in the ACC position

when programming HomeLink®. It is also

recommended that a new battery be placed

in the hand-held transmitter of the device

being programmed to HomeLink® for

quicker programming and accurate trans-

mission of the radio-frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter

1–3 inches (2–8 cm) away from the

HomeLink® surface, keeping the HomeLink®

indicator light

䊊

in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button and

handheld transmitter button. DO NOT release

until the HomeLink® indicator light

䊊

flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator

light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be re-

leased. (The rapid flashing indicates success-

ful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to re-

place Step 2 with the cycling procedure

noted in the “Programing HomeLink®

for Canadian customers and gate open-

ers” section.

Instruments and controls 2-61

3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®

button and observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light

䊊

is solid/

continuous, programming is complete

and your device should activate when the

HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

• If the indicator light

䊊

blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns to a solid/

continuous light, continue with Steps

4-6 for a rolling code device. A second per-

son may make the following steps easier.

Please use a ladder or other device. Do not

stand on your vehicle to perform the next

steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door

opener motor in the garage, locate the “learn”

or “smart” button (the name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer but it is

usually located near where the hanging an-

tenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is

difficulty locating the button, reference the

garage door opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold

the trained HomeLink® button for two sec-

onds and release. Repeat the “press/hold/

release” sequence up to three times to com-

plete the training process. HomeLink®

should now activate your rolling code

equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having diffi-

culty programming your HomeLink® buttons,

refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND

GATE OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit-

ter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several

seconds of transmission – which may not be long

enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal

during training. Similar to this Canadian law,

some U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties

training a gate operator or garage door opener by

using the “Training” procedures, replace “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” Step 2 with the follow-

ing:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”

process to prevent possible damage to the

garage door opener components.

1. Refer to “Programing HomeLink®” step 1 in

this section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button and the

hand-held transmitter button. During training,

your hand-held transmitter may automatically

2-62 Instruments and controls

stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold

the desired HomeLink® button while you

press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every two seconds until the fre-

quency signal has been learned. The

HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly

and then rapidly after several seconds upon

successful training. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and

then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes

rapidly, both buttons may be released. The

rapid flashing indicates successful training.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” step

3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the program-

ming procedure, remember to plug it back in

when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is

programmed, can be used to activate the pro-

grammed device. To operate, simply press and

release the appropriate programmed

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The

amber indicator light will illuminate while the sig-

nal is being transmitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the

device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-

held transmitter information, perform the follow-

ing steps.

• Replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

• Position the hand-held transmitter with its bat-

tery area facing away from the HomeLink®

surface.

• Push and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-

held transmitter buttons without interruption.

• Position the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches

(2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® surface.

Hold the transmitter in that position for up to

15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed

within that time, try holding the transmitter in

another position while keeping the indicator

light in view at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,

please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department. The phone numbers are located in

the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the programmed

information from both buttons. Individual buttons

cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons

can be reprogrammed. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Reprogramming a single

HomeLink® button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®

buttons until the indicator light begins to flash

in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for

longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming mode

and can be programmed at any time beginning

with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

Instruments and controls 2-63

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but-

ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Program-

ming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®

at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button

has now been reprogrammed. The new device

can be activated by pushing the HomeLink®

button that was just programmed. This procedure

will not affect any other programmed HomeLink®

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-

facturer or dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

2-64 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys...............................3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ................3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys.......3-3

Doors ..............................3-4

Locking with mechanical key (driver’s side only) . . .3-4

Locking with inside lock knob ..............3-5

Locking with power door lock switch..........3-5

Automatic door locks ...................3-6

Child safety rear door lock ................3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key® system ..............3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key® operating range of the

door lock/unlock function ................3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution .............3-9

NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation ..........3-9

12-volt battery saver system ..............3-11

Warning signals .....................3-11

Troubleshooting guide .................3-12

How to use remote keyless entry function ......3-13

Hood .............................3-17

Rear hatch ..........................3-18

Secondary rear hatch release .............3-19

Charge port lid........................3-19

Opening charge port lid ................3-19

Charge port cap .....................3-20

Steering wheel........................3-21

Tilt operation .......................3-21

Sun visors ..........................3-22

Vanity mirror .......................3-22

Card holder (Driver’s side only) ............3-23

Mirrors ............................3-23

Inside rearview mirror ..................3-23

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) .....................3-23

Automatic anti-glare type (if so equipped) ......3-24

Outside mirrors .....................3-25

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for duplicates by

using the key number. NISSAN does not record

any key numbers so it is very important to keep

track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated

without knowing the key number.

NOTE:

Do not leave the keys inside the vehicle

when leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

1. Intelligent Key (two sets)

2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key)

3. Key number plate (one plate)

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-

ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System components.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys

must be registered by a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system

and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your

vehicle. Since the registration process requires

erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-

nents when registering new keys, be sure to take

all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a

precision device with a built-in transmit-

ter. To avoid damaging it, please note the

following.

• The Intelligent Key is water resistant;

however, wetting may damage the In-

telligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets

wet, immediately wipe until it is com-

pletely dry.

• Do not bend, drop or strike it against

another object.

• If the outside temperature is below

14°F (-10°C) degrees, the battery of the

Intelligent Key may not function prop-

erly.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in a place where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

• Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

• Do not use a magnet key holder.

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

• Do not place the Intelligent Key near

an electric appliance such as a televi-

sion set, personal computer or cellular

phone.

• Do not allow the Intelligent Key to

come into contact with water or salt

water, and do not wash it in a washing

machine. This could affect the system

function.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

NISSAN recommends erasing the ID

code of that Intelligent Key. This will pre-

vent the Intelligent Key from unauthor-

ized use to unlock the vehicle. For infor-

mation regarding the erasing procedure,

it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

doors. For additional information, refer to “Doors”

in this section.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the Intelligent Key.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.

These keys have a transponder chip in the key

head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

To protect belongings when you leave a key with

someone, give them the Intelligent Key only, not

the mechanical key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. A NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer can duplicate your existing key. As

many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys can be used with one vehicle. You

should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have to the NISSAN certified

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

LEAF dealer for registration. This is because the

registration process will erase the memory of all

key codes previously registered into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration

process, these components will only recognize

keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System during registration. Any key that is not

given to the dealer at the time of registration will

no longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,

which contains an electrical transponder,

to come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect system function.

WARNING

• Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help

keep out intruders.

• Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be opened

using the inside or outside door handles. The

doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY

(DRIVER’S SIDE ONLY)

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors simultaneously using the me-

chanical key.

• Turning the driver’s door key cylinder towards

the front of the vehicle

䊊

will lock all doors and

the rear hatch.

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

• Turning the driver’s door key cylinder, once to-

wards the rear of the vehicle

䊊

, will unlock the

driver’s door. After returning the key to the neu-

tral position, turning it towards the rear again

within five seconds will unlock all doors and the

rear hatch.

• For models equipped with navigation, you can

switch the lock system to the mode that allows

you to open all the doors when the key is turned

once. For additional information, refer to the

LEAF Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position

䊊

then close the

door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position

䊊

When locking the door without a key, be

sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will lock or

unlock all the doors. The switches are located on

the driver’s and front passenger’s door armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the lock position

䊊

with the driver’s or

front passenger’s door open, then close the door.

When locking the door this way, be sure not

to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock the doors, push the power door lock

switch to the unlock position

䊊

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved to the

lock position while any door is open, all doors will

unlock automatically and a chime will sound after

the door is closed.

This function help to prevent the Intelligent Key

from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

• All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).

• All doors unlock automatically when the power

switch is placed in the OFF position.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety rear door locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, especially

when small children are in the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position

䊊

the rear doors can be opened only from the

outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the unlock

position

䊊

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment manu-

facturer for the possible influences be-

fore use.

• The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises that the radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and

communication systems. Do not oper-

ate the Intelligent Key while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the unit

is stored during a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door and the rear hatch locks by using the remote

control function or pushing the request switch on

the vehicle without taking the key out from a

pocket or purse. The operating environment

and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key

system operation.

Be sure to read the following items before using

the Intelligent Key system.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® SYSTEM

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehicle.

• Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle because it receives radio waves. The

Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio

waves. Environmental conditions may interfere

with the operation of the Intelligent Key system

under the following operating conditions.

• When operating near a location where strong

radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower,

power station or broadcasting station.

• When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular phone, transceiver or a CB

radio.

• When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

• When any type of radio wave remote control is

used nearby.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed near an elec-

tric appliance such as a personal computer.

• When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately two years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-

charged, firmly apply the foot brake and touch the

power switch with the Intelligent Key. Then push

the power switch while depressing the brake

pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sound.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving

radio waves, if the key is left near equipment that

transmits strong radio waves, such as signals

from a TV or personal computer, the battery life

may become shorter.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key® battery replacement” in the “Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is

not completely discharged.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. For information

about the purchase and use of additional Intelli-

gent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

CAUTION

• Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the functioning

of the system.

• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

• Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

• Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

• The Intelligent Key may be damaged if

it gets wet. If the Intelligent Key gets

wet, immediately wipe until it is com-

pletely dry.

• If the outside temperature is below

14°F (−10°C), the battery of the Intelli-

gent Key may not function properly.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

• Do not attach the Intelligent Key to a

key holder that contains a magnet.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment,

personal computer or cellular phone.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer.

The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For

additional information, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATING RANGE OF THE DOOR

LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch

䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-

ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch

䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper, the request switches may

not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone who does not

carry the Intelligent Key to push the request

switch to lock/unlock the doors including the rear

hatch.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

• Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to

have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent

Key is outside the vehicle.

• After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked by

testing them.

• To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the key

with you and then lock the doors.

• Do not pull the door handle before pushing the

door handle request switch. The door will be

unlocked but will not open. Release the door

handle once and pull it again to open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the key out from your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s)

䊊

or rear hatch request switch

䊊

within

the range of operation.

When you lock or unlock the doors or the rear

hatch, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn

(or the outside chime) will sound as a confirma-

tion. For additional information, refer to “Hazard

warning flasher switch” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual and “Horn” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Locking doors

1. Push the power switch into the OFF position

and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key

with you.

2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch.

3. Push the door handle request switch (driver’s

or front passenger’s)

䊊

or the rear hatch

request switch

䊊

while carrying the Intelli-

gent Key with you.*1

4. All the doors and the rear hatch will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will not lock by pushing the door handle

request switch when the Intelligent Key is left

inside the vehicle. A chime sounds to alert that

the Intelligent Key is in the vehicle. However,

when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle,

doors can be locked with another registered In-

telligent Key.

CAUTION

• After locking the door using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors

have been securely locked by operat-

ing the door handles.

• When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

• The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the door handle request switch

䊊

the rear hatch request switch

䊊

once while

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and the

outside chime sounds once. The correspond-

ing door or the rear hatch will unlock.

3. Push the door handle request or the rear

hatch request switch again within one minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and the

outside chime sounds once again. All the

doors and the rear hatch will unlock.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

one minute after pushing the request switch

while the doors are locked.

• Opening any door.

• Pushing the power switch.

During this one minute time period, if the UN-

LOCK

button on the Intelligent Key is

pressed, all doors will be locked automatically

after another one minute.

Opening rear hatch

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the rear hatch opener switch

䊊

3. The rear hatch will unlock and open.

12-VOLT BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met for a

period of time, the battery saver system will cut

off the power supply to prevent 12-volt battery

discharge.

• The power switch is in the ACC or ON position,

• All doors are closed, and

• The vehicle is in the P (Park) position.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key listed on the following chart or to help pre-

vent the vehicle from being stolen, chime or beep

sounds inside and outside the vehicle and a

warning displays in the vehicle information dis-

play.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning

displays, be sure to check the vehicle and Intelli-

gent Key.

For additional information, refer to the ”Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section and “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are

programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent

Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle

system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When opening the driver’s door to

get out of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The power switch is pushed to the OFF po-

sition while the driver’s door is open.

Close the driver’s door.

The power switch is in the ACC position.

Push the power switch to the OFF position then

close the driver’s door.

When closing the door after getting

out of the vehicle

The Key is not detected warning appears on the

display, the outside chime sounds three times and

the inside warning chime sounds for a few sec-

onds.

The power switch is in the ACC or ON posi-

tion.

Push the power switch to the OFF position.

The outside chime sounds continuously.

The power switch is in the ACC or OFF

position, the electric shift control system has

malfunctioned and the vehicle cannot be

placed in the P (Park) position when the

parking brake is not applied.

Make sure the parking brake is applied.

When closing the door with the in-

side lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds and

all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or

cargo area.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request switch or

the “LOCK”

button on

the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or a

cargo area.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the power switch in

the READY to drive position

The Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator ap-

pears on the display.

The Intelligent Key battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. For addi-

tional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent

Key® battery replacement” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The Key is not detected warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime sounds for a

few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the power switch

The Intelligent Key system warning indicator ap-

pears on the display.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent

Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY FUNCTION

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment manu-

facturer for the possible influences be-

fore use.

• The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises that the radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and

communication systems. Do not oper-

ate the Intelligent Key while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the unit

is stored during a flight.

CAUTION

• Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

• Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

• Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

• Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

• Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

• Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment,

personal computers or cellular phone.

The remote keyless entry function can operate all

door locks using the remote keyless entry func-

tion of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless

entry function can operate at a distance of ap-

proximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The

operating distance depends upon the conditions

around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not oper-

ate:

• When the Intelligent Key is not within the opera-

tional range.

• When the doors are open or not closed

securely.

• When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Locking doors

䊊

LOCK button

䊊

UNLOCK button

䊊

CHARGE PORT UNLOCK

䊊

PANIC

button

When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard

indicator will flash and the horn will sound as a

confirmation. For additional information, refer to

“Hazard warning flasher switch” in the “In case of

emergency” section and “Horn” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” sections of this manual.

1. Push the power switch to the OFF position

and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key

with you.

2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

3. Close all the doors.

4. Press the LOCK

button

䊊

on the

Intelligent Key.

5. All the doors and the rear hatch will lock.

6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

Operate the door handles to confirm that the

doors have been securely locked.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the UNLOCK button

䊊

on the

Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The driv-

er’s door will unlock.

3. Press the UNLOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key again within one minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All

the doors and the rear hatch will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

one minute after pressing the UNLOCK

button while the doors are locked.

• Opening any door (including the rear hatch).

• Pushing the power switch.

During this one minute time period, if the UN-

LOCK

button on the Intelligent Key is

pressed, all doors will be locked automatically

after another one minute.

Opening charge port lid

The charge port lid may be opened by pressing

and holding the charge port unlock

button

䊊

For additional information, refer to ⬙Opening

charge port lid⬙ in this section.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention as

follows:

1. Push the PANIC

button

䊊

on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will

stay on for a period of time.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

• It has run for a period of time, or

• Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key is

pushed. (Note: The PANIC button must be

pushed for more than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK

button

䊊

is pressed, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the UNLOCK

button

䊊

is pressed,

the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pressed, the hazard indicator flashes

twice. When the UNLOCK

button is

pressed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn

operates.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch or rear

hatch request switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

Pressing

or button

HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch or rear

hatch request switch

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

Pressing

or button

HAZARD - twice

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime)

operation, press the LOCK

䊊

and UN-

LOCK

䊊

buttons on the Intelligent Key

simultaneously for more than two seconds.

• When the hazard indicator mode is set, the

hazard indicator flashes three times.

• When the hazard indicator and horn mode is

set, the hazard indicator flashes once and the

horn chirps once.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

• Make sure that the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to

open during driving and result in an

accident.

• If steam or smoke is emitting from the

motor compartment, do not open the

hood. Doing so could cause an injury.

When opening the hood:

1. Securely close the charge port door.

2. Pull the hood lock release handle

䊊

located

below the instrument panel. The hood will

then spring up slightly.

3. Locate the lever

䊊

in between the hood and

charge port lid, and push the lever upward

with your fingertips.

4. Raise the hood

䊊

5. Remove the support rod

䊊

from the hood

and insert it into the slot

䊊

Hold the coated part

䊊

when removing or

resetting the support rod. Avoid direct con-

tact with the metal parts because they may

be hot immediately after the EV system has

been stopped.

When closing the hood:

1. Return the support rod to its original position.

2. Slowly move the hood down to latch the lock.

3. Push the hood down to lock the hood se-

curely into place.

HOOD

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

WARNING

• Always make sure that the rear hatch

has been closed securely to prevent it

from opening while driving.

• Do not drive with the rear hatch open.

• Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle be-

fore closing the rear hatch.

To open the rear hatch, unlock it and push the

rear hatch opener switch

䊊

. Pull up the rear

hatch to open.

The rear hatch can be unlocked by:

• Pushing the rear hatch request switch. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent

Key® system” in this section.

• Pressing the UNLOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key. For additional information, refer

to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® system” in this

section.

• Pressing the UNLOCK

button on the

remote control. For additional information, refer

to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® system” in this

section.

• Pushing the power door lock switch to the

“UNLOCK” position.

REAR HATCH

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SECONDARY REAR HATCH

RELEASE

The secondary rear hatch release mechanism

allows the rear hatch to be opened in the event of

a discharged battery, etc.

Push the lever to the right to open the rear hatch

with a suitable tool.

If you had to open the rear hatch using this

lever, have the vehicle checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this ser-

vice.

OPENING CHARGE PORT LID

CAUTION

Make sure that the charge port lid is

completely closed and latched before

driving. Failure to do so could cause the

lid to open suddenly during driving.

Switch

Button

CHARGE PORT LID

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

When opening the charge port lid perform one of

the following:

• Push the charge port lid opener switch located

on the instrument panel, or

• Press and hold the charge port lid unlock button

on the Intelligent Key for more than one second.

When opening the charge port lid:

1. The charging status indicator lights flash and

a chime sounds three times and the charge

port lid will then spring up slightly.

2. Put your hand into the under side of the lid and

open until it is in the fully open position.

When closing the charge port lid:

1. Slowly move the lid down.

2. Lock it securely into place.

CHARGE PORT CAP

When opening the charge port cap, press the tab

inward and the cap will spring open.

When the charge port cap is closed to its previ-

ous position, it will lock automatically.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

• When charging is finished, be sure to

close the charge port cap. If water or

dust gets inside the charge port, this

may cause a malfunction.

• Pay particular attention when using

the normal charge port as the charge

port lid can be closed even when the

normal charge port cap is open.

• Close the quick charge (if so equipped)

port cap before closing the charging

lid. The quick charge port cap can be

damaged if it is open when closing the

charge port lid.

WARNING

• Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

• Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and comfort.

The driver’s air bag inflates with great

force. If you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of po-

sition in any way, you are at greater

risk of injury or death in a crash. You

may also receive serious or fatal inju-

ries from the air bag if you are up

against it when it inflates. Always sit

back against the seatback and as far

away as practical from the steering

wheel. Always use the seat belts.

TILT OPERATION

Push the lock lever down

䊊

and adjust the

steering wheel up or down

䊊

to the desired

position.

Pull the lock lever up

䊊

to lock the steering

wheel in place.

STEERING WHEEL

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

1. To block out glare from the front, swing down

the sun visor

䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun

visor from the center mount and swing it to the

side

䊊

3. Slide the extension sun visor in or out as

needed

䊊

CAUTION

• Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original

position.

• Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward.

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun

visor and pull up the cover.

SUN VISORS

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CARD HOLDER (DRIVER’S SIDE

ONLY)

To access the card holder, slide card in the card

holder. Do not view information while operating

the vehicle.

INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

Adjust the angle of the inside rearview mirror to

the preferred position.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (IF SO EQUIPPED)

The night position

䊊

reduces glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position

䊊

when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rearview clarity.

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE TYPE (IF

SO EQUIPPED)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally changes reflection based on the intensity of

the headlights of the vehicle behind.

When the system is turned on, the indicator light

䊊

will illuminate and excessive glare from the

headlights of the vehicle behind you will be re-

duced.

Type A (if so equipped): The anti-glare system

automatically turns on when the power switch is

moved to the ON position.

Do not hang any objects on the mirror or

apply glass cleaner to it. Doing so will re-

duce the sensitivity of the sensor

䊊

, result-

ing in improper operation.

Type B (if so equipped): Push the “䡩” switch

䊊

to make the inside rearview mirror operate nor-

mally. The indicator light will turn off. Push the “I”

switch

䊊

to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the sen-

sors

䊊

or apply glass cleaner on them.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the

sensor, resulting in improper operation.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

Adjusting outside mirrors

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

The outside mirror control switch is located on

the armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when the

power switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Turn the switch right or left to select the right or

left side mirror

䊊

, then adjust the mirror using

the control switch

䊊

Defrosting outside mirrors (if so

equipped)

The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear

window defroster switch is operated. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Rear window and

outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

Folding outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

NOTES

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,

audio and phone systems

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) .............4-3

RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-4

How to read the displayed lines.............4-5

Difference between predicted and actual distances . .4-5

How to park with predicted course lines

(models with navigation) .................4-7

Adjusting the screen ...................4-8

How to turn on and off predicted course lines

(models with navigation) .................4-9

RearView Monitor system limitations ..........4-9

System maintenance ..................4-10

Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) .........4-11

Around View® Monitor system operation ......4-12

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .........................4-15

How to park with predicted course lines .......4-17

How to switch the display ...............4-18

Adjusting the screen ..................4-19

Around View® Monitor system limitations ......4-19

System Maintenance ..................4-21

Vents .............................4-21

Center vents .......................4-21

Side vents ........................4-22

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) ..........4-22

Operating tips ......................4-24

In-Cabin Microfilter ...................4-25

Automatic climate control

(models without Navigation System) .........4-26

Automatic climate control

(models with Navigation System) ...........4-33

Servicing climate control ................4-41

Audio system (models without Navigation System). . .4-42

Radio ...........................4-42

FM radio reception ...................4-42

AM radio reception ...................4-43

Satellite radio reception ................4-43

Audio operation precautions ..............4-44

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player ...........................4-50

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port

(models without Navigation System) .........4-55

iPod® player operation (models without Navigation

System) ..........................4-57

Bluetooth® streaming audio

(models without Navigation System) .........4-59

Aux device player operation ..............4-60

CD Care and cleaning .................4-60

Steering wheel switch for audio control .......4-60

Antenna ..........................4-61

Car phone or CB radio .................4-62

Bluetooth® hands-free phone system without navigation

system (if so equipped)...................4-62

Regulatory information .................4-64

Using the system ....................4-64

Control buttons .....................4-66

Connecting procedure .................4-67

Voice Commands ....................4-68

Making A Call ......................4-69

Receiving A Call .....................4-70

During A Call.......................4-70

Ending A Call ......................4-70

Text Messaging (if so equipped) ...........4-71

Bluetooth® Settings ..................4-72

Manual Controls .....................4-73

Troubleshooting Guide .................4-74

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System With Navigation

System (if so equipped) ..................4-76

Nissan Voice Recognition System (if so equipped). . .4-76

1. CAMERA button (if so equipped)

REARVIEW MONITOR (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the RearView

Monitor system could result in serious

injury or death.

•

RearView Monitor is a convenience fea-

ture and is not a substitute for proper

backing. Always turn and look out the

windows and check mirrors to be sure

that it is safe to move before operating

the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

• The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in showing large stationary ob-

jects directly behind the vehicle, to

help avoid damaging the vehicle.

•

The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference

only when the vehicle is on a level paved

surface. The distance viewed on the

monitor is for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance be-

tween the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically

shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift

lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position or

when the CAMERA button (if so equipped) is

pressed. The radio can still be heard while the

RearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor

system uses a camera located just above the

vehicle’s license plate

䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the power switch in the ON position, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press

the CAMERA button (if so equipped) to operate

the RearView Monitor.

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line

䊊

are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

• Red line

䊊

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

• Yellow line

䊊

: approx. 3 ft (1 m )

• Green line

䊊

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

• Green line

䊊

: approx. 10 ft (3 m )

Vehicle width guide lines

䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines (models with navi-

gation)

䊊

Indicate the predicted course when backing up.

The predicted course lines will be displayed on

the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Re-

verse) position and the steering wheel is turned.

The predicted course lines will move depending

on how much the steering wheel is turned and

will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in

the straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the

predicted course lines are wider than the actual

width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-

ing objects will be actually located at distances

different from those displayed in the monitor rela-

tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you

are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the ve-

hicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it

appears on the monitor.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-5

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines (models with naviga-

tion)

䊊

do not touch the object in the display.

However, the vehicle may hit the object if it proj-

ects over the actual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position

䊊

is shown farther than the position

䊊

in the display. However, the position

䊊

actually at the same distance as the position

䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position

䊊

if the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES (MODELS WITH

NAVIGATION)

WARNING

• If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course line and the actual

course line.

• If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

- Turn the steering wheel from lock to

lock while the EV (electric vehicle) sys-

tem is running.

- Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

• When the steering wheel is turned with

the power switch in the ACC position,

the predicted course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the

screen

䊊

when the shift lever is moved to the

R (Reverse) position.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-7

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines

䊊

enter the parking space

䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines

䊊

parallel to the

parking space

䊊

while referring to the pre-

dicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space com-

pletely, move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position and apply the parking brake.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. While on a RearView Monitor screen, press

the ENTER/SETTING button until the Bright-

ness or Contrast setting bar is displayed be-

low the RearView Monitor screen.

2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the

level.

3. To complete the adjustment, press the

ENTER/SETTING button until the Brightness

or Contrast setting bar disappears from the

RearView Monitor screen.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display set-

tings of the RearView Monitor while

the vehicle is moving. Make sure the

parking brake is firmly applied

Models without navigation

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1. While on a RearView Monitor screen, touch

the touch-screen display. The Camera Set-

ting screen will come up.

2. Touch the Display Settings key.

3. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”

“Color,” or “Black Level” key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the + or - key on

the touch-screen display.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF

PREDICTED COURSE LINES

(MODELS WITH NAVIGATION)

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines

while in the P (Park) position:

1. Touch the Settings key.

2. Touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to turn

the feature ON or OFF.

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines

while in the R (Reverse) position:

1. Touch the touch-screen display.

2. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to turn

the feature ON or OFF.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to oper-

ate the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

• The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show

every object.

• Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed

on the RearView Monitor because of

its monitoring range limitation. The

system will not show small objects be-

low the bumper, and may not show

objects close to the bumper or on the

ground.

• Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance because

a wide-angle lens is used.

• Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

• Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road conditions and

road grade.

• Make sure that the rear hatch is se-

curely closed when backing up.

• Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

Models with navigation

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-9

• When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

• Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may

malfunction or cause damage result-

ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do not

represent a system malfunction:

• When the temperature is extremely high or low,

the screen may not clearly display objects.

• When strong light directly shines on the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

• Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light from

the bumper.

• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.

• The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor

may differ somewhat from the actual color of

objects.

• Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark environment.

• There may be a delay when switching between

views.

• If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera,

RearView Monitor may not display objects

clearly. Clean the camera.

• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry

cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

• Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely af-

fected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera

䊊

, the RearView Monitor may not display ob-

jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a

cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent and the wiping it with a dry cloth.

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1. CAMERA button

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-11

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Around

View® Monitor system could result in

serious injury or death.

• The Around View® Monitor is a conve-

nience feature and is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation because it

has areas where objects cannot be

viewed. The four corners of the vehicle

in particular, are areas where objects

do not always appear in the bird’s-eye,

front, or rear views. Always check your

surroundings to be sure that it is safe

to move before operating the vehicle.

Always operate the vehicle slowly.

• The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other ma-

neuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The Around View® Monitor system is designed

as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot

parking or parallel parking. The monitor displays

various views of the position of the vehicle in a

split screen format. Not all views are available at

all times.

Available views:

• Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of the

front of the vehicle.

• Rear View

An approximately 150–degree view of the rear

of the vehicle.

• Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding views of the vehicle from

above.

• Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front pas-

senger’s side wheel.

To display the multiple views, the Around View®

Monitor system uses cameras located in the front

grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one

just above the vehicle’s license plates

䊊

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM OPERATION

With the power switch in the ON position, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press

the CAMERA button to operate the Around

View® Monitor. The screen displayed on the

Around View® Monitor will automatically return

to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAM-

ERA button has been pressed with the shift lever

in a position other than the R (Reverse) position.

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Available views

WARNING

• The distance guide lines and the ve-

hicle width lines should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

paved, level surface. The apparent dis-

tance viewed on the monitor may be

different than the actual distance be-

tween the vehicle and displayed ob-

jects.

• Use the displayed lines and the bird’s

eye view as a reference. The lines and

the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected

by the number of occupants, cargo,

fuel level, vehicle position, road condi-

tion and road grade.

• If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

• When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are further

than they appear. When driving the ve-

hicle down a hill, objects viewed in the

monitor are closer than they appear.

• Objects in the rear view will appear

visually opposite compared to when

viewed in the rear view and outside

mirrors.

• Use the mirrors or actually look to

properly judge distances to other ob-

jects.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course lines and the actual

course line.

• The vehicle width and predicted course

lines are wider than the actual width

and course.

• The displayed lines will appear slightly

off to the right, because the rearview

camera is not installed in the rear cen-

ter of the vehicle.

Front and rear view:

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate ve-

hicle width and distance to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body lines

䊊

are displayed

on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

• Red line

䊊

: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

• Yellow lines

䊊

: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

• Green lines

䊊

: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

• Green lines

䊊

: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Front view

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-13

Vehicle width guide lines

䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when

backing up.

Predicted course lines

䊊

Indicate the predicted course when operating the

vehicle. The predicted course lines will be dis-

played on the monitor when the steering wheel is

turned. The predicted course lines will move de-

pending on how much the steering wheel is

turned and will not be displayed while the steer-

ing wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The

front view will not be displayed when the vehicle

speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front

view and the steering wheel turns

about 90 degrees or less from the

straight-ahead position, both the right

and left predicted course lines

䊊

are

displayed. When the steering wheel

turns about 90 degrees or more, a line

is displayed only on the opposite side

of the turn.

Birds-eye view:

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of

the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle posi-

tion and the predicted course to a parking space.

The vehicle icon

䊊

shows the position of the

vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between

objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ

somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot covers

䊊

are

indicated in black. The non-viewable areas

䊊

highlighted in yellow for several seconds after the

bird’s-eye view is displayed. It will be shown only

the first time after the power switch is placed in

the ON position.

Rear view

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

WARNING

• Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

• Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

• Objects that are above the camera

cannot be displayed.

• The view for the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

• A line on the ground may be mis-

aligned and is not seen as being

straight at the seam of the views. The

misalignment will increase as the line

proceeds away from the vehicle.

Front-side view:

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width

and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on

the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line

䊊

shows the front part

of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line

䊊

shows the approxi-

mate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.

The extensions

䊊

of both the front

䊊

and side

䊊

lines are shown with a green dotted line.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-

ing objects will be actually located at distances

different from those displayed in the monitor rela-

tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you

are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the ve-

hicle.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-15

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines

䊊

do not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit

the object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position

䊊

is shown farther than the position

䊊

in the display. However, the position

䊊

actually at the same distance as the position

䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position

䊊

if the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

• If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

• On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course line and the actual

course line.

• If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

- Turn the steering wheel from lock to

lock while the EV (electric vehicle) Sys-

tem is running.

- Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

• When the steering wheel is turned with

the power switch in the ACC position,

the predicted course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-17

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the

screen

䊊

when the shift lever is moved to the

R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines

䊊

enter the parking space

䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines

䊊

parallel to the

parking space

䊊

while referring to the pre-

dicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space com-

pletely, move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position and apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the power switch in the ON position, press

the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position to operate the Around

View® Monitor.

The Around View® Monitor displays different

split screen views depending on the position of

the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to

switch between the available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the

available views are:

• Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

• Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the

available views are:

• Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

• Front view/front-side view split screen

The display will switch from the Around View®

Monitor screen when:

If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the

only available view is front view/front-side view

split screen.

• The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the

vehicle speed increases above approximately

6 mph (10 km/h).

• A different screen is selected.

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

1. Touch the touch-screen display with the

Around View® Monitor on.

2. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”

“Color,” or “Black Level” key.

3. Adjust the item by touching the + or — key on

the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display set-

tings of the Around View® Monitor

while the vehicle is moving. Make sure

the parking brake is firmly applied.

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for Around View® Monitor. Failure to op-

erate the vehicle in accordance with

these system limitations could result in

serious injury or death.

• Do not use the Around View® Monitor

with the outside mirrors in the stored

position, and make sure that the rear

hatch is securely closed when operat-

ing the vehicle using the Around

View® Monitor.

• The apparent distance between ob-

jects viewed on the Around View®

Monitor differs from the actual dis-

tance.

• The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above

the rear license plate. Do not put any-

thing on the vehicle that covers the

cameras.

• When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the cameras. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-19

• Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the system will not

show objects and the system does not warn of

moving objects. When in the front or rear view

display, an object below the bumper or on the

ground may not be viewed

䊊

. When in the

bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam

䊊

the camera viewing areas will not appear in the

monitor.

The following are operating limitations and do not

represent a system malfunction:

• There may be a delay when switching between

views.

• When the temperature is extremely high or low,

the screen may not display objects clearly.

• When strong light directly shines on the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.

• The colors of objects on the Around View®

Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects.

• Objects on the Around View® Monitor may not

be clear and the color of the object may differ in

a dark environment.

• There may be differences in sharpness between

each camera view of the bird’s-eye view.

• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth that has been damp-

ened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then

wipe with a dry cloth.

System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the Around

View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving

operation but the system should be inspected. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen,

the camera image may be receiving temporary

electronic disturbances from surrounding de-

vices. This will not hinder normal driving opera-

tion but the system should be inspected if it

occurs frequently. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

• Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely af-

fected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras

䊊

, the Around View® Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wip-

ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

CENTER VENTS

Open/close the vents by moving the control to

either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the vents are

closed. Moving the side control to this direction

will close the vents.

: This symbol indicates that the vents are

open. Moving the side control to this direction will

open the vents.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by mov-

ing the vent slide (up/down) until the desired

position is achieved.

VENTS

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-21

SIDE VENTS

Open/close the vents by moving the control to

either direction.

: This symbol indicates that the vents are

closed. Moving the side control to this direction

will close the vents.

: This symbol indicates that the vents are

open. Moving the side control to this direction will

open the vents.

Adjust the air flow direction of the vents by mov-

ing the vent slide (up/down, left/right) until the

desired position is achieved.

WARNING

• The air conditioning cooling function

operates only when the power switch

is in the ON position or when the

READY to drive indicator light is ON .

• Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation

of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to causes

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

• Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

Driver side Passenger side

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(AUTOMATIC)

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

NOTE:

• Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit.

Odor can enter the passenger compart-

ment through the vents.

• When parking, set the heater or air condi-

tioner controls to turn off air recirculation

to allow fresh air into the passenger com-

partment. This should help reduce odors

inside the vehicle.

The climate control system (air conditioner and

heater functions) can be operated when the

READY to drive indicator light is illuminated.

However, while charging, the climate control sys-

tem can be used when the power switch is in the

ON position.

The fan, heater and air conditioning can be turned

on manually, using the timer function and using

the remote climate control function.

These functions operate in the following condi-

tions.

Power switch position LOCK/OFF ACC ON READY to drive

Fan - - Available Available

Heater and air conditioner - - Available*1 Available

Timer (Climate Ctrl. Timer) Available*2 Available*2 - -

Remote control*3 Available Available - -

*1: The climate control system will only start when charging is being performed. After charging is complete, it will continue to operate if the EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment)

is connected.

*2: The EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment) must be connected.

*3: Models with navigation system.

NOTE:

• A series of operation sounds may be

heard immediately after climate control

ON/OFF operation. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

• Compressor and motor fan may suddenly

start to operate during charging opera-

tion. This is not a malfunction.

• Condensation forms inside the air condi-

tioning unit when the air conditioner is

running, and is safely discharged under-

neath your vehicle. Traces of water on the

ground are therefore normal. Water may

drop underneath the vehicle when climate

control is operating.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-23

DISPLAYING CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

STATUS SCREEN (MODELS WITH NAVIGA-

TION SYSTEM)

Press the STATUS button to display the climate

control system status on the navigation system

screen. For additional information, please refer to

the separate LEAF Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

NOTE:

•

If the READY to drive indicator light is illumi-

nated and the EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply

Equipment) is connected to the vehicle, the

power switch will change to the ON position.

At the same time, the climate control system

will stop operating. However, the fan will

continue to operate. If you want to turn on

climate control again, place the power switch

in the OFF position and then place it in the

ON position again after confirming that the

vehicle has started charging.

•

When the power switch is in the ON posi-

tion, if the power supply from the EVSE

(Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment) is inter-

rupted due to an electrical outage, etc., the

system will operate in the following ways.

– If it occurs while charging is being per-

formed:

– The climate control system will stop

once. If the power supply is restored

within approximately 5 minutes, the

climate control system will restart.

However, if more than 5 minutes

have elapsed, the climate control

system will not restart.

– If it occurs after charging has finished:

– The climate control system will stop.

OPERATING TIPS

• The automatic climate control is equipped with

sensors as illustrated. The sensors

䊊

and

䊊

help maintain a constant temperature. Do not

put anything on or around these sensors.

• Power consumption of the climate control sys-

tem varies depending on the outside tempera-

ture and the temperature set for the climate

control system. Power consumption increases if

the interior temperature is cooled down too

much in summer or if it warmed up too much in

winter. This will result in a reduced driving

range.

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

• Using the AUTO mode will help reduce the

power consumption of the climate control.

• When the AUTO button is pressed, the AUTO

indicator illuminates. The

HEAT button

indicator or the A/C button indicator illuminates

according to the operation of the climate control

system.

• If any of the MODE, A/C,

HEAT, fan speed

control

, front defroster,

intake air control is pushed when the AUTO

indicator illuminates, the AUTO indicator will be

turned off.

• If the charger is connected to the vehicle when

it is in the READY to drive mode and the air

conditioner or heater is on, the power switch

automatically changes to the ON position. The

climate control system automatically turns off

the heater or air conditioner and switches to the

air recirculation mode. Place the power switch

in the off position to begin charging. Turn on the

desired climate control function.

• For normal charge, the climate control system is

operative when charging operation is complete.

For quick charge however, the climate control

system stops operating when charging opera-

tion stops.

• The climate control timer or remote climate con-

trol (for models with Navigation) may fog up

windows depending on the set temperature (for

models with Navigation) or outside

temperature.

• When turning on the seat heater switch prior to

operating the climate control timer or the remote

climate control (for models with Navigation), the

seat heater will also turn on automatically when

the outside temperature is low.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The climate control system is equipped with an

in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, dust etc.

To make sure the air conditioner heats defogs,

and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter regu-

larly. To replace the filter, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

decreases significantly or if windows fog

up easily when operating the climate con-

trol system.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-25

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM)

1. (fan speed control) dial

(intake air control) button

(front defroster) button

4. Climate Ctrl. display

Rear window and outside mirror (if

so equipped) defroster switch

6. Temperature control dial

7. AUTO climate control ON button

8. A/C (air conditioner) button

9. MODE (manual air flow control) button

10.

HEAT button

11. Climate control system OFF button

Automatic operation (AUTO)

The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the

system automatically controls constant tempera-

ture, air flow distribution and fan speed.

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator

will be illuminated.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

When any of the following functions are oper-

ated, the AUTO indicator will turn off.

• The

HEAT or A/C button is pressed.

• The fan speed control or ventilator air flow con-

trol is operated.

• The intake air control is switched.

However, the functions that were not operated

continue operating in AUTO mode.

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

NOTE:

• If the fan speed control dial, MODE

button, or

intake air control button

is operated while AUTO is in use, all the

other buttons operate in AUTO mode.

• While the AUTO indicator is illuminated,

electric power consumption of the air con-

ditioner can be economized compared to

the amount consumed while the AUTO

indicator is not illuminated.

The HEAT indicator light and the A/C indicator

light illuminates according to the operation

modes of the climate control system.

Operation

mode

A/C indicator HEAT indica-

tor

Cooling ON OFF

Heating (A/C

off)

OFF ON

Manual operation

The manual mode can be used to control the

heater and air conditioner to your desired tem-

perature.

The HEAT indicator light and the A/C indicator

light illuminates according to the operation

modes.

Operation

mode

A/C indicator HEAT indica-

tor

Cooling ON OFF

Dehumidified

heating

ON ON

Heating (A/C

off)

OFF ON

Ventilation OFF OFF

Cooling:

1. Press the A/C button to illuminate the A/C

indicator light.

2. Press the

HEAT button to turn off the

HEAT indicator light.

• Do not set the temperature higher than the

outside air temperature. Doing so may prevent

the temperature from being controlled properly.

• A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

Dehumidified heating:

1. Press the A/C button to illuminate the A/C

indicator light.

2. Press the

HEAT button to illuminate the

HEAT indicator light

NOTE:

Electric power consumption of climate con-

trol increases while A/C button indicator

and

HEAT button indicator simultane-

ously illuminate. As a result, the driving

range may be decreased.

Heating (A/C off):

1. Press the

HEAT button to illuminate the

HEAT indicator light.

2. Press the A/C button to turn off the A/C

indicator light.

• Do not set temperature lower than the outside

air temperature. Doing so may prevent the tem-

perature from being controlled properly.

• If the windows fog up, use dehumidified heating

instead of the A/C off heating.

Ventilation:

Press the

HEAT button and A/C button if

the indicator lights are on so that both indicator

lights turn off.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-27

NOTE:

• The ventilation mode requires a lower

power consumption, so cruising distance

will increase.

• In ventilation mode, temperature is not

indicated on the air conditioner display.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

Press the

front defroster button (the indi-

cator light will illuminate).

• To remove moisture or fog on the front window

quickly, set the temperature to the high tem-

perature and the fan speed to their maximum

level.

• After the windshield is cleared, press the

front defroster button again (the indicator light

will turn off).

• When the

front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will automatically

turn on to defog the windshield. The outside air

recirculation mode will be selected to improve

the defogging performance.

Fan speed control:

Turn the

fan speed control dial to manually

control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to change the fan speed

to the automatic mode.

Air flow control:

Press the MODE button to change the air flow

mode.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.

— Air flows from the defroster outlets

and foot outlets.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set the de-

sired temperature.

Air recirculation:

Press the

intake air control button to

change the air circulation mode. When the indi-

cator light illuminates, the flowing air is recircu-

lated inside the vehicle.

Outside air circulation:

Press the

intake air control button to

change the air circulation mode. When the indi-

cator light does not illuminate, the flowing air is

drawn from outside the vehicle.

Automatic air intake control:

To set the automatic control mode, press and

hold the

intake air control button. The

indicator light will blink twice and the inside/

outside circulation will then be controlled auto-

matically. When in automatic mode, the indicator

light will come on when inside air recirculation is

active.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch:

For additional information, refer to “Rear window

and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

To turn the system off

To turn off the climate control, press the Climate

control system OFF button. The same operating

mode (Heater or A/C) that was active when the

system is turned off is active when system is

turned back on.

Climate Ctrl. Timer

While the charger is connected to the vehicle,

this function pre-heats or pre-cools the passen-

ger compartment of the vehicle to the tempera-

ture set by default before driving. This helps

reduce power consumption from the Li-ion bat-

tery.

As the temperature is set to the factory default

setting, the user cannot adjust the temperature.

The Climate Ctrl. Timer operates the air condi-

tioner using power from the charger. Electric

power from the Li-ion battery is not used.

Once the Climate Ctrl. Timer is set, it automati-

cally starts so the vehicle compartment will be

cooled/heated to the temperature set by default

by the registered departure time. It is therefore

not necessary to set the Climate Ctrl. Timer ev-

eryday.

WARNING

Even if the Climate Ctrl. Timer is set, the

temperature in the passenger compart-

ment may become high or low if the sys-

tem automatically stops. Do not leave

children or adults who would normally

require the support of others alone in

your vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. On hot, sunny days, tem-

peratures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to people

or animals. Also on cold days, tempera-

ture in a vehicle could become low

enough to cause severe or possible fatal

injuries to people or animals.

1. Push the

switch

䊊

on the left side of

the combination meter panel.

2. Push the

switch

䊊

until “Climate Ctrl.

Timer” is highlighted on the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the

switch

䊊

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-29

3. The “Climate Ctrl. Timer” screen is displayed.

To change the time of day and the day of the

week that the climate control timer turns on or

off, or to turn the climate control timer on or

off, push the

switch.

4. To turn the timer on or off, use the

switch to highlight “On” or “Off” and then

push the

switch. If “On” is selected, an

additional screen is displayed that allows you

to change the time or the climate control

timer.

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5. The hour portion of the time is highlighted on

the screen. Push the

switch to change

the hour field in increments of one hour. Push

and hold the

switch to move to the

minutes field.

6. Push the

switch to change the minute

field in increments of ten minutes. Push and

hold the the

switch to move to fast

forward the minutes.

Push the

switch to move to the day of

the week setting.

7. Push the

switch to set the day to on or

off. increments of ten minutes.

Push the

switch and then set the next

day with the same procedure. When all days of

the week have been set, push the

switch.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-31

8. The settings confirmation screen will be dis-

played. To confirm and finish setting the cli-

mate control timer, push the

switch.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(MODELS WITH NAVIGATION

SYSTEM)

1. Temperature control button

HEAT button

3. Climate Ctrl. Timer indicator

(front defroster) button

(fan speed control) button

Rear window and outside mirror de-

froster switch

(intake air control) button

8. Climate control system ON·OFF button

9. AUTO climate control ON button

10. MODE (manual air flow control) button

11. A/C (air conditioner) ON·OFF button

Automatic operation (AUTO)

The AUTO mode may be used year-round as the

system automatically controls constant tempera-

ture, air flow distribution and fan speed.

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator

will be illuminated.

2. Press the temperature control button to set

the desired temperature.

When any of the following functions are oper-

ated, the AUTO indicator will turn off.

• The

HEAT or A/C button is pressed.

• The fan speed control or ventilator air flow con-

trol is operated.

• The intake air control is switched.

However, the functions that were not operated

continue operating in AUTO mode.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-33

NOTE:

• If the fan speed control button,

MODE button, or

intake air control

button is operated while AUTO is in use,

all the other buttons operate in AUTO

mode.

• While the AUTO indicator is illuminated,

electric power consumption of the air con-

ditioner can be economized compared to

the amount consumed while the AUTO

indicator is not illuminated.

The HEAT indicator light and the A/C indicator

light illuminates according to the operation

modes of the climate control system.

Operation

mode

A/C indica-

tor

HEAT indi-

cator

Cooling ON OFF

Heating (A/C

off)

OFF ON

Manual operation

The manual mode can be used to control the

heater and air conditioner to your desired tem-

perature.

The HEAT indicator light and the A/C indicator

light illuminates according to the operation

modes.

Operation

mode

A/C indica-

tor

HEAT indi-

cator

Cooling ON OFF

Dehumidified

heating

ON ON

Heating (A/C

off)

OFF ON

Ventilation OFF OFF

Cooling:

1. Press the A/C button to illuminate the A/C

indicator light.

2. Press the

HEAT button to turn off the

HEAT indicator light.

• Do not set the temperature higher than the

outside air temperature. Doing so may prevent

the temperature from being controlled properly.

• A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a

malfunction.

Dehumidified heating:

1. Press the A/C button to illuminate the A/C

indicator light.

2. Press the

HEAT button to illuminate the

HEAT indicator light

NOTE:

Electric power consumption of climate con-

trol increases while A/C button indicator

and

HEAT button indicator simultane-

ously illuminate. As a result, the driving

range may be decreased.

Heating (A/C off):

1. Press the

HEAT button to illuminate the

HEAT indicator light.

2. Press the A/C button to turn off the A/C

indicator light.

• Do not set temperature lower than the outside

air temperature. Doing so may prevent the tem-

perature from being controlled properly.

• If the windows fog up, use dehumidified heating

instead of the A/C off heating.

Ventilation:

Press the

HEAT button and A/C button if

the indicator lights are on so that both indicator

lights turn off.

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

NOTE:

• The ventilation mode requires a lower

power consumption, so cruising distance

will increase.

• In ventilation mode, temperature is not

indicated on the navigation monitor or on

the air conditioner display.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

Press the

front defroster button (the indi-

cator light will illuminate).

• To remove moisture or fog on the front window

quickly, set the temperature to the high tem-

perature and the fan speed to their maximum

level.

• After the windshield is cleared, press the

front defroster button again (the indicator light

will turn off).

• When the

front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will automatically

turn on to defog the windshield. The outside air

recirculation mode will be selected to improve

the defogging performance.

Fan speed control:

Press the

fan speed control button to

manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to change the fan speed

to the automatic mode.

Air flow control:

Press the MODE button to change the air flow

mode.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators.

— Air flows from the center and side

ventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.

— Air flows from the defroster outlets

and foot outlets.

Temperature control:

Press the temperature control buttons to set the

desired temperature.

Air recirculation:

Press the

intake air control button to

change the air circulation mode. When the indi-

cator light illuminates, the flowing air is recircu-

lated inside the vehicle.

Outside air circulation:

Press the

intake air control button to

change the air circulation mode. When the indi-

cator light does not illuminate, the flowing air is

drawn from outside the vehicle.

Automatic air intake control:

To set the automatic control mode, press and

hold the

intake air control button. The

indicator light will blink twice and the inside/

outside circulation will then be controlled auto-

matically. When in automatic mode, the indicator

light will come on when inside air recirculation is

active.

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch:

For additional information, refer to “Rear window

and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual

To turn the system off

To turn off the climate control, press the Climate

control system ON·OFF button. The same oper-

ating mode (Heater or A/C) that was active when

the system is turned off is active when system is

turned back on.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-35

Climate Ctrl. Timer

While the charging connector is connected to

the vehicle, this function pre-heats or pre-cools

the passenger compartment of the vehicle to the

temperature before driving. This helps reduce

power consumption from the Li-ion battery.

The Climate Ctrl. Timer operates the air condi-

tioner using power from the charger. Electric

power from the Li-ion battery is not used.

The Climate Ctrl. Timer function allows two dif-

ferent timer settings. Each timer charge function

can be set to activate on a different day of the

week.

Once the Climate Ctrl. Timer is set, it will com-

plete air conditioning by the time that is set. It is

not necessary to set the Climate Ctrl. Timer ev-

eryday.

WARNING

Even if the Climate Ctrl. Timer is set, the

temperature in the passenger compart-

ment may become high or low if the sys-

tem automatically stops. Do not leave

children or adults who would normally

require the support of others alone in

your vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. On hot, sunny days, tem-

peratures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to people

or animals. Also on cold days, tempera-

ture in a vehicle could become low

enough to cause severe or possible fatal

injuries to people or animals.

How to set Climate Ctrl. Timer

1. Push the (Zero Emission menu) button.

4-36 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

2. Touch “Climate Ctrl. Timer”. 3. Touch “Edit Schedule”. The Climate Ctrl.

Timer setting screen is displayed. Set pre-

ferred time and day of the week for Climate

Ctrl. Timer.

4. After the setting is complete, place the power

switch in the OFF position, and then connect

the charge connector to the vehicle.

Climate Ctrl. Timer setting screen

䊊

Touch to turn on/off the timer. The indicator

light will turn on when the timer setting is

turned on.

䊊

Indicates the departure time. Climate Con-

trol system will be activated in order that

the vehicle compartment will be cooled/

heated to set temperature and turn off itself

by the departure time.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-37

䊊

Touch corresponding keys to adjust the

time setting.

[-]: Touch or touch and hold to decrease the

value.

[+]: Touch or touch and hold to increase the

value.

[

]: Touch to delete the numbers entered.

䊊

Touch the keys to set the days of the week

you wish to activate the Climate Control

system.

䊊

Touch to save the setting.

Priority setting between timer

charge and Climate Ctrl. Timer

If the timer charge function and the Climate Ctrl.

Timer function are in operation at the same time

due to an overlap of the timer settings , either

function can be set to be preferentially provided

with electric power.

1. Push <

> and touch [Climate Ctrl.

Timer].

2. Touch {Timer With Priority}. Priority setting

screen is displayed.

3. Select the preferred setting.

Available settings

Setting item Result

[Charging Timer] When charging is set

as the first priority, the

Climate Ctrl. Timer

does not start until

10 segments (80%)

of the Li-ion battery

available charge

gauge are illuminated.

[Clim. Ctrl. Timer] When the Climate

Control is set as the

first priority, the Cli-

mate Control system

will start to operate

when the remaining

Li-ion battery power

displayed in the meter

reaches 2 segments

(15%) or higher.

Operating tips for using Climate

Ctrl. Timer

• Temperature setting for the Climate Ctrl. can be

changed from [Timer/ Remote —Set Climate

Temp].

• The Climate Ctrl. Timer will only start when the

power switch is in the OFF position. Always turn

the power switch to the OFF position after the

Climate Ctrl. Timer is set.

• To turn off the Climate Ctrl. Timer function,

touch [ON] until the indicator turns off. The start

and stop time settings will not be deleted even if

the Climate Ctrl. Timer function is turned off.

• While the Climate Ctrl. Timer is operating, the

Climate Ctrl. indicator and the charging status

indicator lights flash. If the Climate Ctrl. Timer is

set to activate, the Climate Ctrl. Timer indicator

illuminates.

• If the timer charge function and the Climate Ctrl.

Timer are in operation at the same time due to

an overlap of the timer settings, either function

can be set to be preferentially provided with

electric power.

• If the Climate Ctrl. Timer starts operating while

the vehicle is being charged, the time required

for charging will be longer.

• Operating the Climate Ctrl. Timer or remote

climate control in an environment where the

temperature is low may decrease the rate of

battery charge.

• Timer setting can also be changed while Cli-

mate Ctrl. Timer is operated. When the power

4-38 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

position is switched to OFF, the air conditioner

starts or enters waiting mode depending on the

new timer settings.

• When the difference in temperature between

the air conditioner setting temperature and the

temperature outside the vehicle is large, the

temperature inside the vehicle may not be main-

tained at the setting temperature.

• The charging status indicator lights illuminate in

a specific pattern when the Li-ion battery

warmer operates. The charging status indicator

lights use the same pattern to indicate 12–volt

battery charging, Climate Ctrl. Timer operation

or Remote Climate Control operation. The

charging status indicator lights do not change if

the Li-ion battery warmer operates at the same

time as the above features.

• The temperature in the passenger compartment

may not be comfortable if entering the vehicle

too soon before or too long after the scheduled

time of departure.

• Air conditioning is limited to the capacity of the

electric power when the charge connector is

connected. Therefore, the temperature may not

reach the set temperature due to limitations in

air conditioning performance, if ambient tem-

perature is excessively high or low, or if the

charge connector is connected to a 120–volt

plug outlet.

• The Climate Ctrl. Timer operates the climate

control function so that a comfortable tempera-

ture is provided in the passenger compartment

at the scheduled time of departure. The climate

control is set to stop at the scheduled time of

departure.

Remote climate control

This vehicle incorporates a communication de-

vice that is called a TCU (Telematics Communi-

cation Unit). The communication connection be-

tween this unit and Nissan Data Center allows for

various remote function services.

Even when away from the vehicle, climate control

can be started by accessing the Nissan Data

Center website using a cellular phone or a per-

sonal computer.

When operation is started, or at the set start time,

the Nissan Data Center accesses the vehicle.

When the vehicle receives a command for re-

mote operation, the climate control immediately

turns ON and operates for the specified period of

time. Confirmation of the ON/OFF of the climate

control operation can be checked by accessing

the website or by e-mail.

Completing registration for the NissanCon-

nect

Mobile Apps service is necessary before

using the service. For additional information, refer

to the separate LEAF Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. For addi-

tional information, refer to your elec-

tric medical equipment manufacturer

for the possible effect on pacemakers

before using the remote climate con-

trol.

• Even if the remote climate control is

set, the temperature in the passenger

room may become high if the system

automatically stops. Do not leave chil-

dren or adults who would normally re-

quire the support of others alone in

your vehicle. Pets should not be left

alone either. On hot, sunny days, tem-

peratures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-39

NOTE:

• To check the Li-ion battery charging status

using an internet enabled smart phone or

personal computer.

– The vehicle must be located in a cellu-

lar phone coverage area.

– The cellular phone must be located in

an area with cellular phone coverage.

– The computer must be connected to

the internet.

• Some cellular phones are not compatible

with this system and cannot be used to

check the Li-ion battery charging status.

Confirm this beforehand.

Operating tips:

• When the charge connector is connected, the

climate control operates using electric power.

When the charge connector is disconnected

from the vehicle, the climate control operates

using vehicle battery electric power.

• The climate control can be operated for a maxi-

mum of 2 hours when the charge connector is

connected to the vehicle, or a maximum of

15 minutes when the charge connector is

disconnected.

• The remote climate control will only start to

operate when the power switch is in the OFF

position. Be sure to check that the power switch

is in the OFF position.

• Remote climate control operation is not avail-

able when the vehicle is in an area of cellular

communication range.

• Communication becomes unavailable when the

vehicle is not used for two weeks or more.

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position, communication with the Nissan Data

Center can be restored.

• Air conditioning is limited to the capacity of the

electric power when the charge connector is

connected to the vehicle. Therefore, the tem-

perature may not reach a comfortable level due

to performance of the air conditioning being

limited, if the outside temperature is excessively

high or low, or if the charge connector is con-

nected to a 120-volt outlet.

• If the power switch is in the ON position or the

charge connector is disconnected, while the

remote climate control is being operated, re-

mote climate control operation is automatically

stopped and an e-mail is sent.

• If remote climate control operation is started

while the vehicle is in normal charge mode, the

climate control operates in climate control pri-

ority mode and charging is continued.

• If remote climate control operation is started

and charging is stopped while the vehicle is in

quick charge mode, climate control operation is

also stopped.

• If the quick charge connector is connected and

charging is not performed, remote climate con-

trol operation starts using the battery electric

power of the vehicle.

Temperature settings

This procedure sets the temperature of Climate

Ctrl. timer and remote climate control.

4-40 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

1. Press the Zero Emission menu key. Touch

“Zero Emission Settings”.

2. Touch “Timer/Remote – Set Climate Temp”.

3. Set the temperature and the touch “OK”.

NOTE:

• The temperature in the passenger com-

partment may not be comfortable if enter-

ing the vehicle too soon before or too long

after the scheduled time of departure.

• Air conditioning is limited to the capacity

of the electric power when the charge

connector is connected. Therefore, the

temperature may not reach the set tem-

perature due to limitations in air condi-

tioning performance, if ambient tempera-

ture is excessively high or low, or if the

charge connector is connected to a 120-

volt plug outlet.

•

The Climate Ctrl. Timer operates the cli-

mate control function so that a comfort-

able temperature is provided in the pas-

senger compartment at the scheduled time

of departure. The climate control is set to

stop at the scheduled time of departure.

SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL

The climate control system in your NISSAN is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the en-

vironment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm

the earth’s ozone layer. Special charging equip-

ment and lubricant are required when servicing

your NISSAN climate control. Using improper

refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe dam-

age to your climate control system. For additional

information, refer to “Recommended fluids/

lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer to service your environmentally

friendly climate control system.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-41

RADIO

Push the power switch to the ACC or ON posi-

tion and press the radio band select button to

turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio while

the READY to drive indicator light is off, the

power switch should be pushed to the ACC

position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-

ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality

normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle

may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-

dio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-

ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These char-

acteristics are completely normal in a given re-

ception area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can work against ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-

vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-

nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi

(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM

having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-

nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM

station reception even if the FM station is within

25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between the

transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-

of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-

acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect

off objects.

AUDIO SYSTEM (MODELS WITHOUT

NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

4-42 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position

(usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter), static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-

function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite

radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or

large building for satellite radio to receive all of

the necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is

selected unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satellite ra-

dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if

cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio

signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can

affect satellite radio performance. Remove the

ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-43

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

• Do not force a compact disc into the

CD insert slot. This could damage the

CD and/or CD player.

• Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or

CD player.

• Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

• Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round

discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI-

TAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.

• During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the humid-

ity. If this occurs, remove the CD and de-

humidify or ventilate the player

completely.

• The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

• The CD player sometimes cannot function

when the compartment temperature is ex-

tremely high or low. Decrease/increase

the temperature before use.

• Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

• CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty,

scratched or covered with fingerprints

may not work properly.

• The following CDs may not work properly.

– Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

– Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

• Do not use the following CDs as they may

cause the CD player to malfunction:

– 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

– CDs that are not round

– CDs with a paper label

– CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

• This audio system can only play prere-

corded CDs. It has no capability to record

or burn CDs.

• If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

• Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly

(the label side is facing up, etc.).

• Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped

and it is free of scratches.

4-44 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tempera-

ture inside the player. Remove the CD by

pressing the EJECT button. After a short

time, reinsert the CD. The CD can be played

when the temperature of the player returns

to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio system

(only MP3 orWMA(if so equipped) CD).

Compressed audio files (MP3/WMA)

Terms

• MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Ex-

perts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most

well-known compressed digital audio file for-

mat. This format allows for near “CD quality”

sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal

audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track

from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by ap-

proximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no percep-

tible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes

the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound

signal that the human ear doesn’t hear.

• WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a

compressed audio format created by Microsoft

as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec

offers greater file compression than the

MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital

audio tracks in the same amount of space when

compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

• Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of bits

per second used by a digital music file. The size

and quality of a compressed digital audio file is

determined by the bit rate used when encoding

the file.

• Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is

the rate at which the samples of a signal are

converted from analog to digital (A/D conver-

sion) per second.

• Multisession — Multisession is one of the meth-

ods for writing data to media. Writing data once

to the media is called a single session, and

writing more than once is called a multisession.

• ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the part

of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains

information about the digital music file such as

song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time

duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed

on the Artist/song title line on the display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-

tered trademarks and trademarks in the United

States of America and other countries of Micro-

soft Corporation of the USA.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-45

Playback order

Musical playback order of a CD with MP3 or

WMA files is as illustrated.

• The names of folders not containing MP3 or

WMA files are not shown in the display.

• If there is a file in the top level of the disc, “Root

Folder” is displayed.

• The playback order is the order in which the files

were written by the writing software. Therefore,

the files might not play in the desired order.

Playback order chart

4-46 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not sup-

ported.

Supported versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only) VER2.4

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Displayable character codes*2

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big En-

dian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz

sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot

be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of me-

dia, versions and information are going to be

displayed.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-47

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before us-

ing the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data)

will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and

number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long time before the music starts play-

ing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required

before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,

might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the next song when playing When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited

by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in the desired order The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play

in the desired order.

4-48 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection

port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

• Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could damage

the port and the cover.

• Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.

USB devices should be purchased separately as

necessary. This system cannot be used to format

USB devices. To format a USB device, use a

personal computer. In some states/area, the USB

device for the front seats plays only sound with-

out images for regulatory reasons, even when the

vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB memory de-

vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some

USB devices may not be supported by this sys-

tem.

Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly.

Some characters used in other languages (Chi-

nese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in

the display. Using English language characters

with a USB device is recommended.

General notes for USB use:

For additional information refer to your device

manufacturer’s owner information regarding the

proper use and care of the device.

Notes for iPod® use:

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

• Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a

checkmark to be displayed on and off (flicker-

ing). Always make sure that the iPod® is con-

nected properly.

• An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in

fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected

during a seek operation. In this case, please

manually reset the iPod®.

• An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue

to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected

during a seek operation.

• An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®

nano (2nd Generation).

• Audiobooks may not play in the same order as

they appear on an iPod®.

• Large video files cause slow responses in an

iPod®. The vehicle center display may momen-

tarily black out, but will soon recover.

• If an iPod® automatically selects large video

files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center

display may momentarily black out, but will soon

recover.

Bluetooth® streaming audio

• Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be

recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

• It is necessary to set up the wireless connection

between a compatible Bluetooth® audio device

and the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module before

using the Bluetooth® audio.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-49

• Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio

will vary depending on the devices. Make sure

how to operate your audio device before using it

with this system.

• The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under

the following conditions:

– Receiving a call on the Hands-Free Phone

System.

– Checking the connection to the hands-free

phone.

• Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an

area surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

• While an audio device is connected through the

Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery

power of the device may discharge quicker than

usual.

• This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio

Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to

Visteon.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

1. CD EJECT button

2. RPT (repeat) button

3. RDM (random) button

4. Display screen

5. SCAN button

6. SEEK/CAT button

7. iPod MENU button

BACK button

9. TUNE/SCROLL knob /ENTER/SETTING

button

4-50 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

10. Station select (1–6) buttons

11.

(power) button /VOL (volume)

control knob

12. DISP button

13. MEDIA button

14. XM button

15. FM·AM button

For additional information, refer to “Audio opera-

tion precautions” in this section.

• No satellite radio reception is available when the

SAT band option is selected unless a

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription is

active.

• The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

(Power)/VOL (Volume) control knob

Place the power switch in the ACC or ON posi-

tion, and then press the

button while the

system is off to turn on the last audio source,

which was playing immediately before the system

was turned off. While the system is on, pressing

the

button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with speed sensi-

tive volume. When this feature is active, the audio

volume changes as the driving speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

When the audio screen is displayed, press the

ENTER/SETTING button to show the Settings

screen on the display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

knob to navigate the options and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button to make a selection.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-51

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Brightness Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Contrast Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock Adjust Allows the user to set time manually. To set the clock:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select CLOCK.

3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select “set time”.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

6. Rotate the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust hours.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

8. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust minutes.

9. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

10. Press the

BACK button to finish.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sen-

sitive Volume)

Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to

“OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0 provides no additional boost in vol-

ume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language Select Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

4-52 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be ad-

justed by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button

and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

select the item to adjust. When the desired item

is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust

and then press the ENTER/SETTING button until

the display returns to the main audio screen. If the

button is not pressed for approximately 10 sec-

onds, the radio or CD display will automatically

reappear.

DISP button

Display of the screen can be canceled by press-

ing the DISP button. You can then listen to music

that is being played back. If you want to display

the screen again, either press the DISP button

once more or press the FM·AM, XM Satellite

Radio or CD·AUX button.

MEDIA button

Pressing the MEDIA button will switch the dis-

plays as follows:

iPod®/USB→Bluetooth

Audio→AUX→CD→iPod®/USB

BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it returns to

the previous display.

iPod MENU button

Press the iPod MENU button while the iPod® is

connected to show the iPod® operation menu on

the audio display. Scroll through the menu list

using the TUNE/SCROLL knob. Press the

ENTER/SETTING button to select a menu item.

For additional information, refer to the iPod®

Owner’s Manual.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM●AM band select

Pressing the radio band select button will change

the band as follows:

AM→FM1→FM2→AM

XM band select

Pressing the XM band select button will change

the band as follows:

XM1→XM2→XM3→XM1

When the XM band select button is pressed

while the power switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the channel last

played.

The last station played will also come on when

the

button is pressed to radio ON.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite

radio mode will be skipped unless a SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio service subscription is active.

Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM button

is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or right

for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK/CAT

or button or to

tune from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear

on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this 5 second

period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will

remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is

not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning

moves to the next station.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-53

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve

stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1,

6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the

satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 us-

ing the FM·AM select button, or choose the

satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using the

XM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,

SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of

the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)

until the preset number is updated on the

display and the sound is briefly muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Programming is now

complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the power switch in the ACC or ON posi-

tion and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into the

slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-

ing.

After loading the CD, the number of tracks on the

CD and the play time will appear on the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-

cally turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the CD

was playing, pressing the

(power) button

will start the CD.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

SEEK/CAT buttons

When the FF or REW button is pressed for more

than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,

the CD will play while fast forwarding or rewind-

ing. When the button is released, the CD will

return to normal play speed.

When the FF or REW button is pressed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,

the next track or the beginning of the current track

on the CD will be played.

Repeat (RPT)

When the RPT play button is pressed while the

CD is played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

(CD)

Normal↔1 Track Repeat

(CD with compressed audio files)

Normal→1 Folder Repeat→1 Track Repeat-

→Normal

Random (RDM)

When the RDM play button is pressed while a

CD is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

(CD)

Normal↔1 Disc Random

(CD with compressed audio files)

Normal→1 Disc Random→1 Folder Random-

→Normal

CD EJECT

When the CD EJECT button is pressed with a

compact disc loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pressed while the CD is

being played, the CD will be ejected.

4-54 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect it.

AUX IN jack

The AUX IN jack is located under the control

panel. The AUX IN audio jack accepts any stan-

dard analog audio input such as from a portable

cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop

computer.

MEDIA

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button until

the CD mode is displayed on the screen. Press-

ing the MEDIA button repeatedly will maneuver

through CD, USB, Bluetooth® Audio and AUX

modes.

For additional information, refer to “NissanCon-

nect

Mobile Apps” in this section regarding

“My Apps” key.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text

may be displayed on the screen if the CD has

been encoded with the text information. Depend-

ing on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, infor-

mation such as artist, song and folder will be

displayed.

The track number and total number of tracks in

the current folder or on the current disc are

displayed on the screen as well.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP#/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-

ing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to change

folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a

folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a

folder.

Additional features

For additional information about the iPod® player

available with this system, refer to “iPod® player

operation (models without Navigation System)”

in this section.

For additional information about the USB (Uni-

versal Serial Bus) Connection Port available with

this system, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port Operation (models without

Navigation System)” in this section.

For additional information about the Bluetooth®

audio interface available with this system, refer to

“Bluetooth® streaming audio (models without

Navigation System)” in this section.

USB (UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS)

CONNECTION PORT (MODELS

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

Connecting a device to the USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-55

CAUTION

• Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could damage

the port and the cover.

• Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable my damage the port.

For additional information, refer to your device

manufacturer’s owner information regarding the

proper use and care of the device.

The USB connection port is located in the center

console. Insert the USB device into the port.

When a compatible storage device is plugged

into the port, compatible audio files on the stor-

age device can be played through the vehicle’s

audio system.

Audio file operation

MEDIA button

Place the power switch in the ON or ACC posi-

tion and press the MEDIA button to switch to the

USB input mode. If a CD is playing or another

audio source is plugged in through the AUX input

jack, the MEDIA button toggles among four

sources. .

SEEK/CAT buttons

When the

or button is pressed for

more than 1.5 seconds while a USB memory is

being played, the USB memory will play while fast

forwarding or rewinding. When the button is re-

leased, the USB memory will return to normal

play speed.

When the

or button is pressed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the USB memory is

being played, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the USB memory will be

played.

The multi-function controller can also be used to

select tracks when the USB memory is being

played.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pressed while the USB

memory is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

To change the play mode, press the RPT button

repeatedly and the mode will change as follows:

Normal→1 Folder Repeat→1 Track Repeat-

→Normal

RANDOM (RDM)

When the RDM button is pressed while a USB

memory device is being playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

To change the play mode, press the RDM button

repeatedly and the mode will change as follows:

Normal→All Random→1 Folder Random→Nor-

mal

TUNE/SCROLL knob

If there are multiple folders with audio files on the

USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip

back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip

ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio

files on the USB device, turning the TUNE/

SCROLL knob in either direction will return to the

first track on the USB device.

4-56 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

BACK button

When the

BACK button is pressed, it

returns to the previous display.

IPOD® PLAYER OPERATION

(MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

• Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

• Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could damage

the port and the cover.

• Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable my damage the port.

For additional information, refer to your device

manufacturer’s owner information regarding the

proper use and care of the device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the

iPod® can be controlled with the audio system

controls and display screen, use the USB con-

nection port located in the center console. Con-

nect the iPod®-specific end of the cable to the

iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB

connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®

supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-

tery will be charged while connected to the ve-

hicle with the power switch in the ACC or ON

position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can

only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-

move the USB end of the cable from the USB

connection port on the vehicle, then remove the

cable from the iPod®.

·iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc, registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are available:

• Third generation iPhone® (Firmware version

IOS 2.1–4.2.1)

• Fourth generation iPhone® (Firmware version

IOS 4.0–6.1.3)

• Fifth generation iPhone® (firmware version

IOS6/6.0)

• Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version iOS

6.0.0–6.1.4)

• First generation iPod Classic® (Firmware ver-

sion 1.1.1 or 2.0.1)

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-57

• Second generation iPod Classic® (Firmware

version 2.0.1)

• First generation iPod touch® (Firmware version

1.1–2.2.1)

• Second generation iPod touch® (Firmware ver-

sion IOS 2.1.1–2.2.1)

• Third generation iPod touch® (Firmware ver-

sion IOS 3.1–3.1.3)

• Fourth generation iPod touch® (Firmware ver-

sion IOS 4.1–6.1.3)

• Fifth generation iPod touch® (Firmware version

IOS 6.0.0–6.1.3)

• First generation iPod nano® (Firmware version

1.3.1)

• Second generation iPod nano® (Firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3)

• Third generation iPod nano® (Firmware version

1.0.0–1.1.3)

• Fourth generation iPod nano® (Firmware ver-

sion 1.0.2–1.0.4)

• Fifth generation iPod nano® (Firmware version

1.0.1–1.0.2)

• Sixth generation iPod nano® (Firmware version

1.0–1.2)

• Seventh generation iPod nano® (Firmware ver-

sion 1.0.0–1.0.1)

The iPod touch® may not respond quickly with

the system in some cases.

Make sure that the iPod® firmware is updated.

Audio main operation

Place the power switch in the ACC or ON posi-

tion. Then, press the MEDIA button repeatedly to

switch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pressing the

(power) button

will start the iPod®.

iPod MENU button

Press the iPod MENU button while the iPod®

operation menu on the audio display. Scroll

through the menu list using the TUNE/SCROLL

knob. Press the ENTER button to select a menu

item. Items in the iPod® menu appear on the

display in the following order:

• Now playing

• Playlists

• Artists

• Albums

• Songs

• Podcasts

• Genres

• Composers

• Audiobooks

• Shuffle songs

For additional information about each iten, refer

to the iPod® Owner’s Manual.

MEDIA button

Place the power switch in the ACC or ON posi-

tion. Then, press the MEDIA button to switch to

the iPod® mode.

If another audio source is playing and the iPod®

is connected, pressing the MEDIA button

changes to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pressing the

(power) button

will start the iPod®.

When the MEDIA button is pressed while the

iPod® is connected, the interface for iPod® op-

eration is shown on the audio display. The items

on the menu list can be scrolled by turning the

TUNE/SCROLL dial while the iPod® is opera-

tional. To select an item, press ENTER/SETTING.

Items in the iPod® menu appear on the display in

the following order:

• Now Playing

• Playlists

4-58 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

• Artists

• Albums

• Songs

• Podcasts

• Genres

• Composers

• Audiobooks

• Shuffle Songs

For additional information, refer to the iPod®

Owner’s Manual.

SEEK/CAT buttons

When the

or button is pressed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is play-

ing, the iPod® will play while fast forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released , the

iPod® will return to the normal play speed.

When the

or button is pressed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing,

the next track or the beginning of the current track

on the iPod® will be played.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT play button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

Repeat Off→1 Track Repeat→All Repeat→Re-

peat Off

RANDOM (RDM)

When the RDM play button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

Shuffle Off→Track Shuffle→Album Shuffle-

→Shuffle Off

BACK button

When the

BACK button is pressed, it

returns to the previous display.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

(MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-

vice that is capable of playing audio files, the

device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio

system so that the audio files on the device play

through the vehicle’s speakers. For additional

information, refer to “FM-AM-SAT radio with

compact disc (CD) player” in this section.

NOTE:

For additional information regarding

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio, refer to

the Cellular Phone Owner’s Manual.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the

vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Select “Bluetooth”.

3. Select “Add Phone”. This same screen can be

accessed to remove, replace or select a dif-

ferent Bluetooth® device.

4. The system acknowledges the command and

asks you to initiate connecting from the phone

handset. The connecting procedure of the

cellular phone varies according to each cellu-

lar phone model. For additional information,

refer to the cellular phone’s Owner’s Manual.

You can also visit

www.NissanUSA.com/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on connecting NISSAN-recommended

cellular phones.

Audio main operation:

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press

the MEDIA button repeatedly until the

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-59

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen. Use the vehicle audio controls or the

Bluetooth® device’s controls to play, pause, skip

or reverse tracks.

AUX DEVICE PLAYER OPERATION

The AUX input jack is located in the center con-

sole. The AUX input jack accepts any standard

analog audio input such as from a portable cas-

sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-

puter.

NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo

mini plug when connecting your music device to

the audio system. Music may not play properly

when monaural cable is used.

To switch the AUX mode, press the MEDIA but-

ton until the AUX mode is selected, while the

power switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

• Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the disc.

Never touch the surface of the disc.

• Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

• To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center

to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do

not wipe the disc using a circular motion.

• Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

• A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer

edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the

inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or

pencil as illustrated.

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

SOURCE switch

Push the SOURCE switch to change the mode in

the following sequence:

AM→FM1→FM2→XM1→XM2→XM3→CD*→

USB/iPod®*→Bluetooth® Audio→ AUX*→AM.

1. SOURCE button/tuning switch

2. Volume control button

4-60 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

* These modes are only available when compat-

ible media storage is inserted into the device or

connected to the system.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase or

decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

While the display is showing an audio screen, tilt

the tuning switch upward or downward to select

a station, track, CD or folder. For most audio

sources, tilting the switch up/down for more than

1.5 seconds provides a different function than a

tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:

• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to in-

crease or decrease the preset station.

• Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to seek

up or down to the next station.

XM:

• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to in-

crease or decrease the preset station.

• Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to go to

the next or previous category.

iPod®:

• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to in-

crease or decrease the track number.

CD:

• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to in-

crease or decrease the track number.

• Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to in-

crease or decrease the folder number (if playing

compressed audio files).

USB:

• Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to in-

crease or decrease the track number.

• Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to in-

crease or decrease the folder number.

ANTENNA

Removing antenna

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be

removed. When you need to remove the antenna,

turn the antenna rod counterclockwise

䊊

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod

clockwise

䊊

and hand tighten.

CAUTION

• To avoid damaging or deforming the

antenna, be sure to remove the an-

tenna under the following conditions.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-61

– The vehicle enters an automatic car

wash.

– The vehicle enters a garage with a

low ceiling.

– The vehicle is covered with a car

cover.

• Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation. Otherwise, the

antenna rod may break during vehicle

operation.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your vehicle, be sure to observe the following

precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may

adversely affect the EV control system and other

electronic parts.

WARNING

• A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle op-

eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit

the use of cellular phones while driv-

ing.

• If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands free

cellular phone operational mode is

highly recommended. Exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

• If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

• Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control mod-

ules.

• Keep the antenna wire more than

20 cm (8 in) away from the electronic

control system harnesses. Do not

route the antenna wire next to any har-

ness.

• Adjust the antenna standing-wave ra-

tio as recommended by the manufac-

turer.

• Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

• For additional information, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer.

WARNING

• Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

• If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use

a phone after the READY to drive indica-

tor light is on.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (IF SO EQUIPPED)

4-62 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-

patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you

can set up the wireless connection between your

cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with

your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting

procedure is required. Your phone is automatically

connected with the in-vehicle phone module when

the power switch is placed in the ON position with

the previously connected cellular phone turned on

and carried in the vehicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

specific connections for certain features

(such as phonebook download). If your

phone does not connect automatically to

the system, consult the phone’s Owner’s

Manual for details on device operation.

You can connect up to five different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes:

• Set up the wireless connection between a com-

patible cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module before using the hands-free phone

system.

• Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized or work properly. Please

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recommended

phone list and connecting instructions.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-63

• You will not be able to use a hands-free phone

under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service

area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult

to receive a cellular signal; such as in a

tunnel, in an underground parking garage,

near a tall building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

• When the radio wave condition is not ideal or

ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to

hear the other person’s voice during a call.

• Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

• While a cellular phone is connected through the

Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery

power of the cellular phone may discharge

quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System cannot charge cellular

phones.

• For additional information, refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for troubleshooting

help if the hands-free phone system seems to

be malfunctioning.

• Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

• For additional information, refer to the cellular

phone Owner’s Manual regarding the telephone

charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC’s

RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied

antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or

attachments could damage the transmitter and

may violate FCC regulations.

Operation is subject to the following two condi-

tions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference, in-

cluding interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

• Operation is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

• This Class B digital apparatus meets all require-

ments of the Canadian Interference-Causing

Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH® is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to

Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. If the

button is

pressed before the initialization completes, the

4-64 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

system will announce “Hands-free phone system

not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

• Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Point all vents away from the micro-

phone area and close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

• Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not be

received properly.

• Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

• Speak in a natural voice without pausing be-

tween words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press

and release the

button located on the

steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-

phone, and voice feedback is given when the

command is accepted.

• If you need to hear the available commands for

the current menu again, say “Help” and the

system will repeat them.

• If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized. Please

try again.”Make sure the command is said ex-

actly as prompted by the system and repeat the

command in a clear voice.

• If you want to go back to the previous command,

you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time

the system is waiting for a response.

• You can cancel a command when the system is

waiting for a response by saying, “Cancel” or

“Quit.” The system announces “Cancel” and

ends the Voice Recognition session. You can

also press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to end

the Voice Recognition session. Whenever the

Voice Recognition session is canceled, a

double beep is played to indicate you have

exited the system.

• If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, press the volume control switches (+

or -) on the steering wheel while being provided

with feedback. You can also use the radio vol-

ume control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-

back to speak the next command by pressing the

button on the steering wheel. After inter-

rupting the system, wait for a beep before speak-

ing your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example, press

the

button and after the tone say “Call

Redial”.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-65

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

Phone/send

Press the button to initiate a Voice Recog-

nition session or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the

button to interrupt the

system feedback and give a command at once.

For additional information, refer to “Voice com-

mands” and “During a call” in this section.

Phone/end

While the Voice Recognition system is active,

press and hold the

button for 5 seconds to

quit the Voice Recognition system at any time.

Tuning switch

While using the Voice Recognition system, tilt the

tuning switch up or down to manually control the

phone system.

1. Phone/send button

Phone/end button

3. Tuning switch

4-66 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the

vehicle starts moving during the procedure,

the procedure will be canceled.

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER/

SETTING button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-67

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth ON/OFF Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on.

Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off.

Add Phone or Device Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the

PIN and complete the connection process.

Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voicetags that were re-

corded using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

The connecting procedure varies according to

each phone. For additional information, refer to

the phone’s Owner’s Manual. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth or call the NISSAN

Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on

connecting recommended cellular phones.

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press

the

button and say “Phone” to bring up the

phone command menu. The available options

are:

• Call

• Phonebook

• Recent Calls

• Messaging (if so equipped)

• Show Applications (if so equipped)

• Select Phone or Device

“Call”

For additional information, refer to “Making a call”

in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available under

“Phonebook”:

• (a name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring up a list of

options for a list of options for that phonebook

entry. The system will say the name it inter-

preted based on the voice command provided.

If the name is incorrect, say “Correction” to hear

another name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is identified,

say “Dial” to dial the number or “Send Text” to

send a text message to that number. Say “Re-

cord Name” to record a name for the phone-

book entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the phonebook entry.

• List Names

Speak this command to have the system list the

names in the phonebook one by one alphabeti-

cally. Say “Dial” to dial the number of the current

name or “Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Next Entry”,“Previous Entry”

or Help to move through the list alphabetically.

Say “Record Name” to record a name for the

current phonebook entry. Say “Delete Record-

ing” to delete a recorded name for the current

phonebook entry.

4-68 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available under

“Recent Calls”:

• Incoming

Speak this command to list the last five incom-

ing calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry

in the phonebook, the name will be displayed.

Otherwise, the phone number of the incoming

call will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text” to

send a text message to that number. Say “Next

Entry”, “Previous Entry” or Help to move through

the list of incoming calls.

• Missed

Speak this command to list the last five missed

calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in

the phonebook, the name will be displayed.

Otherwise, the phone number of the missed call

will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text” to

send a text message to that number. Say “Next

Entry”, “Previous Entry” or Help to move through

the list of missed calls.

• Outgoing

Speak this command to list the last five outgo-

ing calls from the vehicle. If the call was to an

entry in the phonebook, the name will be dis-

played. Otherwise, the phone number of the

outgoing call will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send Text” to

send a text message to that number. Say “Next

Entry”, “Previous Entry” or Help to move through

the list of outgoing calls.

• Redial

Speak this command to call the last number

dialed.

• Call back

Speak this command to call the number of the

last incoming call to the vehicle.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)

Speak this command to access text messaging

functions. For additional information, refer to

“Text messaging” in this section.

“Show Applications (if so equipped)”

Speak this command to display list of smart-

phone apps available.

“Select Phone or Device”

Speak this command to select a phone to use

from a list of those phones connected to the

vehicle.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to the

vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem:

1. Press the

button.

2. The system will prompt you for a command.

Say “Call”.

3. Select on of the available voice commands to

continue:

• “(a name)” — Speak the name of a phone-

book entry to place a call to that entry. The

system will respond with the name it inter-

preted from your command and will prompt

you to confirm that the name is correct. Say

“Yes” to initiate the call or “No” to hear an-

other name from the phonebook.

• “Number” — Speak this command to place a

call by inputting numbers.

• For 7- and 10-digit phone numbers, speak

the numbers. When finished, say “Dial” to

initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any time

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-69

in the process to correct a misspoken or

misinterpreted number.

• For phone numbers with more digits or spe-

cial characters, say “Special Number”, then

speak the digits. Up to 24 digits can be

entered. Available special characters are

“star”, “pound”, “plus” and “pause”. When

finished, say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say

“Correction” at any time in the process to

correct a misspoken or misinterpreted num-

ber or character.

• “Redial” — Speak this command to dial the

number of the last outgoing call. The system

will display “Redialing <name/number>”.

The name of the phonebook entry will be

displayed if it available, otherwise the number

being redialed will be displayed.

• “Call Back” — Speak this command to dial

the number of the last incoming call. The

system will display “Calling back <name/

number>”. The name of the phonebook entry

will be displayed if it available, otherwise the

number being called back will be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone connected

to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, the call information is displayed on the

control panel display.

Press the

button to accept the call. Press

the

button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL

When a call is active, press the button to

access additional options. Speak one of the fol-

lowing commands.

• “Send” — Speak this command followed by the

digits to enter digits during the phone call.

• “Mute On” or “Mute Off” — Speak the command

to mute or unmute the system.

• “Transfer Call” — Speak this command to trans-

fer the call to the handset. To transfer the call

back from the handset to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System, press the

button and confirm when prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting

functionality. If a call is received while another call

is already active, a message will be displayed on

the screen. Press the

button to hold the

active call and switch to the second call. Press

the

button to reject the second call.

While the second call is active, pressing the

button will allow the same commands that

are available during any calls as well as two

additional commands:

• “Switch Call” — Speak this command to hold

the second call and switch back to the original

call.

• “End Other Call”— Speak this command to stay

with the second call and end the original call.

Press the

button to accept the call. Press

the

button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the button.

4-70 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

TEXT MESSAGING (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of “Text-to-Speech”. Check lo-

cal regulations before using this fea-

ture.

• Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict

the use of some of the applications

and features, such as social network-

ing and texting. Check local regula-

tions for any requirements.

• Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion. If you have to use the feature

while driving, exercise extreme caution

at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

• If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while using

the text messaging feature, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop your

vehicle.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-

mission to enable text messaging. Check

the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®

pairing. For some phones, you may need

to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s

Bluetooth® menu for text messages to

appear on the headunit. Please consult

your phone’s Owner’s manual. Text mes-

sage integration requires that the phone

support MAP (Message Access Profile)

for both receiving and sending text mes-

sages. Some phones may not support all

text messaging features. For additional

information about compatibility, please

visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth, as well as

your device’s Owner’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and receiving

of text messages through the vehicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the

button on the steering wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of available

commands in order to determine the recipient

of the text message. Choose from the

following:

• (a name)

• Missed Calls

• Incoming Calls

• Outgoing Calls

For additional information, refer to “Voice com-

mands” in this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send. Five

predefined messages are available as well as

three custom messages. To choose one of the

predefined messages, speak one of the fol-

lowing after the tone:

• “Driving, can’t text”

• “Call me”

• “On my way”

• “Running late”

• “Custom message”

To send one of the custom messages, say

“Custom Messages”. If more than one custom

message is stored, the system will prompt for

the number of the desired custom message.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-71

For additional information on setting and man-

aging custom text messages, refer to

“Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the

button on the steering wheel.

2. Say “Messaging” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery time are

shown on the screen. Use the tuning switch to

scroll through all text messages if more than one

are available. Press the

button to exit the

text message screen. Press the

button to

access the following options for replying to the

text message:

• Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender of the

text message using the Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System.

• Send Text

Speak this command to send a text message

response to the sender of the text message.

• Read Text

Speak this command to read the text message

again.

• Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the previous

text message.

• Next Text

Speak this command to move to the next text

message.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if

the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the ENTER/

SETTING button:

• Bluetooth

Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® system on or off.

4-72 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

• Add Phone or Device

For additional information, refer to “Con-

necting procedure” in this section.

• Delete Phone or Device

Select to delete a phone from the displayed

list. The system will ask to confirm before

deleting the phone.

• Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the dis-

played list. When a selection is made, the

system will ask to confirm before proceed-

ing. The recorded phonebook for the phone

being deleted will be saved as long as the

new phone’s phonebook is the same as the

old phone’s phonebook.

• Select Phone or Device

Select to connect to a previously connected

phone from the displayed list.

• Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic down-

load of a connected phone’s phonebook.

• Show Incoming Calls

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming call

information displayed only in the vehicle in-

formation display. Select “Both” to have in-

coming call information displayed in both

the vehicle information display and the cen-

ter display screen.

• Text Message (if so equipped)

Select to adjust the volume of the sound that

plays when a new text is received by a

phone connected to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. The setting all

the way to the left indicates that the new text

sound will be muted.

• Show Incoming Text

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming text

messages displayed only in the vehicle in-

formation display. Select “Both” to have in-

coming text messages displayed in both the

vehicle information display and the center

display screen. Select “None” to have no

display of incoming text messages.

• Edit Custom Messages

Select to set a custom message that will be

available with the standard options when

sending a text message. To set a custom

message, send a text message to your own

phone number while the phone is con-

nected to the system. Three custom mes-

sages can be set. Custom messages can

only be set while the vehicle is stationary.

• Auto Reply

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply func-

tion. When enabled, the vehicle will auto-

matically send a predefined text message to

the sender when a text message is received

while driving.

• Auto Reply Message

Select to choose the message that is sent

when the Auto Reply function is enabled.

Choose from “I’m Driving” or one of the

three custom messages stored in the sys-

tem.

• Vehicle Signature On/Off

Select to choose whether or not the vehicle

signature is added to outgoing text mes-

sages from the vehicle. This message can-

not be changed or customized.

MANUAL CONTROLS

While using the Voice Recognition system, it is

possible to select menu options by using the

steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice

commands. This can be especially helpful if the

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-73

noise of driving makes it difficult for Voice Rec-

ognition system to accurately interpret com-

mands. The manual control mode does not allow

dialing a phone number by digits. The user may

select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent

Calls lists. To re-activate Voice Recognition, exit

the manual control mode by pressing and holding

the PHONE/END (

) button. At the time,

pressing the PHONE/SEND (

) button will

start the Hands Free Phone System.

Operating tips

• To enter manual control mode, start the Voice

Recognition system and tilt the tuning (

)

switch up or down. The system will speak

“Showing Manual Options” when manual con-

trols are initially activated.

• To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning (

) switch up or down. The system will al-

ways speak the current menu option. Depend-

ing on the audio display, it will also show the

current menu option.

• To select the current menu option, press the

PHONE/SEND (

) button.

• To go back to the previous menu, press the

PHOEN/END (

) button. If the current

menu is the Main Menu, pressing the PHONE/

END (

) button will exit the Phone system.

• To exit the manual control mode, press and hold

the PHONE/END (

) button for 5 seconds.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice

commands without difficulty. If problems are en-

countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try

each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until

the problem is resolved.

4-74 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Symptom Solution

System fails to interrupt the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “Voice commands” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: if it is too

noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve

the recognition response for the speaker.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the

phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using

the “List Names” command. For additional information, refer to “Phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

3. Say First Name and Last Name of the desired contact to improve recognition.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-75

For additional information, refer to the separate

LEAF Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

For additional information, refer to the separate

LEAF Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(IF SO EQUIPPED)

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (IF SO EQUIPPED)

4-76 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...........5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......5-2

Avoiding collision and rollover..............5-5

Off-road recovery .....................5-5

Rapid air pressure loss ..................5-6

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-6

Push-button power switch..................5-7

NISSAN Intelligent Key® system ............5-7

Operating range for EV start function .........5-8

Power switch operation .................5-8

Power switch positions..................5-9

Emergency EV shut off .................5-10

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge .....5-10

Before starting the EV system ...............5-11

Starting the EV system ...................5-11

Driving the vehicle......................5-11

Electric shift control system ..............5-11

Parking brake ........................5-15

Cruise control ........................5-16

Precautions on cruise control .............5-16

Cruise control operation ................5-17

Increasing power economy ................5-18

Parking/parking on hills ...................5-19

Power steering system ...................5-20

Brake system.........................5-21

Brake precautions ....................5-21

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...........5-22

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-24

Hill start assist system ...................5-25

Cold weather driving ....................5-26

Freeing a frozen door lock ...............5-27

Antifreeze .........................5-27

12-volt battery ......................5-27

Draining of coolant water...............

.5-27

Tire

equipment ......................5-27

Special winter equipment ...............5-27

Driving on snow or ice .................5-28

Freeing a frozen charge port lid ............5-28

WARNING

• Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support of

others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation

of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and in-

flated to the inflation pressure recommended by

the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,

you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and

check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces power efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stop-

ping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-

function exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-

ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information

• The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also,

this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).

• The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure is

adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at

speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to active the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire

pressure.

• The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also

appears on the vehicle information display when

the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated

and low tire pressure is detected. The CHECK

TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when the

low tire pressure warning light turns off.

• The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap-

pears each time the power switch is placed in

the ON position as long as the low tire pressure

warning light remains illuminated.

• The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does

not appear if the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

• Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the

heat caused by operation of the vehicle and the

outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire

pressure after driving because the tire pressure

rises after driving. Low outside temperature can

lower the temperature of the air inside the tire,

which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure.

This may cause the low tire pressure warning

light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates

in low ambient temperature, check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires.

• The pressure of all tires can also be checked on

the display screen. The order of the tire pres-

sure figures displayed on the screen does not

correspond with the actual order of the tire

position.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment manu-

facturer for the possible influences be-

fore use.

• If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driving

with under-inflated tires may perma-

nently damage the tires and increase

the likelihood of tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may

lead to an accident and could result in

serious personal injury. Check the tire

pressure for all four tires. Adjust the

tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If the tire is flat, repair it as soon

as possible. (For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.)

• When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will

not function and the tow tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-

placed and/or TPMS system reset as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for this service.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

Starting and driving 5-3

CAUTION

• The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried in

snow.

• Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-

dows. This may cause poor reception

of the signals from the tire pressure

sensors, and the TPMS will not func-

tion properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate. Some examples are:

• Facilities or electric devices using similar radio

frequencies that are near the vehicle.

• If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being

used in or near the vehicle.

• If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC

converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

• The low tire pressure warning light may illumi-

nate in the following cases:

– If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and

tire without TPMS.

– If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered.

– If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

When tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates.

This vehicle provides visual and audible signals to

help you inflate the tires to the recommended

COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever.

3. Place the power switch in the ON position. Do

not place in the READY to drive mode.

Operation:

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will

start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is reached,

the horn beeps once and the hazard indica-

tors stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

• If the tire is over-inflated more than approxi-

mately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the

hazard indicators flash three times. To correct

the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on

the tire briefly to release pressure. When the

5-4 Starting and driving

pressure reaches the designated pressure, the

horn beeps once.

• If the hazard indicator does not flash within

approximately 15 seconds after starting to in-

flate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire

Alert is not operating.

• The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill Tire

Alert under the following conditions:

– If there is interference from an external de-

vice or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation device is

not sufficient to inflate the tire, such as those

using a power socket.

– If electrical equipment is being used in or

near the vehicle.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS system.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard

indicators.

– If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate

due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle

about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try

again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire

pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with

any vehicle, a loss of control could result in

a collision with other vehicles or objects, or

cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if

the loss of control causes the vehicle to

slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and

avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under

the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which may

cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt

as outlined in “Seat belts” in the “Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual, and also instruct your

passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-

sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this

occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with

both hands and try to hold a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle

to follow the road while the vehicle speed is

reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle

back onto the road surface until vehicle speed

is reduced.

Starting and driving 5-5

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appro-

priate driving lane.

• If you decide that it is not safe to return the

vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,

road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the

vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur

if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to

hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss

can also be caused by driving on under-inflated

tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-

ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect-

ing the tires for wear and damage. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”

while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by

following the procedure below. Please note that

this procedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate based on the

conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

• The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

• Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

• Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

• Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with

both hands and try to hold a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop

the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and con-

tact a roadside emergency service to change

the tire. For additional information, refer to

“Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving af-

ter drinking alcohol increases the likeli-

hood of being involved in an accident

injuring yourself and others. Additionally,

if you are injured in an accident, alcohol

can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

5-6 Starting and driving

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is

true for drugs too (over-the-counter, prescrip-

tion, and illegal drugs). Do not drive if your ability

to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,

drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING

Do not operate the power switch while

driving the vehicle except in an emer-

gency. (The EV system shuts down when

the power switch is pushed 3 consecutive

times or the power switch is pushed and

held for more than 2 seconds.) If the EV

system stops while the vehicle is being

driven, this could lead to a crash and

serious injury.

Before operating the power switch, make sure

the vehicle is in the P (Park) position.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

SYSTEM

The Intelligent Key system allows the driver to

start the EV system without taking the key out of

the pocket or purse. The operating environment

and/or conditions may affect Intelligent Key sys-

tem operation.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the vehicle information display in the

lower display. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

CAUTION

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehicle.

• Never leave the Intelligent Key inside

the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

PUSH-BUTTON POWER SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-7

OPERATING RANGE FOR EV START

FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key function can only be used for

starting the EV system when the Intelligent Key is

within the specified operating range

䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present near

the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-

tem’s operating range becomes narrower and it

may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,

it is possible for anyone, even someone who does

not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the power

switch to start the EV system.

• The cargo area is not included in the operating

range but the Intelligent Key may function.

• If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument

panel, inside the glove box or door pocket, the

Intelligent Key may not function.

• If the Intelligent Key is placed near a door or

window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key

may not function.

POWER SWITCH OPERATION

When the power switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal, the power switch posi-

tion will change as follows.

• Push once to change to ACC.

• Push two times to change to ON.

• Push three times to change to OFF.

• Push four times to return to ACC.

• Open or close any door to return to LOCK while

in the OFF position.

The indicator light

䊊

on the power switch illumi-

nates when the power switch is in the ACC or

ON position.

The power lock is designed so that the power

switch position cannot be switched to LOCK

until the vehicle is placed in the P (Park) position.

When the power switch cannot be placed in the

LOCK position, proceed as follows.

1. Push the P (Park) position switch on the shift

lever to place the vehicle in the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the power switch to the OFF position.

The power switch position indicator

䊊

will

not illuminate.

5-8 Starting and driving

3. Open the door. The power switch will change

to the LOCK position.

POWER SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The power switch can only be locked in this

position.

The power switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while the driver is

carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories,

such as the radio, when the EV system is off.

This position turns on the EV system and electri-

cal accessories.

READY (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the EV system and electri-

cal accessories and the vehicle can be driven.

OFF

This position turns off the EV system.

*Push while the brake pedal is depressed.

Starting and driving 5-9

The power switch cannot be placed in the LOCK

position until the vehicle is in the P (Park) posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the power

switch in the ACC position for an ex-

tended period of time. This can discharge

the 12-volt battery.

NOTE:

If the power switch is pushed quickly or is

pushed twice quickly, the switch may not

function even if a chime sound is heard.

Push the switch again more slowly.

EMERGENCY EV SHUT OFF

To shut off the EV system in an emergency situ-

ation while driving, perform the following proce-

dure.

• Rapidly push the power switch three consecu-

tive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

• Push and hold the power switch for more than

2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the Intelligent Key battery is discharged, or

environmental conditions interfere with the Intel-

ligent Key operation, start the EV system in the

READY to drive mode according to the following

procedure:

1. Push the P (Park) position switch on the shift

lever.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the power switch with the Intelligent

Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

4. Push the power switch while depressing the

brake pedal within 10 seconds after the

chime sounds. The power switch position

changes to the READY to drive mode.

After step 3 is performed, if the power switch is

pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the

power switch position will change to ACC.

NOTE:

• When the power switch is pushed to the

ACC or ON position or READY to drive

mode by the above procedure, the EV sys-

tem operation for discharged Intelligent

Key system indicator appears on the ve-

hicle information display even if the Intel-

ligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not

a malfunction. To stop the warning indica-

tor from blinking, touch the power switch

with the Intelligent Key again.

• If the Intelligent Key battery discharge

indicator appears on the vehicle informa-

tion display, replace the battery as soon

as possible. For additional information,

refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery

replacement” in the “Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

5-10 Starting and driving

• Make sure that the area around the vehicle is

clear.

• Check fluid levels such as coolant, brake fluid,

and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as

possible.

• Check that all windows and lights are clean.

• Visually inspect tires for their appearance and

condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

• Check that all doors are closed.

• Adjust the inside and outside mirrors.

• Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do

likewise.

• Check the operation of the warning lights when

the power switch is pushed to the ON position.

For additional information, refer to “Warning

lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

1. Confirm the parking brake is applied.

2. Confirm that the vehicle is in the P (Park)

position.

When the power switch is placed in the ON

position, the EV is designed not to operate

unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) positions.

The Intelligent Key must be carried with

you when operating the power switch.

3. Depress the brake pedal and push the power

switch to place the EV system in the READY

to drive position.

To place the vehicle in the READY to drive

position immediately, push and release the

power switch while depressing the brake

pedal with the power switch in any position.

The READY to drive indicator light

in the

meter illuminates.

4. To stop the EV system, push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever, and push the

power switch to the OFF position.

ELECTRIC SHIFT CONTROL

SYSTEM

This vehicle is electronically controlled to pro-

duce maximum available power and smooth op-

eration.

The recommended operating procedures for this

vehicle are shown on the following pages.

Starting vehicle

1. After placing the vehicle in the READY to drive

position, fully depress the foot brake pedal

before moving the shift lever to the D (Drive)

position.

The shift lever of this vehicle is designed

so that the foot brake pedal must be

depressed before shifting from the P

(Park) position to any driving position

while the power switch is in the ON po-

sition.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of the

other positions if the power switch is

placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position

or if the key is removed.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed, and

move the shift lever to the D (Drive) position.

BEFORE STARTING THE EV SYSTEM STARTING THE EV SYSTEM DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-11

3. Release the parking brake and foot brake

pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in

motion.

WARNING

• Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) posi-

tion. Always depress the brake pedal

until shifting is completed. Failure to

do so could cause you to lose control,

which could result in an accident.

• Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

position while vehicle is moving for-

ward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position

while the vehicle is reversing. This

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

• Do not shift to the B position abruptly

on slippery roads. This may cause a

loss of control.

CAUTION

• To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this pur-

pose.

• Do not hang items on the shift lever.

This may cause an accident due to a

sudden start.

Shifting

To move the shift lever,

: Slide along the gate while the brake pedal

is depressed.

: After sliding, maintain it in the same position

until the vehicle placed to N (Neutral) position.

: When in the D (Drive) position, slide along

the gate.

5-12 Starting and driving

NOTE:

• Confirm that the vehicle is in the desired

shift position by checking the shift indica-

tor

䊊

located near the shift lever or the

vehicle information display in the meter.

• To place the vehicle into the D (Drive)

position from the B position, move the

shift lever into the D (Drive) position.

After placing the vehicle in the READY to drive

position, fully depress the brake pedal, and move

the shift lever to any of the preferred shift posi-

tions.

If the power switch is placed in the OFF or ACC

position for any reason while the shift position is

in any position other than the P (Park) position,

the power switch cannot be placed in the LOCK

position.

If the power switch cannot be placed in the

LOCK position, perform the following steps.

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

stopped.

2. Place the power switch in the ON position

while depressing the foot brake pedal.

3. Push the P (Park) position switch and confirm

the vehicle is in the P (Park) position.

4. Place the power switch in the OFF position.

NOTE:

The vehicle automatically applies the P

(Park) position when the power switch is in

the OFF position.

WARNING

• The shift lever is always in the center

position when released. When the

power switch is placed in the READY to

drive position, the driver needs to con-

firm that the vehicle is in the P (Park)

position. The indicator next to the “P”

by the shift lever is illuminated and the

“P” is displayed on the meter. If the

vehicle is in the D (Drive) position or R

(Reverse) position when the power

switch is placed in the READY to drive

position, this may cause a sudden start

which could result in an accident.

• On a hilly road, do not allow the vehicle

to roll backwards while in the D (Drive)

position or B position, or allow the

vehicle to roll forward while in the R

(Reverse) position. This may cause an

accident.

CAUTION

• Do not slide the shift lever while push-

ing the P (Park) position switch. This

may damage the electric motor.

• When switching to the preferred posi-

tion by operating the shift lever, check

that the shift lever returns to the cen-

tral position by releasing your hand

from the lever. Holding the shift lever

in a mid-way position may also dam-

age the shift control system.

• Do not operate the shift lever while the

accelerator pedal is depressed, except

when switching to the B position. This

may cause a sudden start which could

result in an accident.

• The following operations are not al-

lowed because excessive force would

be applied to the traction motor and

this may result in damage to the ve-

hicle:

– Moving the shift lever to the R (Re-

verse) position when driving for-

ward

– Moving the shift lever to the D

(Drive) position when reversing

If these operations are attempted, a

chime sounds and the vehicle shifts to

the N (Neutral) position.

Starting and driving 5-13

P (Park):

Use this shift position when the vehicle is parked

or when placing the vehicle in the READY to drive

position. Make sure that the vehicle is completely

stopped. In order to switch to the P (Park)

position, push the P (Park) position switch

as shown in the illustration above once the

vehicle has come to a complete stop. If the

P (Park) position switch is pushed while the

vehicle is in motion, a chime sounds and

the current shift position is maintained. Af-

ter switching to the P (Park) position, apply the

parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the

parking brake first while keeping the foot brake

pedal depressed then push the P (Park) position

switch and place the vehicle in the P (Park)

position. For additional information, refer to

“Parking brake” in this section.

NOTE:

• While the vehicle is stationary, if the shift

position is placed in any position other

than the P (Park) position when the power

switch is set to OFF, it will automatically

switch to the P (Park) position.

• If the P (Park) position switch is pushed

while sliding the shift lever, the shift posi-

tion will not switch to the P (Park) posi-

tion. When pushing the P (Park) position

switch be sure to first allow the shift lever

to return to its center position.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Make sure that the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting

the R (Reverse) position. If the vehicle is

placed in the D (Drive) position while re-

versing, the chime will sound and the ve-

hicle will switch into the N (Neutral)

position.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

vehicle can be placed in the READY to drive

position in this position.

Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while

driving. The regenerative brake system does not

operate in the N (Neutral) position. However, the

vehicle brakes will still stop the car.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving. If

the vehicle is placed in the D (Drive) posi-

tion while reversing, the chime will sound

and the vehicle will switch into the N (Neu-

tral) position.

5-14 Starting and driving

B mode:

The B mode engages the regenerative braking

system more aggressively on downhill slopes,

and helps reduce brake use. It is activated by

moving the shift lever left and down. The shift

lever will then return to the center position. For

additional information, refer to “Brake system” in

this section.

ECO mode:

Use ECO in order to help extend the driving

range.

In comparison to the D (Drive) position, ECO

consumes less power for the traction motor and

enables the range of the vehicle to be extended.

For additional information, refer to “ECO switch”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

WARNING

• Be sure the parking brake is released

before driving. Failure to do so could

cause brake failure and lead to an ac-

cident.

• Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

• When leaving the vehicle, apply the

parking brake and push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever.

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-15

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Firmly depress the parking brake and it will

release.

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light

goes out.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

• If the cruise control system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically. The SET indicator on the

vehicle information display will then blink to

warn the driver.

• If the SET indicator on the vehicle information

display blinks, turn the cruise control MAIN

switch off and have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer.

• The SET indicator on the vehicle information

display may blink when the cruise control MAIN

switch is turned ON while pushing the ACCEL/

RES, COAST/SET or CANCEL switch. To

properly set the cruise control system, perform

the following procedure.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

• when it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

• in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed

• on winding or hilly roads

• on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

• in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL

5-16 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION

1. ACCELERATE (ACCEL)/RESUME (RES)

switch

2. COAST/SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. CRUISE (ON/OFF) switch

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 to 93 mph (40 to 149 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch on. The CRUISE indi-

cator on the vehicle information display will illu-

minate.

To set the cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the preferred speed, push the COAST/

SET switch and release it. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. The vehicle will maintain the

set speed.

• To pass another vehicle, depress the accel-

erator pedal. When you release the pedal, the

vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

• The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on

winding or hilly roads. If this happens, drive

without using the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following methods.

1. Push the CANCEL switch.

2. Tap the brake pedal.

3. Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The

CRUISE indicator on the vehicle information

display will turn off.

• If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the

ACCEL/RES or COAST/SET switch and reset

at the cruising speed, the cruise control will

disengage. Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

off once and then turn it on again.

• The cruise control will automatically cancel if the

vehicle slows more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below

the set speed.

• If you move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position, the cruise control will be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following methods.

• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the preferred speed, push and re-

lease the COAST/SET switch.

• Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. When

the vehicle attains the preferred speed, release

the switch.

• Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will

increase by about 1 mph or 1.6 km/h.

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following methods.

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle

attains the preferred speed, push the COAST/

SET switch and release it.

• Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows down

to the preferred speed.

Starting and driving 5-17

• Push, then quickly release, the COAST/SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will

decrease by about 1 mph or 1km/h.

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle will

resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Vehicle range depends on a number of factors.

Actual vehicle range will vary depending upon:

• speed

• vehicle load

• electrical load from vehicle accessories

• traffic and road conditions

NISSAN recommends the following driving

habits to help maximize vehicle range:

Before driving:

• Follow recommended periodic maintenance.

• Keep tires inflated to correct pressure.

• Keep wheels in correct alignment.

• Pre-heat or pre-cool the interior cabin while the

vehicle is charging.

• Remove unnecessary cargo from the vehicle.

While driving:

• Drive in ECO mode

– The ECO mode helps reduce power con-

sumption by reducing acceleration when

compared to the same accelerator pedal

position in the D (Drive) position.

• Drive at a constant speed. Maintain cruising

speeds with a constant accelerator position or

by using cruise control when appropriate.

• Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Gently press

and release the accelerator pedal for accelera-

tion and deceleration.

• Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

• Avoid frequent stopping and braking. Maintain a

safe distance behind other vehicles.

• Turn off the air conditioner/heater when it is not

necessary.

• Select a moderate temperature setting for heat-

ing or cooling to help reduce power

consumption.

• Use the air conditioner/heater and close win-

dows to reduce drag when cruising at highway

speed.

• Release the accelerator pedal to slow down

and do not apply the brakes when traffic and

road conditions allow.

– This vehicle is equipped with a regenerative

brake system. The primary purpose of the

regenerative brake system is to provide

some power to recharge the Li-ion battery

and extend driving range. A secondary ben-

efit is “engine braking” that operates based

on Li-ion battery conditions. In the D (Drive)

INCREASING POWER ECONOMY

5-18 Starting and driving

position, when the accelerator pedal is re-

leased, the regenerative brake system pro-

vides some deceleration and some power to

the Li-ion battery.

WARNING

• Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

• Never leave the vehicle in the READY

to drive mode while the vehicle is un-

attended.

• Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls. Un-

attended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

• Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be applied and

the vehicle placed in the park position.

Failure to do so could cause the ve-

hicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in an accident.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-19

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Push the P (Park) position switch on the shift

lever.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

the street when parked on a slope, it is a good

practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

• HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

䊊

– Turn the wheels into the curb and move

the vehicle forward until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

• HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

䊊

– Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

• HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB:

䊊

– Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away from

the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the power switch in the OFF position.

WARNING

• If the READY to drive indicator light is

OFF while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

• When the power steering warning light

illuminates while the READY to drive

indicator light is ON, the power assist

for the steering will cease operation.

You will still have control of the vehicle

but the steering will be harder to oper-

ate.

The power steering system is designed to pro-

vide power assistance while driving to operate

the steering wheel with less effort.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly

or continuously while parking or driving at a very

low speed, the power assist for the steering

wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-

heating of the power steering system and help

protect it from getting damaged. When the

power assistance is reduced, steering wheel op-

eration will become harder. When the tempera-

ture of the power steering system goes down, the

power assistance level will return to normal.

Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

5-20 Starting and driving

that could cause the power steering system to

overheat.

You may hear a noise when the steering wheel is

operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-

tion.

If the power steering warning light

illumi-

nates while the READY to drive indicator light is

ON, it may indicate the power steering system is

not functioning properly and may need servicing.

Have the power steering system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Power steering warning light” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

The power assist for steering stops operating

when both the power steering warning light and

READY to drive indicator light are illuminated.

You will still have control of the vehicle. However,

greater steering effort is needed, especially in

sharp turns and at low speeds.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

This vehicle is equipped with two braking sys-

tems:

1. Hydraulic brake system

2. Regenerative brake system

Hydraulic brake system

The hydraulic brake system is similar to the

brakes used on conventional vehicles.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

Regenerative brake system

The primary purpose of the regenerative brake

system is to provide some power to help re-

charge the Li-ion battery and extend driving

range. A secondary benefit is “engine braking”

that operates based on battery conditions.

In the D (Drive) range, when the accelerator is

released, the regenerative brake system provides

some deceleration and generates power for the

Li-ion battery. Power is also generated when the

brake pedal is applied.

When you put the shift lever in the B position and

take your foot off the accelerator pedal, more

regenerative brake is applied than in the D (Drive)

position. However, during high-speed driving you

may feel that regenerative brake provides less

deceleration than the engine braking in an ordi-

nary vehicle. This is normal.

Less deceleration is provided by the regenerative

brake system when the Li-ion battery is fully

charged. Regenerative brake is automatically re-

duced when the Li-ion battery is fully charged to

prevent the Li-ion battery from becoming over-

charged. Regenerative brake is also automati-

cally reduced when the battery temperature is

high/low (indicated by the red/blue zones on the

battery temperature gauge) to prevent Li-ion bat-

tery damage.

The brake pedal should be used to slow or stop

the vehicle depending on traffic or road condi-

tions. The vehicle brakes are not affected by

regenerative brake system operation.

NOTE:

• When applying the regenerative brakes,

you may hear a sound coming from the

regenerative brake system. This is a nor-

mal operating characteristic of an EV.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-21

• If the power switch position is in a posi-

tion other than ON or READY to drive, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required to

stop the vehicle, and the stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

• When depressing the brake pedal, the

brake pedal feel will not be smooth or

may change when the cooperative regen-

erative brake system activates. However,

the electronically controlled brake system

is operating normally and this does not

indicate a malfunction.

Using brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will cause overheating of the brakes,

wearing out of the brake pads and shoes faster,

and will reduce driving range.

To help reduce brake wear, and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and se-

lect B position before going down a slope or long

grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking

performance and could result in loss of vehicle

control.

WARNING

• While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking or accelerating.

Abrupt braking or accelerating could

cause the wheels to skid, which could

result in an accident.

• If the brake pedal is depressed with

the EV system OFF, you may feel an

increased brake pedal effort and a de-

creased pedal stroke. If the BRAKE

warning light does not illuminate and

the brake pedal feels like it has re-

turned to its normal state after the EV

system is started, this indicates that

there is no malfunction and the vehicle

can be operated normally.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, the

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat up

the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to

normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds

until the brakes have dried.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the Genuine

NISSAN Service Manual, and it can be per-

formed by a certified repair facility. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

• The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is

a sophisticated device, but it cannot

prevent accidents resulting from care-

less or dangerous driving techniques.

It can help maintain vehicle control

during braking on slippery surfaces.

Remember that stopping distances on

slippery surfaces will be longer than

on normal surfaces even with ABS.

Stopping distances may also be longer

on rough, gravel or snow covered

5-22 Starting and driving

roads, or if you are using tire chains.

Always maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately,

the driver is responsible for safety.

• Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the

brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-

pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-

press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,

but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-

ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping dis-

tances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you push the power

switch in the READY to drive position and move

the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse.

When the self-test occurs, you may hear a

“clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally, but without

anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 mph

(5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-

plies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action

is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from

the actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.

However, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-

quired while driving.

Starting and driving 5-23

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor

driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain

driving conditions, the VDC system helps to per-

form the following functions.

• Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on

one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred

to a drive wheel on the same axle that is not

slipping.

• Controls brake pressure and traction motor out-

put to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

• Controls brake pressure at individual wheels

and traction motor output to help the driver

maintain control of the vehicle in the following

conditions.

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the

steered path despite increased steering in-

put).

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to cer-

tain road or driving conditions).

The VDC system can help the driver maintain

control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of

vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the

warning in the instrument panel flashes. When

the warning flashes, note the following items.

• The road may be slippery or the system may

determine some action is required to help keep

the vehicle on the steered path.

• You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and

hear a noise or vibration from under the hood.

This is normal and indicates that the VDC sys-

tem is working properly.

• Adjust your speed and driving according to the

road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) warning light” and “Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

warning illuminates in the lower display. The VDC

system automatically turns off when this warning

light is lit.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The VDC OFF indicator

illuminates

to indicate that the VDC system is off. When the

VDC switch is used to turn off the system, the

VDC system still operates to prevent one drive

wheel from slipping by transferring power to a

non slipping wheel. The

flashes if this

occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the

warning will not flash. The VDC System is

automatically reset to ON when the power switch

is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON

position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the EV

and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a

slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may

hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

• The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. Reduce vehicle speed and be

especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as shock

absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer

bars, bushings and wheels are not

NISSAN recommended for your ve-

hicle or are extremely deteriorated the

VDC system may not operate properly.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-24 Starting and driving

This could adversely affect vehicle

handling performance, and the

warning may flash or may

illuminate.

• If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and

may

illuminate.

• If traction motor control related parts

are not NISSAN recommended or are

extremely deteriorated, the

may

illuminate.

• When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the

warning may illu-

minate. Do not drive on these types of

roads.

• When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the

warning may illuminate.

This is not a malfunction. Restart the

EV system after driving onto a stable

surface.

• If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the

warning may illumi-

nate.

• The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from

moving backward on a hill. Always

drive carefully and attentively. Depress

the brake pedal when the vehicle is

stopped on a steep hill. Be especially

careful when stopped on a hill on fro-

zen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards

may result in a loss of control of the

vehicle and possible serious injury or

death.

• The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-

still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal

when the vehicle is stopped on a steep

hill. Failure to do so may cause the

vehicle to roll backwards and may re-

sult in a collision or serious personal

injury.

• The hill start assist may not prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards on a

hill under all load or road conditions.

Always be prepared to depress the

brake pedal to prevent the vehicle

from rolling backwards. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-25

The hill start assist system automatically keeps

the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle

from rolling backwards in the time it takes the

driver to release the brake pedal and apply the

accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically under

the following conditions:

• The shift lever is shifted into D (Drive), B, or R

(Reverse) position.

• The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by

applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After

2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and

hill start assist will stop operating completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the shift

lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P (Park) posi-

tion or on a flat and level road.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the Li-ion battery:

Do not store the vehicle in temperatures

below -13°F (-25°C) for over seven days. If

the outside temperature is -13°F (-25°C)

or less, the Li-ion battery may freeze and

it cannot be charged or provide power to

run the vehicle. Move the vehicle to a

warm location.

NOTE:

• Connect the charger to the vehicle and

place the power switch in the OFF posi-

tion when parking the vehicle if tempera-

tures may go below -4°F (-20°C). This pro-

vides external power to the Li-ion battery

warmer (if so equipped) when it operates

and does not discharge the Li-ion battery.

Vehicle driving range is reduced if the

Li-ion battery warmer (if so equipped) op-

erates (Li-ion battery temperature ap-

proximately -4°F (-20°C) or colder) while

driving the vehicle. You may need to

charge the Li-ion battery sooner than in

warmer temperatures.

• The Li-ion battery requires more time to

charge when the Li-ion battery warmer (if

so equipped) operates.

• The predicted charging time displayed on

the meter and navigation system in-

creases when the Li-ion battery warmer (if

so equipped) operates.

• Vehicle range may be substantially re-

duced in extremely cold conditions (for

example under -4°F (-20°C)).

• Using the climate control system to heat

the cabin when outside temperature is

below 32°F (0°C) uses more electricity and

affects vehicle range more than when us-

ing the heater when the temperature is

above 32°F (0°C).

• Climate control performance is reduced

when using the Climate Ctrl. Timer or Re-

mote Climate Control while the Li-ion bat-

tery warmer (if so equipped) operates. Set

only the charging timer [End Time] when

charging in cold weather. The vehicle au-

tomatically determines when to start

charging to fully charge the Li-ion battery,

even if the Li-ion battery warmer operates.

Charging ends before the set end time if

the Li-ion battery is fully charged.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-26 Starting and driving

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer

through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen,

heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or

use the remote keyless entry key fob.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is possible that the outside

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check

the antifreeze to ensure proper winter protection.

For additional information, refer to “Cooling sys-

tem” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion of this manual.

12-VOLT BATTERY

If the 12-volt battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the 12-volt

battery fluid may freeze and damage the 12-volt

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the 12-

volt battery should be checked regularly. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “12-volt battery” in

the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system. Refill before

operating the vehicle. For additional information,

refer to “Cooling system” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide

superior performance on dry pavement. How-

ever, the performance of these tires will be sub-

stantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If

you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,

NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW

or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating

and availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Tire chains may be used. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

• A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice

and snow from the windows and wiper blades.

• A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

• Extra windshield-washer fluid to refill the reser-

voir tank.

Starting and driving 5-27

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

• Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving

on wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

• Whatever the conditions, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating too fast, the

drive wheels will lose even more trac-

tion.

• Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

• Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

• Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of

ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-

ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering maneu-

vers.

• Do not use cruise control on slippery

roads.

FREEING A FROZEN CHARGE

PORT LID

When the charge port is frozen, melt the ice using

a hair dryer.

5-28 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ...............6-2

Roadside assistance program................6-2

Emergency EV (Electric Vehicle) shut off .........6-3

Flat tire .............................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......6-3

Repairing flat tire .....................6-4

Jump starting.........................6-10

If the Li-ion battery becomes completely discharged. .6-12

Push starting .........................6-13

Towing your vehicle .....................6-13

Towing recommended by NISSAN ..........6-14

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ......6-14

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING

• If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

• Do not use the hazard warning flash-

ers while moving on the highway un-

less unusual circumstances force you

to drive so slowly that your vehicle

might become a hazard to other traffic.

• Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the power

switch in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

In the event of a roadside emergency, Roadside

Assistance Service is available to you. For addi-

tional information, please refer to your Warranty

Information Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & Road-

side Assistance Information Booklet (Canada) for

details.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

6-2 In case of emergency

To shut off the EV system in an emergency situ-

ation while driving, perform the following proce-

dure.

• Rapidly push the power switch three consecu-

tive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

• Push and hold the power switch for more than

2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors

tire pressure of all tires. When the low tire pres-

sure warning light is lit, and the CHECK TIRE

PRESSURE warning appears on the vehicle in-

formation display, one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being

driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-

vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure

warning light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment manu-

facturer for the possible influences be-

fore use.

• If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Driving

with underinflated tires may perma-

nently damage the tires and increase

the likelihood of tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may

lead to an accident and could result in

serious personal injury. Check the tire

pressure for all four tires. Adjust the

tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pres-

sure, a tire may be flat. If you have a

flat tire, repair it as soon as possible.

• When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will

not function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-

placed and/or TPMS system reset as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer for these services.

EMERGENCY EV (ELECTRIC

VEHICLE) SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

• The Genuine NISSAN Emergency Tire

Repair Sealant or equivalent can be

used for temporarily repairing a tire.

Do not inject any other tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as

this may cause a malfunction of tire

pressure sensors.

• NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire Seal-

ant provided with your vehicle. Other

tire sealants may damage the valve

stem seal which can cause the tire to

lose air pressure. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer as soon as possible after using

tire repair sealant (for models

equipped with the emergency tire

puncture repair kit).

REPAIRING FLAT TIRE

WARNING

•

After using Emergency Tire Sealant to

repair a minor tire puncture, do not

drive the vehicle at speeds faster than

50 mph (80 km/h).

•

Immediately after using the Emer-

gency Tire Sealant to repair a minor

tire puncture, take your vehicle to a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer to in-

spect, and repair or replace the tire.

The Emergency Tire Sealant cannot

permanently seal a punctured tire.

Continuing operation of the vehicle

without a permanent tire repair can

lead to a crash.

•

If you used the Emergency Tire Sealant

to repair a minor tire puncture, a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer will also

need to replace the TPMS sensor in

addition to repairing or replacing the

tire.

•

NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire Seal-

ant provided with your vehicle. Other

tire sealants may damage the valve

stem seal which can cause the tire to

lose air pressure.

This vehicle does not have a spare tire. The

emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emergency

Tire Sealant) is supplied with the vehicle instead

of a spare tire. It can be used to temporarily repair

minor tire punctures.

If possible, have the vehicle towed to a facility that

can repair or replace the flat tire. Using the emer-

gency tire puncture repair kit may cause a mal-

function of the tire pressure sensor and cause the

low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.

CAUTION

•

To avoid the emergency tire puncture

kit being damaged during storage or

use:

–

Only use the emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit on your vehicle. Do

not use it on other vehicles.

6-4 In case of emergency

–

Only use the kit to inflate the tires of

your vehicle and to check the vehi-

cle’s tire pressure.

–

Only plug the compressor into a 12-

volt DC car power point.

–

Keep the kit free of water and dirt.

–

Do not disassemble or modify the

kit.

–

Do not drop the kit or allow hard

impacts to the kit.

•

Do not use the emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit under the following con-

ditions. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer or

professional road assistance.

–

when the sealant has passed its ex-

piration date (shown on the label

attached to the bottle)

–

when the cut or the puncture is ap-

proximately 0.25 in (6 mm) or longer

–

when the tire sidewall is damaged

–

when the vehicle has been driven

with extremely low tire pressure

–

when the tire has come off the in-

side or the outside of the wheel

–

when the tire wheel is damaged

–

when two or more tires are flat

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away

from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake.

4. Push the P (Park) position switch on the shift

lever to the P (Park) position.

5. Turn off the EV system.

6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance personnel

that you need assistance.

7. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and

stand in a safe place, away from traffic and

clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

•

Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the vehicle is placed

into the P (Park) position.

•

Never repair tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

•

Never repair tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

In case of emergency 6-5

Getting emergency tire puncture repair

kit

Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit

located under the cargo area. The repair kit con-

sists of the following items:

䊊

Tire sealant bottle

䊊

Air compressor*

䊊

Speed restriction sticker

* The compressor shape may differ depending on

the models.

Before using emergency tire puncture

repair kit

• If any foreign object (for example, a screw or

nail) is embedded in the tire, do not remove it.

• Check the expiration date of the sealant (shown

on the label attached to the bottle). Never use a

sealant whose expiration date has passed.

Repairing tire:

WARNING

Observe the following precautions when

using the tire repair compound.

•

Swallowing the compound is danger-

ous. Immediately drink as much water

as possible and seek prompt medical

assistance.

•

Rinse well with lots of water if the

compound comes into contact with

skin or eyes. If irritation persists, seek

prompt medical attention.

•

Keep the repair compound out of the

reach of children.

•

The emergency repair compound may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors and cause the low tire

pressure warning light to illuminate.

Have the tire pressure sensor replaced

as soon as possible.

6-6 In case of emergency

1. Take out the speed restriction sticker from the

air compressor, then put it in a location where

the driver can see it while driving.

CAUTION

Do not put the speed restriction label on

the steering wheel pad, the speedometer

or the warning light locations.

2. Take the hose

䊊

and the power plug

䊊

out

of the air compressor. Remove the cap of the

bottle holder from the air compressor.

3. Remove the cap from the tire sealant bottle,

and screw the bottle clockwise onto the bottle

holder. (Leave the bottle seal intact. Screwing

the bottle onto the bottle holder will pierce the

seal of the bottle.)

4. Remove the cap from the tire valve on the flat

tire.

In case of emergency 6-7

5. Remove the protective cap

䊊

of the hose

and screw the hose securely onto the tire

valve. Make sure that the pressure release

valve

䊊

is securely tightened. Make sure that

the air compressor switch is in the OFF (O)

position, and then insert the power plug into

the power outlet in the vehicle.

6. Push the power switch to the “ACC” position.

Then turn the compressor switch to the ON

(−) position and inflate the tire up to the

pressure that is specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label affixed to the driv-

er’s side center pillar if possible, or to the

minimum of 26 psi (180 kPa). Turn the air

compressor off briefly in order to check the

tire pressure with the pressure gauge.

If the tire is inflated to higher than the specified

pressure, lower the tire pressure by releasing

air with the pressure release valve.

NOTE:

The compressor tire pressure gauge may

show a pressure reading of 87 psi

(600 kPa) for about 30 seconds while

inflating the tire. The pressure gauge is

indicating the pressure inside the seal-

ant can. When the sealant has been in-

jected into the tire the pressure gauge

will drop and indicate actual tire

pressure.

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury while

using the emergency tire puncture repair

kit:

• Securely tighten the compressor hose

to the tire valve. Failure to do so can

cause the sealant to spray into the air

and get into your eyes or on the skin.

• Do not stand directly beside the dam-

aged tire while it is being inflated be-

cause of the risk of the rupture. If there

are any cracks or bumps, turn the com-

pressor off immediately.

6-8 In case of emergency

If the tire pressure does not increase to 26 psi

(180 kPa) within 10 minutes, the tire may

be seriously damaged and the tire cannot

be repaired with this tire repair kit. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer.

7. When the tire pressure is at the specified

amount, turn the air compressor off. If the tire

cannot be inflated to the specified amount,

the air compressor can be turned off at the

minimum of 26 psi (180 kPa). Remove the

power plug from the power outlet and quickly

remove the hose from the tire valve. Attach the

protective cap and valve cap. Properly stow

the emergency tire puncture repair kit in the

cargo area.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury when

stowing the emergency tire puncture re-

pair kit:

• Keep the sealant bottle screwed into

the compressor. Failure to do so can

cause the sealant to spray into the air

and get into your eyes or on the skin.

8. Immediately drive the vehicle for 10 minutes

or 2 miles (3 km) at a speed below 50 mph

(80 km/h).

9. After driving, make sure that the air compres-

sor switch is in the OFF position, then screw

the hose securely onto the tire valve. Check

the tire pressure with the pressure gauge.

Temporary repair is completed if the tire pres-

sure does not drop.

Make sure the pressure is adjusted to the

pressure that is specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label before driving.

10. If the tire pressure drops, repeat the steps

from 5 to 9. If the pressure drops again or

under 19 psi (130 kPa), the tire cannot be

repaired with this tire repair kit.Itis

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer.

The sealant bottle and hose cannot be re-

used to repair another punctured tire. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer to purchase replace-

ments.

After repairing tire:

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer for tire repair/replacement as

soon as possible.

WARNING

•

After using Emergency Tire Sealant to

repair a minor tire puncture, do not

drive the vehicle at speeds faster than

50 mph (80 km/h).

•

Immediately after using Emergency

Tire Sealant to repair a minor tire

puncture, take your vehicle to a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer to in-

spect, and repair or replace the tire.

The Emergency Tire Sealant cannot

permanently seal a punctured tire.

Continuing operation of the vehicle

without a permanent tire repair can

lead to a crash.

• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

• If you used the Emergency Tire Sealant

to repair a minor tire puncture, a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer will also

need to replace the TPMS sensor in

addition to repairing or replacing the

tire.

In case of emergency 6-9

• NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire Seal-

ant provided with your vehicle. Other

tire sealants may damage the valve

stem seal which can cause the tire to

lose air pressure.

To start your EV system with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below must be

followed.

Jump starting provides power to the 12-volt sys-

tem to allow the electrical systems to operate.

The electrical systems must be operating to allow

the Li-ion battery to be charged. Jump starting

does not charge the Li-ion battery. The Li-ion

battery must be charged before the vehicle can

be driven.

WARNING

• If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a 12-volt battery explosion, re-

sulting in severe injury or death. It

could also damage your vehicle.

• Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the 12-volt

battery. Keep all sparks and flames

away from the 12-volt battery.

• Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution that can

cause severe burns. If the fluid comes

into contact with anything, immedi-

ately flush the contacted area with

water.

• Keep the 12-volt battery out of the

reach of children.

• The booster battery must be rated at

12 volt. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

• Whenever working on or near a 12-volt

battery, always wear suitable eye pro-

tectors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the 12-volt bat-

tery when jump starting.

• Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

• Your vehicle has an automatic cooling

fan. It could come on at any time. Keep

hands and other objects away from it.

WARNING

• Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the DC/DC converter and cause per-

sonal injury.

JUMP STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

• Do not attempt to perform a jump start

on the 12-volt battery at the same time

that the Li-ion battery is being

charged. Doing so may damage the

vehicle or charging equipment and

could cause an injury.

CAUTION

LEAF cannot be used as a booster vehicle

because it cannot supply enough power

to start a gasoline engine. However, a

gasoline engine vehicle can be used to

jump start LEAF’s 12-volt battery.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle

䊊

position the two vehicles (

䊊

and

䊊

) to bring

their 12-volt batteries into close proximity to

each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake.

If the 12-volt battery is discharged, the

power switch cannot be moved from the

OFF position. Connect the jumper cables

to the booster vehicle

䊊

before pushing

the power switch.

3. Push the P (Park) position switch to place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position.

4. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems

(headlights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

5. Place the power switch in the OFF position.

6. Ensure vent caps are level and tight.

7. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as

illustrated (

䊊

→

䊊

→

䊊

→

䊊

CAUTION

•

Always connect positive (+) to positive

(+) and negative (−) to body ground (for

example, as illustrated), not to the 12-

volt battery.

• Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the motor com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

8. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

䊊

In case of emergency 6-11

9. While the booster vehicle

䊊

engine is run-

ning, place the EV system in the READY to

drive position.

CAUTION

If the system does not start right away,

push the power switch to the OFF posi-

tion and wait 10 seconds before trying

again.

10. After starting your EV system, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then the

positive cable (

䊊

→

䊊

→

䊊

→

䊊

) and

keep the READY to drive position over

20 minutes to charge the 12-volt battery.

11. If necessary, connect the vehicle to a charg-

ing station or EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply

Equipment) to charge the Li-ion battery. For

additional information, refer to “Charging”

section. The vehicle cannot be driven until

the Li-ion battery is charged.

NOTE:

If it is not possible to turn the system ON by

following this procedure, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer immediately.

If the power limitation indicator light

illumi-

nates, the traction motor output is limited result-

ing in reduced vehicle speed. Stop the vehicle in

a safe location before the Li-ion battery becomes

completely discharged and no power is available

to drive the vehicle. Contact Roadside assis-

tance; refer to a NISSAN Warranty Information

Booklet.

If possible, place the power switch in the OFF

position while waiting for assistance to prevent

discharging the 12-volt battery.

NOTE:

If the Li-ion battery becomes completely

discharged:

• The vehicle is automatically placed in the

ON position and it will not be possible to

switch to the READY to drive position.

• The vehicle is automatically switched to

the N (Neutral) position and it will not be

possible to drive the vehicle.

WARNING

If the vehicle is in the N (Neutral) position

and the Li-ion battery and the 12-volt

battery become completely discharged,

the vehicle cannot be placed in the P

(Park) position. If this occurs, place suit-

able blocks at both the front and back of

a wheel to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing. Failure to block a wheel may allow

the vehicle to move unexpectedly which

may result in serious personal injury or

death.

To place the vehicle in the READY to drive posi-

tion so the vehicle can be driven, charge the

Li-ion battery until the driving range on the instru-

ment panel changes from “---” to a numeric dis-

tance.

IF THE LI-ION BATTERY BECOMES

COMPLETELY DISCHARGED

6-12 In case of emergency

Do not attempt to start the system by pushing the

vehicle.

CAUTION

An EV cannot be push-started or tow-

started. Attempting to do so may cause

traction motor damage.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-

age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-

able from a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer. Local

service operators are familiar with the applicable

laws and procedures for towing. To assure

proper towing and to prevent accidental damage

to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you

have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator carefully

read the following precautions.

WARNING

• Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

• Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

• When towing, make sure that the ax-

les, steering system and power train

are in working condition. If any unit is

damaged, dollies must be used.

• Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information about towing your ve-

hicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), refer to

“Flat towing” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

PUSH STARTING TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-13

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or

that the vehicle be placed on a flatbed truck as

illustrated.

CAUTION

• Never tow with the front wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward), as this may

cause serious and expensive damage

to the motor.

• When towing this vehicle with the rear

wheels on the ground (if you do not

use towing dollies): Always release

the parking brake.

NOTE:

If your vehicle cannot be moved because

the vehicle cannot to be shifted to the N

(Neutral) position, please refer to the LEAF

Roadside Assistance Guide which is lo-

cated at www.NISSANUSA.com. If your ve-

hicle cannot be moved because the parking

brake cannot be released, refer to “Parking

brake” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (FREEING A

STUCK VEHICLE)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

• Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery pro-

cedure.

• Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to main structural members of the

vehicle.

• Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

• Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

• Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the ve-

hicle. Never pull at an angle.

• Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except the

attachment point.

6-14 In case of emergency

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-

cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-

vice.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If the vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., try

to free it by following the procedure below.

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

• Shift back and forth between the R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive) positions.

• Apply the accelerator as little as possible to

maintain the rocking motion.

• Release the accelerator pedal before shift-

ing between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

• Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries,

contact a professional towing service to re-

move the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

NOTES

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .......................7-2

Washing ..........................7-2

Waxing ...........................7-2

Removing spots ......................7-3

Underbody .........................7-3

Glass ............................7-3

Solar cell module (if so equipped) ...........7-3

Wheels ...........................7-3

Chrome parts .......................7-4

Tire dressing ........................7-4

Cleaning interior........................7-4

Air fresheners .......................7-5

Floor mats .........................7-5

Seat belts .........................7-6

Corrosion protection .....................7-7

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ..........................7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ..........................7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion...........7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle

as soon as you can:

• After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from

acid rain.

• After driving on coastal roads.

• When contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on

the paint surface.

• When dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and

plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly

using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

• Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid

for cleaning. The acid may react with

some plastic vehicle components,

causing them to crack. This could af-

fect their appearance, and also could

cause them not to function properly.

Always check with your car wash to

confirm that acid is not used.

• Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical de-

tergents, gasoline or solvents.

• Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-

spotted.

• Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by

using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

reapplying wax.

A NISSAN certified LEAF dealer can assist you in

choosing the proper product.

• Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing.

Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

• Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may dam-

age the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a

base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint

surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Spe-

cial cleaning products are available at a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer or any automotive acces-

sory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the

underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will

prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing

the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody

and suspension. Before the winter period and

again in the spring, the underseal must be

checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electri-

cal conductors, radio antenna elements

or rear window defroster elements.

SOLAR CELL MODULE (IF SO

EQUIPPED)

The solar cell uses a plastic cover. When clean-

ing the cell:

• Do not polish the solar cell using a dry cloth or a

wax that contains a compound. Doing so may

strip off the hard coating.

• In order to maintain the solar cell’s effective-

ness, be sure to remove any leaves or dirt from

the surface of the cell.

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to

maintain their appearance.

• Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle

is washed.

• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corro-

sion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure

or poor seal at the tire bead.

• NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be

waxed to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when wash-

ing the wheels.

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so

equipped)

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a

mild soap solution, especially during winter

months in areas where road salt is used. Salt

could discolor the wheels if not removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

• Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

• Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

• Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

Appearance and care 7-3

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non- abrasive

chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSING

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-

ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

• Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on

the tire dissolves more easily with an oil-based

tire dressing.

• Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent

it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it

would be difficult to remove).

• Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel.

Make sure the tire dressing is completely re-

moved from the tire tread/grooves.

• Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended

by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-

facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-

tectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifica-

tion sensor (weight sensor). This can also

affect the operation of the air bag system

and result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

• Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material.

• Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to the leather surfaces

and should be removed promptly. Do

not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-

ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,

detergents or ammonia-based clean-

ers as they may damage the leather’s

natural finish.

• Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

• Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect

the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,

take the following precautions:

• Hanging-type air fresheners can cause perma-

nent discoloration when they contact vehicle

interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a

location that allows it to hang free and not

contact an interior surface.

• Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the

vents. These products can cause immediate

damage and discoloration when spilled on inte-

rior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions before using air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that

may result in a collision, injury or death:

• NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver front

position or install them upside down

or backwards.

• Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-

cifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model and model year.

• Properly position the mats in the floor-

well using the floor mat positioning

hook. For additional information, refer

to ⴖFloor mat installationⴖ in this sec-

tion.

• Make sure the floor mat does not in-

terfere with pedal operation.

• Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

• After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure they

are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-

tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they

become excessively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat position-

ing hook(s). The number and shape of the floor

mat positioning hooks for each seating position

varies depending on the vehicle.

Appearance and care 7-5

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided with

the mat and the following:

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that

the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with

the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s)

and ensure that the floor mat is properly

positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere

with pedal operation. With the ignition in the

OFF position, the selector lever in the P (Park)

position (Automatic Transmission models) or

the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position

(Manual Transmission models) fully apply and

release all pedals. The floor mat must not

interfere with pedal operation or prevent the

pedal from returning to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for details about installing the floor mats in your

vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of floor mat

positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in

the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

Positioning hooks

7-6 Appearance and care

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

• The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and

debris in body panel sections, cavities, and

other areas.

• Damage to paint and other protective coatings

caused by gravel and stone chips or minor

traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing, where at-

mospheric pollution exists, or where road salt is

used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of

corrosion to those parts which are not well ven-

tilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accel-

erate the corrosion process. Road salt will also

accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

• Always check for minor damage to the paint and

repair it as soon as possible.

• Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

• Check the underbody for accumulation of sand,

dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon

as possible.

CAUTION

• NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

• Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the brake lines, brake cables, floor pan

and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, it is

recommended that you consult a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

NOTES

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it yourself

Maintenance requirement ..................8-2

Scheduled maintenance .................8-2

General maintenance...................8-2

Where to go for service .................8-2

General maintenance.....................8-2

Explanation of maintenance items ...........8-2

Maintenance precautions ..................8-5

Motor compartment check locations ............8-7

Cooling system ........................8-8

Checking coolant level ..................8-9

Changing coolant .....................8-9

Reduction gear fluid.....................8-10

Brake fluid ..........................8-10

Windshield-washer fluid ..................8-11

12-volt battery ........................8-12

Jump starting.......................8-13

Windshield wiper blades ..................8-13

Cleaning .........................8-13

Replacing.........................8-14

Rear window wiper blade ...............8-16

Brakes ............................8-16

Brake pad wear warning ................8-16

Fuses .............................8-17

Motor compartment ...................8-17

Passenger compartment ................8-19

Nissan Intelligent Key® battery replacement ......8-20

Lights .............................8-22

Headlights ........................8-22

Exterior and interior lights ...............8-24

Wheels and tires ......................8-26

Tire pressure .......................8-26

Tire labeling .......................8-30

Types of tires .......................8-32

Tire chains .......................

.8-33

Changing

wheels and tires...............8-33

Emergency tire puncture repair kit ..........8-36

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with long

service intervals to save you both time and

money. However, some day-to-day and regular

maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSA-

N’s fine mechanical condition, and its Electric

Vehicle (EV) system performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, and general mainte-

nance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper

maintenance care. You are a vital link in the main-

tenance chain.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

For your convenience, both required and optional

scheduled maintenance items are described and

listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure

that necessary maintenance is performed on your

NISSAN at regular intervals.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and serviced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership information systems. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-

hicles before work begins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer’s service department performs the

best job to meet the maintenance requirements

on your vehicle — in a reliable and economical

way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer do it promptly. In

addition, you should notify a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, refer to “Maintenance precautions” in this

section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE

ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found in this section.

Outside vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and motor hood: Check that all doors

and the motor hood operate properly. Also en-

sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate

hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if

necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it yourself

keeps the motor hood from opening when the

primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check the aim of the headlights.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure that no wheel nuts are miss-

ing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten

if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires to the pres-

sure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts

or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

pulls to either side while driving on a straight and

level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire

wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal

highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-

aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair

facility.

Wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they

do not wipe properly.

Inside vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when per-

forming scheduled maintenance, cleaning the ve-

hicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure that the pedal does not

catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat

away from the pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth op-

eration. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down

further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the

vehicle seems to take longer to stop, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF

dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from

the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Electric shift P (Park) position mechanism:

On a steep hill, check that the vehicle is held

securely while the vehicle is in the P (Park) posi-

tion without applying the brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake opera-

tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held

on a steep hill with only the parking brake applied.

If the parking brake cannot keep a vehicle posi-

tion, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

Seat: Check seat position controls such as the

seat adjusters, seatback recliners, etc. to ensure

that they operate smoothly and that all latches

lock securely in every position. Check that the

head restraints/headrests move up and down

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-3

smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped) hold

securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive free play,

hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air emits

from the defroster outlets properly and in suffi-

cient quantity when operating the heater or air

conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washers operate properly and

that the wipers do not streak.

Under hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically.

12-volt battery (for serviceable battery)*:

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be

between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles oper-

ated in high temperatures or under severe condi-

tions require frequent checks of the 12–volt bat-

tery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume battery

power when the engine is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines

on the reservoir.

Coolant level*: Check the coolant level when

the motor compartment is cold.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for water

or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been

parked for a while. Water dripping from the air

conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks, check for cause and have it

corrected immediately.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure that

the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or

loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust will form on the floor pan and frame. At

the end of winter, the underbody should be thor-

oughly flushed with plain water, being careful to

clean those areas where mud and dirt may accu-

mulate. For additional information, refer to

“Cleaning exterior” in the “Appearance and care”

section of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is

an adequate amount of fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it yourself

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions that should be closely observed.

WARNING

• The EV system uses high voltage up to

approximately DC 400 volt. The system

can be hot during and after starting

and when the vehicle is shut off. Be

careful of both the high voltage and

the high temperature. Obey the labels

that are attached to the vehicle.

• Never disassemble, remove or replace

high-voltage parts and cables as well

as their connectors. High-voltage

cables are colored orange.

• Disassembling, removing or replacing

those parts or cables can cause severe

burns or electric shock that may result

in serious injury or death. The vehicle

high-voltage system has no user ser-

viceable parts. Take your vehicle to the

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for any

necessary maintenance.

• Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely and

chock the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. Push the P (Park)

position switch on the shift lever or

place the vehicle into the N (Neutral)

position.

• If you must work with the EV (Electric

vehicle) system is turned on, keep

hands, clothing, hair and tools away

from moving fans and any other mov-

ing parts.

• Make sure that the power switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position when per-

forming any part replacement or re-

pairs.

• It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

• Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

• Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

• Keep smoking materials, flames and

sparks away from the 12-volt battery.

CAUTION

• Do not work under the hood while the

motor compartment is hot. Push the

power switch in the OFF position and

wait until it cools down.

• Avoid direct contact with used coolant.

Improperly disposed coolant and/or

other vehicle fluids can damage the

environment. Always conform to local

regulations for the disposal of vehicle

fluids.

• Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the power switch is in the ON

position.

• Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic cooling fan. It may come on at

any time without warning, even if the

power switch is not in the ACC, ON or

READY to drive position. To avoid in-

jury, always disconnect the negative

12-volt battery cable before working

near the fan.

• Before performing any electrical main-

tenance work on the vehicle such as

the battery, fuses or bulb replacement,

confirm the following:

– The charge connector is removed

from the vehicle.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-5

– The Climate Ctrl. Timer is not active

or operating. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Climate Ctrl.

Timer” in the “Display screen,

heater, air conditioner, audio and

phone system” section of this

manual.

– The 12-volt battery is not being

charged by the Li-ion battery and

that all charging status indicator

lights are off. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Charging the 12-

volt battery” in the “EV overview”

section and “Charging status indica-

tor lights” in the “Charging” section

of this manual.

• The power switch is in the OFF posi-

tion. Place the power switch in the ON

position and then in the OFF position

to prevent the 12-volt battery auto-

matically being charged by the Li-ion

battery. For additional information, re-

fer to “Charging the 12-volt battery” in

the “EV overview” section of this

manual.

The “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items that

are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also avail-

able. For additional information, refer to “Owner’s

manual/service manual order information” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties and

could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it yourself

1. Brake fluid reservoir

2. 12-volt battery

3. Fuse/Fusible link holder

4. Fuse/Fusible link holder

5. Coolant reservoir cap

6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

7. Fuse/Fusible link holder

MOTOR COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-7

The cooling system is filled at the factory with a

pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% wa-

ter to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant

protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust

and corrosion inhibitors. Additional cooling sys-

tem additives are not necessary.

WARNING

• Never remove the coolant tank cap

when the motor compartment is hot.

Wait until the motor compartment cool

down.

• The coolant tank is equipped with a

special type coolant tank cap. To pre-

vent damage to the motor compart-

ment, use only a Genuine NISSAN

coolant tank cap.

CAUTION

• Never use any additives in the coolant

such as radiator sealer in the cooling

system. This may cause damage to

electrical equipment such as the motor

and inverter.

• When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-

diluted to provide antifreeze protec-

tion to −34°F (−37°C) . If additional

freeze protection is needed due to the

weather conditions where you operate

your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

concentrate following the directions

on the container. If and equivalent

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufacture’s

instructions to maintain minimum an-

tifreeze protection to −34°F (−37°C).

The use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the cooling

system.

• The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 125,000 miles (200,000 km)

or 15 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),

including Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-filled

coolant. For additional information, re-

fer to the NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide.

COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it yourself

CHECKING COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the high-voltage parts are cold. If the coolant

level is below the MIN level

䊊

, open the reservoir

cap and add coolant up to the MAX level

䊊

.If

the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in

the coolant reservoir when the high-voltage

parts are cold. If there is insufficient coolant in

the coolant reservoir, fill the coolant reservoir with

coolant up to the reservoir cap opening and also

add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level

䊊

Tighten the cap securely after adding coolant.

For additional information on the location of the

coolant reservoir, refer to “Motor compartment

check locations” in this section.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer.

CHANGING COOLANT

It is recommended that major cooling system

repairs should be performed by a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer. The service procedures can be

found in the appropriate NISSAN Service

Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance.

WARNING

• To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the

motor compartment is hot.

• Never remove the coolant reservoir

cap when the motor compartment is

hot. Serious burns could be caused by

high-pressure fluid escaping from the

radiator.

• Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

• Keep coolant out of reach of children

and pets.

Coolant must be disposed of properly. Check

your local regulations.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-9

When checking or replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

CAUTION

• Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.

• Using reduction gear fluid other than

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will

cause deterioration in driveability and

reduction gear durability, and may

damage the reduction gear, which is

not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

For additional brake fluid information, refer to

“Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

WARNING

• Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can damage

the brake system, and affect the vehi-

cle’s stopping ability.

• Clean the filler cap before removing.

• Brake fluid is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid

is spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is

below the MIN line

䊊

or the brake warning light

illuminates, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy

Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to

the MAX line

䊊

. If fluid must be added fre-

quently, the system should be checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

REDUCTION GEAR FLUID BRAKE FLUID

8-10 Maintenance and do-it yourself

Except for Canada

To check the fluid level, use your finger to plug the

center hole

䊊

of the cap/tube assembly, then

remove it from the reservoir. If there is no fluid in

the tube, add fluid.

For Canada

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low

washer fluid message appears on the vehicle

information display. For additional information,

refer to “Indicators for operation” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift

the cap

䊊

and pour the windshield-washer fluid

into the reservoir opening.

Add a windshield-washer solvent to the reservoir

for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid:

Genuine NISSAN Windshield-Washer Concen-

trate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

CAUTION

• Do not substitute antifreeze coolant

for windshield-washer solution. This

may result in damage to the paint.

• Do not fill the windshield-washer res-

ervoir with windshield-washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based windshield-

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the windshield-washer reser-

voir.

• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer reservoir to mix the

windshield-washer fluid concentrate

and water.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-11

• Keep the 12-volt battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the 12-volt battery with a solution of

baking soda and water.

• Make certain the terminal connections are clean

and securely tightened.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume battery

power when the motor is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health

WARNING

• Do not expose the 12-volt battery to

flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen

gas generated by the 12-volt battery is

explosive. Do not allow 12-volt battery

fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics

or painted surfaces. After touching a

12-volt battery or 12-volt battery cap,

do not touch or rub your eyes. Thor-

oughly wash your hands. If the acid

contacts your eyes, skin or clothing,

immediately flush with water for at

least 15 minutes and seek medical at-

tention.

• Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the 12-volt battery is low. Low 12-

volt battery fluid can cause a higher

load on the 12-volt battery which can

generate heat, reduce battery life, and

in some cases lead to an explosion.

• When working on or near a 12-volt

battery, always wear suitable eye pro-

tection and remove all jewelry.

• 12-volt battery posts, terminals and re-

lated accessories contain lead and

lead compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

• Keep the 12-volt battery out of the

reach of children.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as

shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery

case.

12-VOLT BATTERY

8-12 Maintenance and do-it yourself

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is nec-

essary to add fluid, add only distilled water to

bring the level up to the bottom of the filler

opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent

caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

12-volt battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

Jump starting provides power to the 12 volt sys-

tem to allow the electrical systems to operate.

The electrical systems must be operating to allow

the Li-ion battery to be charged. Jump starting

does not charge the Li-ion battery. The Li-ion

battery must be charged before the vehicle can

be driven.

For additional information, refer to “Jump start-

ing” in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the power switch does not switch to

the READY to drive position by jump starting, the

12-volt battery may have to be replaced. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield

is still not clear after cleaning the blades and

using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-13

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

Pulling up the wiper arm

The wiper arm should be in the up position when

replacing the wiper.

Pull up the wiper arm manually or using the wiper

rise-up function.

Wiper rise-up function:

To pull up the wiper arm, pull the lever

䊊

within

1 minute after the power switch is turned off. The

wiper operation stops in mid-operation and wiper

arm can be pulled up.

To lower the wiper arm, place the wiper arm in the

down position and then push the lever

䊊

once after the power switch is turned on.

CAUTION

Do not operate the windshield wiper

while arm is pulled up. The wiper arm or

hood may be damaged.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it yourself

Replacing

1. Push the release tab

䊊

, and move the wiper

blade down the wiper arm

䊊

while pushing

the release tab to remove.

2. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm

until a click sounds.

3. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is in

the groove.

CAUTION

• After wiper blade replacement,

return the wiper arm to its origi-

nal position; otherwise it may be

damaged when the hood is

opened.

• Make sure the wiper blades con-

tact the glass; otherwise the arm

may be damaged from wind

pressure.

Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle

䊊

. This

may cause improper windshield washer opera-

tion. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any objects

with a needle or small pin

䊊

. Be careful not to

damage the nozzle.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-15

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer if checking or replacement is

required.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this service.

WARNING

Do not adjust the height of the brake

pedal. Doing so could alter the effective-

ness of the brakes, which could result in a

serious accident and personal injury. If

adjustment is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer for this service.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a brake pad requires replacement, it will

make a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first

occur only when the brake pedal is depressed.

After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will

always be heard even if the brake pedal is not

depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as

possible if the wear warning sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information, refer to

the maintenance log section of your NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide.

BRAKES

8-16 Maintenance and do-it yourself

MOTOR COMPARTMENT

WARNING

• Never touch, disassemble, remove or

replace the high-voltage parts and

cables, as well as their connectors.

High-voltage cables are colored or-

ange. Touching, disassembling, re-

moving or replacing those parts and

cables can cause severe burns or elec-

tric shock that may result in serious

injury or death.

• Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Confirm that the power switch and the head-

light switch are turned off.

2. Open the hood.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover by

pushing the tab and lifting the cover from the

right side, and then the left side.

4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

5. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller located

in the passenger compartment fuse box.

FUSES

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-17

6. If the fuse is open

䊊

, replace it with a new

fuse

䊊

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked, and if necessary, repaired. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN cer-

tified LEAF dealer for this service.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate and

the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links in the holders

䊊

and

䊊

. If any of these

fusible links are melted, replace only with Genu-

ine NISSAN parts.

For checking and replacing the fusible links in the

holders

䊊

and

䊊

, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this

service.

8-18 Maintenance and do-it yourself

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic control

units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Make sure that the power switch and the

headlight switch are turned off.

2. Insert a screwdriver wrapped with the cloth

䊊

into the slit

䊊

Use a cloth

䊊

to protect the fuse box cover.

3. Then pull to remove the fuse box cover

䊊

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

䊊

5. If the fuse is open

䊊

, replace it with a new

fuse

䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked, and if necessary repaired. It

is recommended that you visit a by a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-19

CAUTION

• Be careful not to allow children to

swallow the battery and removed

parts.

• An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

• When changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the components.

• There is danger of explosion if the

lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equiva-

lent type.

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as

follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the

corner and twist it to separate the upper part

from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the

casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery:

CR2025 or equivalent

• Do not touch the internal circuit and electric

terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

• Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the

battery across the contact points will seri-

ously deplete the storage capacity.

• Make sure that the 丣 side faces the bottom

of the case.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-20 Maintenance and do-it yourself

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts

䊊

and then push them together

䊊

until it is

securely closed.

5. Operate the buttons to check that it is func-

tioning properly.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer for this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-21

1. Headlight assembly

2. Map light

3. Room light

4. High-mounted stop light

5. Rear combination light

6. Cargo light

7. License plate light

8. Side marker light

9. Fog light (if so equipped)

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not

a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for this service.

HEADLIGHTS

For additional information on headlight bulb re-

placement refer to the instructions outlined in this

section.

Replacing

Halogen headlight (high-beam):

The headlight high-beam is a semi-sealed beam

type that uses a replaceable headlight (halogen)

bulb.

LIGHTS

8-22 Maintenance and do-it yourself

CAUTION

• Do not leave the bulb out of the head-

light reflector for a long period of time.

Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering

the headlight body may affect bulb

performance.

• High-pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

• Only touch the base when handling the

bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

Touching the glass envelope could sig-

nificantly affect bulb life and/or head-

light performance.

• Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is

necessary, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

for this service.

• Fog may temporarily form inside the

lens of the exterior lights in the rain or

in a car wash. A temperature differ-

ence between the inside and the out-

side of the lens causes the fog. This is

not a malfunction. If large drops of

water collect inside the lens, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

Use the same number and wattage as originally

installed as shown in the chart.

Disconnect the battery negative cable before

replacing bulbs.

1. Remove the connector

䊊

2. Turn the headlight bulb, and then remove the

bulb

䊊

Disconnect the battery negative cable before

replacing bulbs.

1. Remove the connector

䊊

2. Turn the headlight bulb, and then remove the

bulb

䊊

Type A (if so equipped)

Type B (if so equipped)

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-23

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)

High/Daytime running (Canada only) 65 H9

Low* — —

Park/Turn signal 27/7 3457NAK

Clearance 5 W5W

Side marker* 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)

High/Low/Daytime running (Canada only) 60/55 H13

Park/Turn signal 27/7 3457NAK

Side marker* 5 W5W

Front fog light (if so equipped)* 55 H11

Charge port lid light* — —

Rear combination light

Turn signal 21 WY21W

Stop/Tail* — —

Back-up 16 W16W

Side marker* — —

License plate light* 5 W5W

Map light* — —

High-mounted stop light* — —

Room light — —

Cargo light 5 —

*It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for replacement.

NOTE:

Always check with the Parts Department at

a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer for the lat-

est information about parts.

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens

and/or cover.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it yourself

: REMOVE

: INSTALL

Front turn signal light

Clearance light (if so equipped)

License plate light

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-25

1. Remove the rear combination attachment bolt

䊊

2. Pull the rear combination assembly evenly

toward rear of the vehicle

䊊

3. Turn the bulb socket and then remove the

bulb

䊊

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit,

and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warn-

ing appears on the vehicle information

Rear combination light

Cargo light

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-26 Maintenance and do-it yourself

display, one or more of your tires is signifi-

cantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, refer to “Low

tire pressure warning light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section, “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in

the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires often and

always prior to long distance trips. The

recommended tire pressure specifica-

tions are shown on the F.M.V.S.S/

C.M.V.S.S certification label or Tire and

Loading Information label under the “Cold

Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire and

Loading Information label is affixed to the

driver side center pillar. Tire pressures

should be checked regularly because:

• Most tires naturally lose air over time.

• Tires can lose air suddenly when driven

over potholes or other objects or if the

vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert also

provides visual and audible signals out-

side the vehicle for inflating the tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. For

additional information, refer to “TPMS

with Easy-Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

•

Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

•

The Gross Vehicle Weight rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight ca-

pacity is indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

Do not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced tire

life, unsafe operating conditions

due to premature tire failure, or

unfavorable handling character-

istics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading be-

yond the specified capacity may

also result in failure of other ve-

hicle components.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-27

•

Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

•

For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire and Loading Information Label

䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can be

seated in the vehicle.

䊊

Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

䊊

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are

cold. Tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been parked for

3 or more hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The recommended cold tire inflation

is set by the manufacturer to provide

the best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

䊊

Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped)

䊊

Vehicle load limit: For additional in-

formation, refer to “Vehicle loading

information” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of

this manual.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge securely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem sideways,

otherwise air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure, re-

position the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare it to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as necessary. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of the

gauge stem to release pressure. Re-

check the pressure and add or release

air as necessary.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all of the tires.

SIZE

COLD TIRE

INFLATION

PRESSURE

FRONT

ORIGI-

NAL TIRE

P205/55R16

89H

250 kPa,

36 PSI

FRONT

ORIGI-

NAL TIRE

P215/50R17

90V

250 kPa,

36 PSI

REAR

ORIGI-

NAL TIRE

P205/55R16

89H

250 kPa,

36 PSI

REAR

ORIGI-

NAL TIRE

P215/50R17

90V

250 kPa,

36 PSI

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-29

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

䊊

Tire size (example: P215/

60R16 94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles. (Not all

tires have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of the

tire from sidewall edge to sidewall

edge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (16): This number is

the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not find

this information on all tires because it

is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example

8-30 Maintenance and do-it yourself

䊊

TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identi-

fication mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

5. Four numbers represent the week and

year the tire was built. For example, the

numbers 3103 means the 31st week

of 2003. If these numbers are missing,

then look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

䊊

Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

䊊

Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount of

air pressure that should be put in the

tire. Do not exceed the maximum per-

missible inflation pressure.

䊊

Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that can

be carried by the tire. When replacing

the tires on the vehicle, always use a

tire that has the same load rating as the

factory installed tire.

䊊

Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an

inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tube-

less”).

䊊

The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire

has radial structure.

䊊

Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Example

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-31

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-

ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

• When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(Example: Summer, All Season or

Snow) and construction. A NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer may be able to

help you with information about tire

type, size, speed rating and availabil-

ity.

• Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

• For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

(Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires

have better snow traction than All Season tires

and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed rat-

ings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the

tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may

be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it yourself

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions.

Use only SAE Class S chains. Class “S”

chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to

vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class

“S” chains are designed to meet the SAE stan-

dard minimum clearances between the tire and

the closest vehicle suspension or body compo-

nent required to accommodate the use of a win-

ter traction device (tire chains or cables) . The

minimum clearances are determined using the

factory equipped tire size. Other types may dam-

age your vehicle.

Use chain tensioners when recommended by the

tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose

end links of the tire chain must be secured or

removed to prevent the possibility of whipping

action damage to the fenders or underbody. If

possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when

using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged

and/or vehicle handling and performance may be

adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

tire chains in such conditions can cause damage

to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

using a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (112 N·m)

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-33

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to the specification at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts

be tightened to the specification at

each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

•

After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

•

Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

•

For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

WARNING

•

Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulg-

ing or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

•

The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

•

Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, over 6 years old

checked by a qualified techni-

cian, because some tire damage

may not be obvious. Replace the

tires as necessary to prevent tire

failure and possible personal in-

jury.

•

For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. For additional information,

refer to “Specifications” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual for

recommended types and sizes of tires and

wheels.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it yourself

WARNING

• The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system, ground clearance, body-

to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,

speedometer calibration, headlight

aim and bumper height. Some of these

effects may lead to accidents and

could result in serious personal injury.

• If your vehicle was originally equipped

with four tires that were the same size

and you are only replacing two of the

four tires, install the new tires on the

rear axle. Placing new tires on the front

axle may cause loss of vehicle control

in some driving conditions and cause

an accident and personal injury.

• If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade

vehicle handling characteristics, affect

the VDC system and/or interference

with the brake discs. Such interference

can lead to decreased braking effi-

ciency and/or early brake pad/shoe

wear. For additional information on

wheel-off set dimensions, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

• When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will

not function when a wheel is replaced,

the TPMS will not function and the low

tire pressure warning light will flash

for approximately 1 minute. The light

will remain on after 1 minute. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for this service.

• Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

• The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it

is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

• When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer for ID registra-

tion.

• Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

• Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and cause

a malfunction or loss of pressure.

• Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail with-

out warning.

• The use of retread tire is not recom-

mended.

• For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Maintenance and do-it yourself 8-35

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

For additional information on care of wheels, refer

to “Cleaning exterior” in the “Appearance and

care” section of this manual.

EMERGENCY TIRE PUNCTURE

REPAIR KIT

The emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emer-

gency Tire Sealant) is supplied with the vehicle

instead of a spare tire. It can be used to tempo-

rarily repair minor tire punctures.

If possible, have the vehicle towed to a facility that

can repair or replace the flat tire. Using the emer-

gency tire puncture repair kit may cause a mal-

function of the tire pressure sensor and cause the

low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.

For additional information, refer to “Flat tire” in the

“In case of emergency” section of this manual.

8-36 Maintenance and do-it yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities .....9-2

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant

recommendations .....................9-3

Specifications .........................9-4

Charging system .....................9-4

Motor ............................9-5

Wheels and tires .....................9-5

Dimensions and weights .................9-5

When traveling or registering in another country .....9-6

Vehicle identification .....................9-6

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate .......9-6

Vehicle identification number (chassis number). . . .9-6

Traction motor serial number ..............9-7

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S certification label ........9-7

Emission control information label ...........9-7

Tire and Loading Information label ...........9-8

Air conditioner specification label............9-8

Installing front license plate .................9-8

Vehicle loading information .................9-9

Terms ............................9-9

Vehicle load capacity ..................9-10

Loading tips .......................9-12

Measurement of weights ................9-12

Towing a trailer........................9-13

Flat towing ..........................9-13

Uniform tire quality grading.................9-13

Treadwear ........................9-13

Traction AA, A, B and C ................9-13

Temperature A, B and C ................9-14

Reporting safety defects ..................9-14

Telematics overview

(models with navigation system) .............9-15

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...............9-17

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information. . .9-18

Charging information ....................9-19

Cold tire pressures .....................9-21

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure that

is described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluid/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Coolant

With reservoir 5.3 L 5-5/8 qt 4-5/8 qt • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent

Reservoir 0.5 L 1/2 qt 1/2 qt

Reduction gear fluid 1.4 L 1-1/2 qt 1-1/4 qt

• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

• Using reduction gear fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

will cause deterioration in driveability and reduction gear durability,

and may damage the reduction gear, which is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Brake fluid

Refill to the proper level according to the instruc-

tions in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid (Available in

mainland US through a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer) or equivalent

DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner specification label”

in this section.

Air conditioning system lubricants — — —

• With heater pump use NISSAN A/C System Oil ND-OIL11 or

equivalent.

• Without heater pump use NISSAN A/C System Oil AE10 or

equivalent.

Windshield washer fluid (US) 2.5 L 5/8 gal 1/2 gal

• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

Windshield washer fluid (Canada) 4.5 L 1–1/4 gal 1 gal

• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

9-2 Technical and consumer information

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant, HFC-134a (R-134a), and the compres-

sor oil, ND-OIL11 (with heater pump), AE10

(without heater pump) or the equivalent.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will

cause severe damage to the air condi-

tioning system and will require the re-

placement of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant, HFC-134a (R-134a), in your

NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental regu-

lations require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioning

system service. A NISSAN certified LEAF dealer

has the trained technicians and equipment

needed to recover and recycle your air condition-

ing system refrigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer when servicing your air condi-

tioning system.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

CHARGING SYSTEM

Rated input voltage AC120V (single phase), AC240V (single phase)

Rated input frequency 60Hz

Maximum rated current 12A AC120V, 18A (AC240V), 32A (AC220V; if so equipped)

Charging modes/Types of connection

AC Level 2 (Normal charge with home installation type EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment))

DC Charging (Quick charge)

Required installation (over current protection)

The methods of protection against over current and over voltage shall be in accordance with national codes.

Suitable over current protection devices for the wiring of houses or buildings shall be installed.

IP Degree IP55: EV (Electric Vehicle) charging port in road position

Operating temperature Same as vehicle operating temperature

Storage temperature Same as vehicle storage temperature

Rated input voltage

Rate input frequency

AC220V (single phase), AC240V (single

phase)

60Hz

Applicable standards

SAE J1772: 2010

EN61851-1: 2011

EN61851-21: 2002

IEC61851-1: 2010

IEC61851-21: 2001

EN61000-6-1: 2007

EN61000-6-3: 2007

Adapters Do not use an extension cable or electrical adaptor.

SPECIFICATIONS

9-4 Technical and consumer information

MOTOR

Model EM57

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in

(mm)

Steel 16 × 6 1/2JJ 1.57 (40)

Aluminum 16 × 6 1/2J 1.57 (40)

Aluminum 17 × 6 1/2J 1.77 (45)

Tire

Tire Size

All season P205/55R16 89H

All season P215/50R17 90V

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length

With front license plate bracket in (mm) 175.0 (4,445)

Without front license plate

bracket

in (mm) 174.8 (4,440)

Overall width in (mm) 69.7 (1,770)

Overall height in (mm) 61.0 (1,550)

Front tread

16 inch wheels in (mm) 60.6 (1,540)

17 inch wheels in (mm) 60.2 (1,530)

Rear tread

16 inch wheels in (mm) 60.4 (1,535)

17 inch wheels in (mm) 60.0 (1,525)

Wheelbase in (mm) 106.3 (2,700)

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR)

lb (kg)

Refer to the F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. certifi-

cation label on the driver’s side center pillar.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

Technical and consumer information 9-5

When planning to travel in another country,

you should first find out if the charging equipment

is compatible with that country’s electrical sys-

tem.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle safety

standards vary according to the country, state,

province or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-

tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district and

registered, its modifications, transporta-

tion, and registration are the responsibility

of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for

any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is at-

tached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(CHASSIS NUMBER)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

Remove the cover to access the number.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-6 Technical and consumer information

TRACTION MOTOR SERIAL

NUMBER

The serial number of the traction motor is

stamped on the traction motor as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification

label is affixed as shown. This label contains

valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown in

the illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label affixed to the driver’s

side center pillar as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is attached

to the underside of the hood as shown in the

illustration.

Perform the following procedure to mount the

license plate.

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the plastic

bag.

• License plate bracket

䊊

• Screw ×2

1. Adjust the license plate bracket

䊊

at the

location (small dimples).

2. Mark along both sides of the mounting holes

and license plate screw holes using a felt-tip

pen.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

9-8 Technical and consumer information

3. Remove the license plate bracket

䊊

and

connect the arcs from the ovals. Mark the

point in the center of each oval. These are the

screw installation locations.

4. Install the license plate with two 0.23 in

(6 mm) screws.

WARNING

•

It is extremely dangerous to ride

in the cargo area inside the ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

•

Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

•

Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

• Curb Weight (actual weight of your ve-

hicle) - vehicle weight including: stan-

dard and optional equipment, fluids and

emergency tools. This weight does not

include passengers and cargo.

• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of pas-

sengers and cargo.

• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -

maximum total combined weight of the

unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other

optional equipment. This information is

located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

label.

• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle.

• This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

• GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat-

ing) - The maximum total weight rating of

the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and

trailer.

• Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, To-

tal load capacity - maximum total weight

limit specified of the load (passengers

and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-9

maximum combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo that can be loaded into

the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a

trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be

included as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

• Cargo capacity - permissible weight of

cargo, the subtracted weight of occu-

pants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-

hicle shown as “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed

the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the follow-

ing illustration.

9-10

Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be rid-

ing in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the XXX

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there

will be five 150 lb. passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or

(640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity calculated in

Step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Technical and consumer information 9-11

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Mea-

surement of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. For additional information, refer to

the “Tire and Loading Information label” in

this section.

LOADING TIPS

• The GVW must not exceed the GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

• Do not load the front and rear axle to the

GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

•

Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

•

Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle

can break, tire damage could oc-

cur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

•

Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can cause un-

safe vehicle handling and longer

braking distances. This may

cause a premature tire failure,

which could result in a serious

accident and personal injury.

Failures caused by overloading

are not covered by the vehicle’s

warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight

Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle

loads should not exceed the Gross Ve-

hicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These rat-

ings are given on the vehicle certification

label. If weight ratings are exceeded,

move or remove items to bring all weights

below the ratings.

9-12

Technical and consumer information

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is typically used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

• Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe reduction gear dam-

age.

• DO NOT tow this vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat towing).

• For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing your vehicle” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon actual conditions of their use however, and

may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire’s

ability to stop on wet pavement as measured

TOWING A TRAILER FLAT TOWING UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 9-13

under controlled conditions on specified govern-

ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and

C, representing the tire’s resistance to the gen-

eration of heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels

of performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly in-

flated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination,

can cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236

(TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from http://

www.safercar.gov.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

9-14 Technical and consumer information

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform Transport Canada in addition

to notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-

duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-

port Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-

fect Investigations and Recalls Division

toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may

also report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng

(English speakers) or

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/

7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra

(French speakers)

Additional information concerning motor

vehicle safety may be obtained from

Transport Canada’s Road Safety Informa-

tion Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online

at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety

(English speakers) or

www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Information

Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

In addition to Event Data Recorders (EDRs) men-

tioned in this Owner’s Manual, this vehicle is

equipped with electronic modules that monitor,

control and record data concerning various ve-

hicle systems, including the motor, batteries,

braking and electrical systems. Other electronic

modules record information concerning driving

conditions, including idling, braking, accelera-

tion, trip and other related data, information about

your use of the car and its features such as air

conditioner or headlight usage, diagnostic

trouble codes, vehicle charging, vehicle speed,

direction and/or location.

Some of this data is stored by the vehicle for use

during vehicle servicing. Other data concerning

your vehicle’s operation and performance is wire-

lessly transmitted by cellular connection through

the vehicle onboard telematics system upon ve-

hicle start-up or at other intervals to NISSAN.

This data may be used by NISSAN for various

purposes, including: to provide you with Nissan-

Connect

EV Services (For additional informa-

tion, refer to “LEAF Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”.); troubleshooting; evaluation of your ve-

hicle’s quality, functionality and performance;

analysis and research by NISSAN designed to,

among other things, optimize performance of fu-

ture electric vehicles including improvements in

TELEMATICS OVERVIEW (MODELS

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM)

Technical and consumer information 9-15

future battery life; to offer you new or additional

products or services; and as otherwise may be

required by law. Such data may be shared with

NISSAN’s parents, subsidiaries, affiliates, suc-

cessors or assignees; authorized NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealers; NISSAN’s marketing partners;

your fleet company, if your vehicle is a fleet ve-

hicle; your rental company, if your vehicle is a

rental vehicle; and third party service providers

such as cellular, information systems and data

management providers.

State and provincial laws allow access and use of

data recorded by vehicle devices with the con-

sent of the vehicle owner or pursuant to subscrip-

tion agreement. While you are not required to

allow such access and use, if you do not so agree

NISSAN may be unable under applicable law to

activate the vehicle telematics system in your

vehicle, and certain features of your vehicle which

are dependent on vehicle telematics will not op-

erate as intended or designed. These may in-

clude features such as automatic charging sta-

tion map updates, remote battery state of charge

check, charging complete notice, remote plug in

reminder, remote charging on, remote climate

control on, drive route planning, driving tips to

improve range, driving history, billing simulation,

ECO ranking, ECO forest, maintenance remind-

ers, etc. Other features that may be developed

and offered by NISSAN in the future may also not

function without telematics data transmission.

NissanConnect

EV Services telematics ser-

vices are provided by NISSAN pursuant to a

subscription services agreement covering your

vehicle. This agreement is necessary for all own-

ers. This agreement, and an explanation of its

terms and conditions, can be found at the

NISSAN Owner’s Portal webpage. Further, the

operator of the vehicle must also touch [OK] on

the Navi screen to indicate assent each time he or

she starts the car. If you decide at any time that

you do not want your vehicle to transmit data to

NISSAN, you can deactivate the telematics ac-

count associated with this vehicle by canceling

the subscription services agreement by visiting

the NISSAN Owner’s Portal Webpage or calling

NISSAN at 1-877-NOGASEV

(1-877-664-2738). The service can be reacti-

vated later upon request if you choose. Simply

visit the same website or call the number above.

Alternatively, you can turn off the transmission of

certain categories of data through the use of

settings found in the Navigation system under

Menu, NissanConnect

EV Services, Vehicle

Information Sharing with NISSAN. Note, turning

off “Vehicle Information Sharing with NISSAN”

will only disable the automatic sharing of informa-

tion at vehicle start-up. Certain categories of data

may still be transmitted if vehicle telematics fea-

tures are accessed either in the vehicle or re-

motely.

Your agreement to the transmission and use of

data by NISSAN can be provided in various ways.

The vehicle is equipped with a “pop up” screen

on the vehicle navigation system that will ask for

your consent to this data transfer. A version of the

following message will appear: “Pursuant to sub-

scription agreement, your vehicle wirelessly

transmits recorded vehicle data to NISSAN for

various purposes, including NissanConnect

EV Services, product evaluation, research and

development. By touching OK, you consent to

the transmission and use of your vehicle data.

See Owner’s Manual or NISSAN Owner’s portal

webpage for terms and details.” If you touch

[OK], your vehicle will transmit data as designed

in connection with the vehicle telematics system.

If you touch [Decline] your vehicle will not trans-

mit data. However, the telematics features refer-

enced above, and perhaps others, will not be

available to you. The vehicle’s static navigation

system will remain operational, and you will be

able to access your radio and climate controls.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Telematics features are dependent on cellular

data transmission. Some areas may have limited

or no cellular connectivity, resulting in a loss or

interruption of data transmission and, as a result,

certain features may be temporarily unavailable.

Even if areas with good signal reception, cellular

connectivity can be adversely affected by things

such as tall buildings, apartments, tunnels, un-

derground parking, mountainous areas, etc. Even

if the signal strength bar of the in-vehicle data

communication module indicates good recep-

tion, connectivity may be disrupted. This does not

indicate a malfunction. Operate the system again

after a few minutes to restore connectivity. Nis-

sanConnect

EV Services telematics features

are offered as a convenience to the vehicle

owner. NISSAN is not responsible for, and owner

assumes all risk of, interruptions in service or

errors based on incomplete or inaccurate data.

NissanConnect

EV Services communications

may be received at a verified e-mail address or by

SMS/text messaging-enabled mobile phone.

Standard text rates and/or data usage may apply

depending on your carrier.

If your vehicle’s telematics account is active, and

you are not the original owner, please contact

NISSAN at the website or phone number above

as soon as possible to update the telematics

enrollment information. Upon sale of the vehicle,

please contact NISSAN at the website or phone

number above so that NISSAN’s records may be

updated. NissanConnect

EV Services sub-

scription services will automatically terminate at

the end of the initial free term if you do not wish to

renew your subscription agreement at the prices

then in effect.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-

ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety

belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

• Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and

injuries occur.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 9-17

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only

if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no

data are recorded by the EDR under normal

driving conditions and no personal data

(for example, name, gender, age and crash

location) are recorded. However, other par-

ties, such as law enforcement, could com-

bine the EDR data with the type of person-

ally identifying data routinely acquired

during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition

to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

certified LEAF dealer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if

they have access to the vehicle or the

EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with

the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee

or as otherwise required or permitted by

law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model

year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine

NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of

service and repair information for your vehicle.

This manual is the same one used by the factory

trained technicians working at a NISSAN certi-

fied LEAF dealer. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s

Manuals can also be purchased.

For USA:

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada:

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual for this model

year and prior, please contact a NISSAN certified

LEAF dealer. For the phone number and location

of a NISSAN certified LEAF dealer in your area,

call the NISSAN Information Center at

1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN repre-

sentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

9-18 Technical and consumer information

CHARGING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-19

9-20 Technical and consumer information

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES

Technical and consumer information 9-21

NOTES

9-22 Technical and consumer information

10 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)........5-22

Advanced air bag system ...........1-44

Air bag system .................1-44

Advanced air bag system ..........1-44

Front passenger air bag and status light. .1-46

Front-seat mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system ........1-52

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag system ........1-52

Airbagwarninglabels.............1-55

Airbagwarninglight...........1-55,2-19

Air conditioner ..................9-8

Air conditioner specification label ......9-8

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations .........9-3

Alarm, How to stop alarm (refer to, vehicle

security system).................2-38

Alcohol, drugs and driving ............5-6

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-22

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light.......................2-14

Appearance care .................7-2

Exterior appearance care ...........7-2

Interior appearance care ...........7-4

AroundView®Monitor.............4-11

Audible reminders ...............2-22

Audio System (models without Navigation

System).....................4-42

Autolight system ................2-43

Automatic.....................3-6

Door locks ...................3-6

Automatic climate control (models with

Navigation System) ...............4-33

Automatic climate control (models without

Navigation System) ...............4-26

Avoiding collision and rollover ..........5-5

Battery......................8-12

12-volt battery ................8-12

Battery saver system ............2-45

Intelligent Key battery ............8-20

Li-ion battery.................EV-2

Li-ion battery temperature gauge ......2-7

Before starting system .............5-11

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System ...............4-76

Bluetooth® hands-free phone system without

navigation system................4-62

Bluetooth® streaming audio (models without

Navigation System) ...............4-59

Boosterseats..................1-35

Brake ......................5-15

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-22

Brake fluid ..................8-10

Brakes ....................8-16

Brake system ................5-21

BRAKE system warning light (yellow) . . .2-15

BRAKE warning light (red) .........2-15

BRAKE system warning light (yellow) .....2-15

BRAKE warning light (red) ...........2-15

Bulbreplacement................8-22

CarphoneorCBradio.............4-62

Ceiling light ...................2-59

Charge .....................2-51

Charge timer OFF switch ..........2-51

Charge connector lock switch .........2-50

Charge port lid switch .............2-50

Charging ....................3-19

Chargeportlid................3-19

Charging related indicator light .....CH-27

Chargingtimer ..............CH-21

Normalcharge...............CH-9

Precautions on charging ..........CH-2

Quickcharge...............CH-15

Specifications .................9-4

Trickle charge ...............CH-11

Charging methods...............CH-21

Chargingrelatedindicatorlight........CH-27

Charging related remote function ......CH-26

Charging status indicator light ........CH-27

Chargingtimer.................CH-21

Charging troubleshooting guide .......CH-32

Checking .....................2-13

Checkingbulbs................2-13

Checkingcoolantlevel.............8-9

Child restraints..................1-18

Boosterseats.................1-35

Precautions on child restraints .......1-19

Top tether strap................1-23

Childsafety....................1-16

Child safety rear door lock ............3-6

Circuit breaker, Fusible link ...........8-18

Cleaning exterior and interior ........7-2,7-4

Climatecontrol..................4-41

Climate control service............4-41

Climate control system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations .........4-41

Climate control system .............4-22

Climate control operation ..........4-22

Climate Ctrl. Timer ............4-29,4-36

Clock.......................2-11

Clock setting (models without Navigation

System)......................4-51

Cold weather driving...............5-26

Consolebox...................2-55

Coolant.......................8-9

Changingcoolant...............8-9

Checking coolant level.............8-9

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities....................9-2

Cooling system ..................8-8

Corrosion protection ...............7-7

Cruisecontrol..................5-16

Cupholders...................2-52

Defroster switch, Rear window and outside

mirror defroster switch..............2-42

Dimensionsandweights.............9-5

Display, vehicle information ...........2-23

Doors........................3-4

Driving ......................5-26

Cold weather driving .............5-26

Driving vehicle ................5-11

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2

Driving range....................2-8

Driving vehicle ..................5-11

ECO .......................2-48

ECO switch..................2-48

ECOindicator..................2-10

Efficient use of your vehicle ..........EV-23

Emergencycharge ..............CH-11

Emergency EV (Electric Vehicle)

shutoff...................5-10,6-3

Emergency shutoff system ...........EV-9

Emission control information label ........9-7

EV Characteristics ...............EV-9

Event Data Recorder (EDR)...........9-17

EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply

Equipment)...................CH-11

EV system ....................EV-2

EV unique information .............EV-25

Flashers (Refer to hazard warning flasher

switch) .......................6-2

Flat tire .......................6-3

Flattowing....................9-13

Floormatcleaning.................7-5

Fluid........................8-10

Brake fluid...................8-10

coolant.....................8-8

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities....................9-2

Reduction gear fluid .............8-10

Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-11

FM/AM/SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD)

Player .......................4-50

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .....9-7

Foglightswitch.................2-46

10-2 Index

Front manual seat adjustment ..........1-3

Front passenger air bag and status light ....1-46

Front seat, Front seat adjustment ........1-3

Fuses.......................8-17

Fusiblelinks...................8-18

Garage door open, HomeLink® Universal . . .2-60

Transceiver ..................2-60

Gauge.......................2-8

Driving range ..................2-8

ECOindicator ................2-10

Li-ion battery available charge gauge.....2-9

Li-ion battery capacity level gauge .....2-10

Li-ion battery temperature gauge .......2-7

Odometer....................2-6

Power meter ..................2-7

Speedometer..................2-6

Generalmaintenance...............8-2

Glovebox.....................2-54

Hazard warning flasher switch ..........6-2

Headlights ....................8-22

Bulb replacement...............8-22

Headlightswitch...............2-43

Heatedseatswitch...............2-48

Heated steering wheel switch .........2-46

Highvoltageprecautions............EV-7

HillStart.....................5-25

Hill Start Assist..................5-25

HomeLink® universal transceiver........2-60

Hood release...................3-17

Horn .......................2-47

How to normal charge .............CH-9

How to quick charge .............CH-15

How to trickle charge (if so equipped)....CH-11

If the Li-ion battery becomes completely

discharged ....................6-12

Immediate charge ...............CH-25

Immobilizer system................2-38

Indicatorlights..................2-20

Indicators for operation .............2-24

Inside rearview mirror ..............3-23

Instrument brightness control ..........2-42

Intelligent Key system ..............3-13

Remote keyless operation ..........3-13

Interior light replacement ............8-24

Interior lights ...................2-59

iPod® player operation (models without

Navigation System) ...............4-57

ISOFIX child restraint ..............1-21

Jump starting ...................6-10

Keyless entry ...................3-13

With Intelligent Key system (Refer to Intelligent

Key system) ..................3-13

Keys........................3-2

For Intelligent Key system ...........3-6

Labels.......................1-55

Airbagwarninglabels............1-55

Air conditioner specification label.......9-8

Emission control information label ......9-7

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . .9-7

Motor serial number ..............9-7

Tire and Loading Information Label .....8-28

Tire and Loading information label ......9-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ......9-6

LATCH system ..................1-21

License plate, Installing front license plate . . .9-8

Light .......................1-55

Airbagwarninglight.............1-55

Bulb replacement...............8-22

Ceiling light ..................2-59

Fog light switch................2-46

Index 10-3

Headlights bulb replacement ........8-22

Headlightswitch...............2-43

Indicatorlights................2-20

Interior lights .................2-59

Maplights...................2-59

Replacement .................8-22

Warninglights ................2-13

Light reminder warning .............2-25

Lights, Exterior and interior light

replacement ...................8-24

Li-ion battery ...................EV-2

Li-ion battery available charge gauge ......2-9

Li-ion battery capacity level gauge .......2-10

Li-ion battery status check ..........CH-26

Li-ion battery temperature gauge.........2-7

Li-ion battery warmer ..............EV-5

Limited power ..................2-34

Loading information (Refer to vehicle loading

information) ....................9-9

Lock ........................3-6

Automatic door locks .............3-6

Door locks ...................3-4

Power door lock ................3-4

Rearhatchlock................3-18

Low tire pressure warning light .........2-17

Low tire pressure warning system (Refer to

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)) . . .5-2

Maintenance...................8-12

12-volt battery ................8-12

General maintenance .............8-2

Indicators for maintenance..........2-35

Insidevehicle..................8-3

Maintenanceprecautions...........8-5

Maintenance requirements ..........8-2

Outside vehicle.................8-2

Seat belt maintenance ............1-15

Manual front seat adjustment...........1-3

Maplights ....................2-59

Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) .....3-3

Mirror .......................3-23

Inside rearview mirror.............3-23

Outside mirrors ................3-25

Vanity mirror..................3-22

Motor....................5-11,9-5

Before starting system ............5-11

Motor compartment ................8-7

NISSAN Intelligent Key® system ......3-6,5-7

Key operating range of the door

lock/unlock function ..............3-8

Key operation..................3-9

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ......2-38

Nissan Voice Recognition System .......4-76

Normal charge..................CH-9

Home charge ................CH-9

Occasional charge .............CH-9

Publiccharge ................CH-9

Odometer .....................2-6

Off-road recovery .................5-5

Oil .........................9-2

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities....................9-2

Openingrearhatch...............3-11

Outside air temperature .............2-10

Outside mirrors .................3-25

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ....................9-18

Panic alarm....................3-15

Parking ......................5-15

Parking on hills ................5-19

Parking brake break-in..............5-22

Power .......................3-4

Power door lock ................3-4

Power steering system ............5-20

Power windows................2-56

Powereconomy.................5-18

Powermeter....................2-7

10-4 Index

Poweroutlet...................2-51

Power steering system .............5-20

Powerswitch.................5-7,5-8

Precautions....................5-21

Brake precautions ..............5-21

Charging...................CH-2

Child restraints ................1-19

Cruisecontrol.................5-16

High voltage precautions ..........EV-7

Maintenance ..................8-5

Road accident precautions .........EV-8

Seatbeltusage ................1-8

Supplemental restraint system........1-39

When starting and driving ...........5-2

Push starting ...................6-13

Quickcharge .................CH-15

Rapidairpressureloss..............5-6

Rearcenterseatbelt ..............1-14

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock . . .3-6

Rear hatch ....................3-18

Rearseats.....................1-4

RearView Monitor .................4-3

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.......................2-42

Rear window wiper and washer switch ....2-41

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities .....................9-2

Reduction gear fluid ...............8-10

Remote charge ................CH-26

Remote climate control .............4-39

Remote keyless entry function, For Intelligent

Key system ....................3-13

Repairing flat tire .................6-4

Repairing tire ...................6-6

Reporting safety defects ............9-14

Road accident precautions ...........EV-8

Roadside assistance program ..........6-2

Rollover ......................5-5

Safety.......................1-16

Childseatbelts................1-16

Reporting safety defects ...........9-14

Sceneguide..................EV-22

At home after driving ............EV-22

Before driving your vehicle (models with

navigation system) .............EV-13

Charging the Li-ion battery.........EV-10

Driving the vehicle .............EV-18

Parking the vehicle .............EV-21

Starting your vehicle ............EV-17

Seat adjustment ..................1-3

Front manual seat adjustment .........1-3

Front seats ...................1-3

Seat belt(s)....................1-16

Child safety ..................1-16

Infants.....................1-17

Injured persons ................1-11

Larger children ................1-17

Precautions on seat belt usage ........1-8

Pregnant women ...............1-11

Rearcenterseatbelt.............1-14

Seat belt cleaning ...............7-6

Seat belt extenders..............1-15

Seat belt hook ................1-15

Seat belt maintenance ............1-15

Seatbelts....................1-8

Seatbeltswithpretensioners........1-54

Seatbeltwarninglight............2-19

Shoulder belt height adjustment.......1-14

Small children.................1-17

Three-pointtype...............1-11

Seat(s), Seats ...................1-2

Heatedseats.................2-48

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), EV system start ............2-38

Servicing climate control ............4-41

Shifting ......................5-11

Electric shift control system .........5-11

Shoulder belt height adjustment, For front

seats .......................1-14

Solar cell module (if so equipped) ........7-3

Speedometer ...................2-6

Index 10-5

Starting ......................5-11

Before starting system ............5-11

Jump starting .................6-10

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2

Push starting .................6-13

Status light, Front passenger air bag ......1-46

Steering .....................2-46

Heated steering wheel ............2-46

Power steering system ............5-20

Tilting steering column ............3-21

Steering wheel switch for audio control ....4-60

Stoppingthevehicle ...............6-5

Storage......................2-52

Stowing golf bags ................2-56

Sun visors ....................3-22

Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-55

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-55, 2-19

Supplemental restraint system .........1-39

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system.....................1-39

Switch ......................2-43

Autolightswitch................2-43

ChargetimerOFFswitch..........2-51

ECOswitch..................2-48

Foglightswitch................2-46

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Headlightswitch...............2-43

Power door lock switch ............3-5

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.....................2-42

Turnsignalswitch ..............2-45

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch.....................2-49

Telematics overview ...............9-15

Temperature ....................2-7

Li-ion battery temperature gauge .......2-7

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

traction motor start................2-38

Tilt steering column ...............3-21

Tire........................2-17

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-17

Tires........................6-3

Flat tire .....................6-3

Low tire pressure warning system ......5-2

Tire and Loading Information Label .....8-28

Tire and Loading information label ......9-8

Tirechains ..................8-33

Tire dressing ..................7-4

Tire pressure .................8-29

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). . .6-3

Tire rotation ..................8-33

Types of tires .................8-32

Uniform tire quality grading .........9-13

Wheels and tires ...............8-26

Wheel/tire size .................9-5

Tonneau cover ..................2-55

Top........................1-23

Tether strap child restraints .........1-23

Towing......................9-13

Flattowing..................9-13

Towing a trailer ................9-13

Towtrucktowing...............6-13

TPMS, Tire Pressure Monitoring System ....5-2

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system ......6-3

Traction motor ...................9-7

Traction motor serial number .........9-7

Trailer towing ...................9-13

Transceiver, HomeLink® Universal .......2-60

Transceiver ..................2-60

Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system

(Refer to Intelligent Key system) ........3-13

Trickle charge .................CH-11

Trip computer ..................2-28

Turn signal switch ................2-45

Type of charge and how to charge the Li-ion

battery ......................CH-5

Underbody cleaning................7-3

Uniform tire quality grading ...........9-13

Unplugged status ...............CH-26

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port

(models without Navigation System) ......4-55

10-6 Index

Vanity mirror ...................3-22

Vehicle .......................9-5

Dimensionsandweights............9-5

Identification number (VIN) ..........9-6

Loading information ..............9-9

Security system................2-37

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch.....................2-49

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . .5-24

Vehicle information display ...........2-23

Vehicle security system .............2-37

Vents.......................4-21

Warning......................6-2

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Indicators for operation ...........2-24

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). . .6-3

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...................2-12

Warning information displays ........2-33

Warninglights ................2-13

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ...................2-12

Warningandindicatorlights ..........0-11

Warning information displays ..........2-33

Warninglabels,Airbagwarninglabels.....1-55

Warninglight...................1-55

Airbagwarninglight .........1-55,2-19

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning

light......................2-14

BRAKE system warning light (yellow)....2-15

BRAKE warning light (red)..........2-15

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-17

Seatbeltwarninglight............2-19

Washerswitch..................2-41

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . .2-41

Windshieldwiperandwasherswitch....2-39

Washing......................7-2

Waxing .......................7-2

Weights (Refer to Dimensions and weights) . .9-5

Wheels and tires.................8-26

Careofwheels.................7-3

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels .......7-3

Wheel/tire size...................9-5

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country ..................9-6

Window(s) .....................7-3

Cleaning ....................7-3

Powerwindows................2-56

Windshield-washerfluid.............8-11

Windshield wiper and washer switch .....2-39

Wiper.......................8-14

Pulling up the wiper arm ...........8-14

Rear window wiper and washer switch . .2-41

Rear window wiper blade ..........8-16

Windshield wiper and washer switch ....2-39

Wiperblades .............8-13,8-15

Index 10-7

2017 LEAF

OWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2017 NISSAN LEAF ZEO-D

ZEO-D

'17

Printing : October 2016 (15)

Publication No.:

Printed in U.S.A.

OM17EA 0ZE0U0

Nissan 2017 Leaf Car

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Nissan 2017 Leaf Questions and Answers

Related Products

Nissan 2006 Nissan Titan Car

Nissan 2021 Kicks Car

Nissan 2012 Nissan Altima Coupe Car

Nissan 2018 Sentra Car

Nissan 2001 Xterra Car